diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 4 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/63173-8.txt | 5008 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/63173-8.zip | bin | 101002 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/63173-h.zip | bin | 716661 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/63173-h/63173-h.htm | 7492 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/63173-h/images/cover.jpg | bin | 102106 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/63173-h/images/i_004.jpg | bin | 100556 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/63173-h/images/i_094.jpg | bin | 97872 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/63173-h/images/i_126.jpg | bin | 100276 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/63173-h/images/i_cover.jpg | bin | 100998 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/63173-h/images/i_frontispiece.jpg | bin | 99105 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/63173-h/images/i_title.jpg | bin | 8149 -> 0 bytes |
14 files changed, 17 insertions, 12500 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d7b82bc --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +*.txt text eol=lf +*.htm text eol=lf +*.html text eol=lf +*.md text eol=lf diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5aced07 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #63173 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/63173) diff --git a/old/63173-8.txt b/old/63173-8.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 47265f6..0000000 --- a/old/63173-8.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,5008 +0,0 @@ -The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Son of Columbus, by Molly Elliot Seawell - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most -other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of -the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you'll have -to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook. - -Title: The Son of Columbus - -Author: Molly Elliot Seawell - -Release Date: September 10, 2020 [EBook #63173] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 - -*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE SON OF COLUMBUS *** - - - - -Produced by D A Alexander and the Online Distributed -Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net - - - - - - - - - - THE SON OF - COLUMBUS - - BY - - MOLLY ELLIOT SEAWELL - - AUTHOR OF - "THE LIVELY ADVENTURES OF GAVIN HAMILTON" - "THE ROCK OF THE LION" - "A VIRGINIA CAVALIER" ETC. - - ILLUSTRATED - - HARPER _&_ BROTHERS PUBLISHERS - NEW YORK AND LONDON - - MCMXII - - - - - COPYRIGHT, 1912, BY HARPER & BROTHERS - - PRINTED IN THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA - - PUBLISHED SEPTEMBER, 1912 - - - - - [Illustration: THEN, RISING, THE ADMIRAL TOOK HIS SON IN HIS ARMS] - [See page 205 - - - - - CONTENTS - - - CHAP. PAGE - I. LOOKING SEAWARD 1 - II. THE DAWNING OF THE LIGHT 24 - III. THE CASTLE OF LANGARA 49 - IV. THE LAST SIGH OF THE MOOR 72 - V. THE SPLENDOR OF THE DAWN 102 - VI. THE HARBOR BAR IS PASSED 134 - VII. THE JOYOUS HEARTS OF YOUTH 160 - VIII. SUNRISE OFF THE BAR OF SALTES 191 - IX. GLORIA 214 - - - - - ILLUSTRATIONS - - - THEN, RISING, THE ADMIRAL TOOK HIS SON IN HIS ARMS _Frontispiece_ - - FRAY PIŅA GLANCED WITHIN THE ROOM AND THOUGHT - THEY WERE MAKING ACQUAINTANCE VERY FAST _Facing p._ 4 - - GARCILOSA SUDDENLY GAVE HIS ANTAGONIST A THRUST - UPON THE SWORD-ARM " 94 - - THE SIGNING OF THE DOCUMENTS OF AGREEMENT " 126 - - - - -AUTHOR'S NOTE - - -Very few liberties have been taken with history, and these few are -merely of detail. The signing of the final pact with the Spanish -sovereigns by Columbus really took place on the plains of Santa Fé, -outside of Granada, but it is represented, for dramatic effect, as -taking place in the Alhambra. Also, the celebrated order of Columbus -directing his captains, after sailing seven hundred and fifty leagues -due west, to make no more sail after midnight was given at the Canaries -instead of at Palos. Irving's _Life of Columbus_, the best yet written, -has been strictly followed in dates. - - M. E. S. - - - - - THE - SON OF COLUMBUS - - - - -I - -LOOKING SEAWARD - - -On a bright October noon in 1491 two lads sat in a small tower room -in the monastery of La Rabida, talking together with that profound -interest which two human beings feel, who have recently met and whose -lives will be closely united for some time to come. One of them was Don -Felipe de Langara y Gama, already, at sixteen, the head of one of the -greatest ducal families in Castile. The other was Diego, the eldest son -of the Genoese navigator and map-maker, by name, Christopher Columbus, -or, as the Spaniards called him, Christobal Colon. - -The lads were fine types of two extremes of station. Diego was a -model of sturdy strength for his age. He inherited the piercing blue -eyes of the Genoese navigator--those commanding eyes, once seen, were -unforgettable. His fair skin was freckled by living much in the open, -and his wide, frank mouth expressed resolution as well as a charming -gaiety of heart. Diego, however, could be serious enough when occasion -required. He had known more in his short life of the rubs of fortune, -of hope deferred, of splendid dreams and heartbreaking disappointments, -of courts, of camps, of penury, of luxury, than many men know in the -course of a long span of years. - -Don Felipe, born in a palace and knowing that at sixteen he would -inherit the wealth and splendid honors of his dead father, the Duke -de Langara y Gama, was yet all simplicity and good sense. His slight -figure was more muscular than it appeared, and the softness of his -black eyes belied the firmness of his character. - -Both lads alike were dressed with extreme plainness, the grandee of -Spain wearing no better clothes than the son of the Genoese captain. -They were so absorbed in each other that they had no eyes for the -glowing scene visible through the iron-studded door, open wide upon -the parapet. Below them lay the green gardens and orchards of the -monastery. Beyond, stretched the town and the port of Palos, where the -masts and hulls of the caravels and other vessels of the time were -outlined against the deep sea and blue sky. Some of these vessels were -unloading, and others were taking on their cargoes, the sailors singing -cheerfully as they worked. Farther off still, the "white horses" of the -blue Atlantic dashed wildly over the bar of Saltes, the sun glittering -upon the crested waves. Over the whole of the Andalusian coast and the -rolling hills beyond was that atmosphere of peace and plenty which made -Andalusia to be called the Granary, the Wine Cellar, the Gold Purse, -and the Garden of Spain. - -The two lads were quite oblivious of all this, and even of the nearness -of their instructor, Fray Piņa, the young ecclesiastic who had charge -of them, and who was at that moment leaning over the parapet outside -the open door. Fray Piņa glanced within the room; he could not hear -what Diego and Don Felipe were saying, but it was evident from their -attitudes--both leaning eagerly across the rough table, strewn with -writing implements and the manuscript books of the period--that they -were deeply interested in each other. - -"They are making acquaintance very fast," thought Fray Piņa to himself. -"It is best to leave them alone. Don Felipe needs the companionship of -just such a boy as Diego, and Diego needs the companionship of just -such a boy as Don Felipe." - -It was this very point which the boys were discussing. - -"And so," Don Felipe was saying, "my mother, Doņa Christina, who is -obliged to be much at court, because she is a lady-in-waiting to Queen -Isabella, said the court was not a good place in which a youth should -be wholly brought up, especially a faithless youth like me. Nor does -my mother think it well to have my sister, Doņa Luisita, at court yet, -as she is but fourteen; so Luisita remains with her governess at the -castle of Langara when my mother attends the Queen. And my mother asked -Fray Piņa to take charge of me for a year, with another youth of my -age, and without rank; and we should be schooled together, and dress -plainly, and be disciplined." - -[Illustration: FRAY PIŅA GLANCED WITHIN THE ROOM AND THOUGHT THEY WERE -MAKING ACQUAINTANCE VERY FAST] - -"I think Fray Piņa is the man for discipline," replied Diego, laughing. -"And I suppose your lady mother knew that Fray Piņa would treat us -exactly alike--you, a grandee of Spain, and I, the son of the Genoese -navigator, Christobal Colon, as the Spaniards call my father. But look -you, Don Felipe, I am the son of the greatest man who ever trod Spanish -earth, and some day the world will know my father to be that man." - -As Diego said this he straightened up and looked Don Felipe in the -eye; he expected his statement to be questioned. Don Felipe, however, -surprised him by saying, quietly: - -"So Fray Piņa told Doņa Christina, my mother." - -A flush of gratified pride shone in Diego's frank face. - -"My father will still be the bravest navigator that ever lived, even -if he never returns from his voyage," continued Diego, proudly. "All -the other navigators in the world have been satisfied to creep along -the shores, never going out of sight of land. My father means to steer -straight into the uncharted seas, sailing due west. He will have but -two nautical instruments, a compass and an astrolabe, but he will have -the stars by night and the sun by day, and God's hand to help him--for -my father is a man who fears God and nothing else. He will steer due -west, and will come to a great continent with vast ranges of mountains, -superb rivers, larger and longer than any we know, huge bodies of -water, mines of gold and silver and minerals of all sorts, strange -birds, animals, and peoples--everything far more splendid than this old -Europe. All the seafaring men believe in my father--far more than the -learned men do--because the sailors know that my father understands -more about the seas than any living man. Already, although my father is -not an admiral, the captains and the pilots and the sailors at Palos -call him the Admiral. Every mariner in the port of Palos bows low to my -father." - -"But he will be an admiral before he sails," said Don Felipe, catching -Diego's enthusiasm. - -"Yes," answered Diego, "he demands that he shall become the Admiral -of the Ocean Seas, Viceroy and Captain-General over all the lands he -discovers. And also my father asks, if he goes on this great errand -for Spain, that I shall be taken to the court with you and become a -page-in-waiting to Prince Juan, the heir to the thrones of Arragon and -Castile. Is that much to ask? Well, my father will do ten thousand -times more for Spain." - -"Perhaps," said Don Felipe, after a pause, "that is why we are to be -schooled together and then go to court together. Are you frightened at -the thought of the court?" - -"No," answered Diego, sturdily. - -"I never heard," said Don Felipe, "of a foreigner and the son of a man -without rank being page to a royal prince." - -"It is the first time," said Diego, calmly, "and it will not often be -repeated. If the other pages, sons of the greatest nobles of Castile -and Arragon, dare to say anything to me about it I have my answer -ready. I will say, 'I am the son of a man who never said or did a base -thing in his life, who is courteous to a beggar, and not abashed in the -presence of kings and queens--for I have seen my father in the presence -of King Ferdinand and Queen Isabella--who honors God, and who is the -very boldest man that ever sailed blue water." - -"That is right," said Don Felipe, "but I can tell you, Diego, there -are a great many things at court that are not pleasant. You think Fray -Piņa is strict. He is not half as strict as the master of the pages at -court. For when anything goes wrong Fray Piņa will listen to an excuse, -but the master of the pages listens to no excuses. The pages of honor -are required to be on duty long hours and are not permitted to read or -do anything except to watch their royal masters and mistresses. They -must rise early and stay up late. They can have no games or amusements -except those which are permitted the royal princes. I warrant, Diego, -there will be many times when you will long for the fields and orchards -of La Rabida, the fishing in the summer, and being able to play with -any boy you may like, and to read a pleasant book when so inclined." - -"That may be true," replied Diego, stoutly, "but we shall have the -horse exercise and the sword exercise; we shall see much of soldiers, -and we shall enjoy living like men instead of like boys. But, after -all," he cried, laughing, "I am not yet at court. The King and Queen -are still considering whether they shall help my father. Only of one -thing I am certain--that my father will one day be a great discoverer." - -"I know it, too," said Don Felipe, with boyish confidence. "The very -first time I beheld your father I felt as I never did toward any man -before. I watched him, and listened to him, thinking to myself, 'When I -am an old man the boys will ask me, "Tell me when did you first see the -great Admiral?"' And I want you to tell me how you first came to this -place." - -"I remember it all well enough, although I was but a little lad of -seven--just as old as my little brother Fernando is now. I even -remember things before that--the life I led with my father, going from -place to place on foot, sleeping at the humblest inns and in the huts -of peasants, nobody willing to listen to my father. Then my father made -for the sea, there to take ship for England, and when we reached the -monastery gate I was half dead, I was so hungry and tired. My father -rang the bell and asked a little milk for me. It was brought me by -Brother Lawrence, the lay brother here; he was a young man then. Oh, -you will like Brother Lawrence--he is here still. While I was drinking -the milk, the Prior, Juan Perez, passed through the courtyard where we -sat and stopped and spoke to my father. I tell you this, Don Felipe, no -matter whether people believed in my father or not in those days, they -always treated him with personal respect. The Prior got in conversation -with my father, and in a little while told Brother Lawrence to take -care of me. Oh, what a happy day that was! All day Brother Lawrence -took care of me, playing ball in the orchard and teaching me to fish -in the fish-pond, and at night he put me to bed on a little pallet in -a room where my father was to sleep. All day the Prior had been with -my father, and I recollect that I was waked by my father coming into -the room, and the Prior followed him. It was as if he could not leave -my father. Then I went off to sleep, and in the middle of the night I -again waked, and my father and the Prior were still bending over the -maps and talking. I remember, however, I was such a little boy, that I -thought we should have to leave that happy place at daybreak and take -the road once more in weariness. But in the morning my father asked me: - -"'Diego, do you like this place?' - -"And I said yes, and I was so sorry we were going away, and he said: - -"'We shall remain here some days, my little Diego.' - -"That made me so happy! We stayed here fourteen days. I played all day -long in the orchard and by the fish-pond with Brother Lawrence. And -then there were other boys, the two Pinzons, Martin and Alonzo, and the -son of the physician Dr. Garcia, and the sons of the pilot Fernando -Rodriguez." - -Diego suddenly stopped talking. He had the instinctive good sense not -to talk too much about himself. - -"Go on," cried Don Felipe, "I want to know every word about your -father, everything that happened, so when I am an old man I shall be -able to tell people about the great Admiral." - -Diego's eyes shone, and he kept on. - -"All the seafaring men in Palos, especially the great ship-owners the -Pinzons and the pilot Rodriguez, were called to the monastery by the -Prior, and they all listened to my father and wondered and admired, -and told the Prior my father was right and by sailing to the westward -he would discover land. So, then, the Prior wrote a letter to the -great Queen Isabella, whom he knew, and sent it to her by Rodriguez -the pilot. Rodriguez came back saying the Queen commanded my father -to come to her at Cordova. He went to Cordova, and took me along. I -was sorry to leave Brother Lawrence and the boys I played with every -day. I do not recollect much about Cordova, I was such a little lad. -I thought I should see the great Queen Isabella with her crown on and -King Ferdinand with his scepter, and how surprised I was when I saw -only a gentle lady, very simply dressed, sitting with the King in -a small room. They were, however, on a dais, and I sat down on the -steps. Presently I fell asleep, and when I waked up my head was on the -Queen's knee, and she was looking down at me with smiling eyes. I do -not remember my own mother; but when I looked into the eyes of Queen -Isabella I knew what a mother's eyes were like. She was ever kind to -me later, in all the many times that my father wearily went to court -and followed the King and Queen about, even when encamped with their -soldiers." - -"When will your father return?" asked Don Felipe. - -"I do not know; but it will be soon, I think." - -As Diego spoke there was a sound of clattering hoofs on the stones of -the courtyard. - -"That is my father!" said Diego. - -At that moment Fray Piņa turned from the parapet and entered the room. -Instantly both lads bent over their books as if they had no thought but -study. Fray Piņa smiled slightly; they had not looked at a book since -their tutor had been out of the room. - -Fray Piņa took up a treatise on mathematics and began to question -the two boys. Neither of them did very well, their thoughts being -with the Admiral in the courtyard and the news he might bring from -Granada, where the siege of the Moorish city was in progress, and the -success he might have had with the Spanish sovereigns. But Fray Piņa -went on relentlessly. Diego felt as if he could scarcely remain in -his seat; and Don Felipe's eyes wandered everywhere, his wits going -with his eyes. At last a knock was heard at the door, and the ruddy, -good-natured, boyish face of Brother Lawrence, the young lay brother -who worked in the garden and milked the cows and attended to the mules, -appeared at the door. - -"His Excellency Christobal Colon," he said, giving Columbus the name -the Spaniards called him, "has arrived, and begs Fray Piņa to excuse -Diego for an hour." - -"You are excused," said Fray Piņa; and the next moment was heard the -sound of Diego's footsteps as he rushed down the stone stairs, two at a -time, and dashed into the sunny courtyard. - -Standing in the courtyard talking with the Prior, Juan Perez, was -Columbus. From him had Diego inherited the tall, slim, but muscular -figure. The hair of the great Admiral was quite white; his complexion -was weather-beaten; his eyes were the eyes of a man born a captain. -All masters of men have the indomitable eye--the eye whose glance -conveys the command of a master before the lips can speak the word. In -Columbus the power to command was writ large all over him--not only to -command others, but to command himself. - -Suddenly the little Fernando, seven years old, led by Brother Lawrence, -came into the courtyard and ran forward, and at the same moment Diego -appeared. Instantly the Admiral's stern face softened. He took the -little boy in his arms, kissing and blessing him, and then clasped -Diego to his breast. - -Diego caught his father in a strong embrace, and rubbed his smooth, -boyish cheek against the Admiral's bronzed face. - -The Admiral, as he was already popularly called, returned warmly the -boy's caress, and then, holding him off at arm's length, said to him: - -"How have you behaved since last I saw you?" - -"Not very well," answered Diego, candidly, looking into his father's -eyes. "It is so hard to study in sunny weather, and Don Felipe and I -went fishing and overstayed our time twice." - -The Admiral said nothing; and the Prior, a grave, handsome man, but not -unkindly in his aspect, looked hard at Diego. - -"Then," said Diego, after a pause, and forcing himself to speak, "the -first day Don Felipe came I found the Prior's mule at large, and Don -Felipe and I got Fray Piņa's mule out of the stable and ran races until -we were caught and stopped." - -"And punished," added the Prior, quietly. "But there has been no lying -or deceit or anything base in the conduct of your son, Christobal -Colon." - -"Then," answered the Admiral, "the rest is easily forgiven. Return now -to your studies, and when I have finished my conversation with the -Prior, and when Fray Piņa will give you leave, then will I speak with -you at length." - -The Admiral was more indulgent to the little Fernando, who remained, -clinging to his father's hand. - -Diego returned to the tower room quickly. He might have lagged, but -he knew that the Admiral's silent watchfulness followed him. When he -sat down again at the table he made an honest effort to concentrate -his mind on what Fray Piņa was saying, and managed to do so until the -mathematical lesson was over. Then was it time to go to the refectory -for dinner. The refectory was a large, bare room except for a long -table at which the monks dined. At the farther end sat the Prior with -the Admiral, as the guest of honor, on his right. No conversation was -allowed, and after grace was said one of the monks at a reading-desk -read aloud from the Scriptures while the simple meal went on. Diego -heard not one word of what was being read. He could only fix his eyes -upon his father, across whose gray head a beam of sunlight shone like -an aureole. The Admiral, however, put strict attention to the reading. -It was as if his extraordinary mind, like everything about him, were -under the control of his will and, as a revolving light, could be -turned at pleasure upon any subject. - -When dinner was over, the two youths expected, as usual, to be given an -hour's recreation in the sunny orchard in which was a fish-pond, that -was Diego's delight. But he was bitterly disappointed when Fray Piņa -said to him: - -"It was this day a week ago that you and Don Felipe raced the -mules. Let us go up to the study now and spend that wasted hour in -mathematics." - -Diego and Don Felipe exchanged rueful glances, but said nothing. Fray -Piņa had a deadly ingenuity in paying off for all their pranks, and had -no doubt waited for this day when the orchard and the fish-pond and the -blue sky called to the lads, "Come and be happy." Instead, however, of -talking and fishing and frolicking, as they usually did at that hour, -the two lads spent the time being put through their paces by Fray Piņa. -By the time they had answered one question another was propounded, and -the blackboard in the tower room was covered with figures. It was a -sort of mental exercise for Fray Piņa himself, and when the hour was -over Diego and Don Felipe were thoroughly tired out with hard work and -incessant figuring. - -Fray Piņa himself looked weary, and his black hair lay damp upon his -forehead under his skull-cap. - -"You have both done well," he said, "and showed more proficiency than -I expected. You may now have two hours' recreation instead of one. The -Prior's mule and mine are both in the stable, but I apprehend they are -both safe." - -Diego and Don Felipe hung their heads at this, but were glad to rush -into the fresh, bright air once more. - -In the kitchen garden, next the orchard, they found Brother Lawrence, -of whom both were fond. One of their favorite amusements was to engage -in wrestling bouts with Brother Lawrence. Diego was strong for his -age, and Don Felipe was a skilful wrestler; but they were no match for -the brawny lay brother, who, with his cassock tucked up, laid the two -youths out on the grass at his pleasure. - -At last came the message for which Diego had been longing, to go -to his father in the Admiral's room. Diego first ran to the little -room which he occupied with Don Felipe, and washed off the stains he -had encountered with the green earth, and put on a collar of clean -linen--the Admiral was irreproachably neat and always rebuked sternly -the least untidiness on the part of Diego. In a few minutes Diego -found himself in the guest-chamber with a window looking seaward. -The Admiral was gazing out toward the Atlantic with an expression of -concentration. His eyesight was extraordinarily strong and clear, and -at fifty-three he could see farther than Diego's young eyes. He turned -as Diego entered and clasped the boy in his arms. Grave as was the -great Admiral, no man had more in him of tenderness. The Admiral seated -himself in a great chair, and Diego, drawing up a stool, put his arm -about his father's neck and prepared to listen. - -"The time has come, Diego," said the Admiral, "when King Ferdinand and -Queen Isabella will redeem their promise. They told me that when the -end of the war to drive the Moors from Spain was in sight, they would -then provide me with ships for my enterprise. The Moors are now in -their death struggle in the city of Granada, their last stronghold. -The city is encompassed on every side; every gate is commanded and no -provisions can enter. Nor can the Moors make any sortie beyond the -Vega, because the armies of Castile and Arragon are encamped about -them, and the town of Santa Fé stands guard over the main gate of -Granada, called the Gate of Justice. The Moors cannot hold out longer -than the first of the year, and I think it well to be upon the spot -to remind the King and the Queen of their promise. I have seen and -talked with Doņa Christina de Langara y Gama, the mother of Don Felipe. -She is a woman of wisdom and good heart, and she thinks it will be -well to have Don Felipe and you go to Santa Fé. It will be a lesson -in learning and valor to you both and will give you the opportunity -of seeing great events and greater persons. If my request is granted, -that you be made a page of honor to Prince Juan, I would wish that you -should see something first of the persons to whom you may be attached. -I have great confidence in Doņa Christina, who has promised to take an -interest in you while I am on my voyage. It is arranged that Fray Piņa -and Don Felipe shall spend some weeks at the castle of Langara, and -Doņa Christina has asked that you remain there while I go on to Santa -Fé. I shall go to Santa Fé alone, not knowing what my plans are until I -have an audience with the King and the Queen. Doņa Christina is now at -Langara, but after some days she will proceed to Santa Fé to attend the -Queen." - -Diego could scarcely believe his ears for joy. In an instant he -realized the splendid prospect: he was to go to Granada, to witness -the end of the siege, to see the King and the Queen, soldiers -and statesmen--it seemed like a glorious dream to a spirited and -imaginative boy. His face glowed so that his father smiled. - -"Does Don Felipe know?" gasped Diego. - -"I do not know," answered the Admiral, smiling; "but I do know that you -long to tell him. I had many other things to say to you; but I have not -the heart to keep you. Go--" - -Before the Admiral could finish his sentence Diego had darted out of -the room. He caught sight, as he passed a window, of Don Felipe sitting -on a bench near the fish-pond reading a book in the waning afternoon -light. The first thing Don Felipe knew Diego had dashed upon him, -snatched the book from his hand, and was saying, joyfully: - -"Don Felipe! Don Felipe! We are to go to Granada to see the end of -the siege! We may see fighting--think of it, Don Felipe! We shall see -soldiers, Don Felipe! And make a fine journey! And my father says your -mother, Doņa Christina, has asked that we may stay some weeks at the -castle of Langara, Don Felipe!" - -The Admiral, passing the same window through which Diego had seen Don -Felipe, glanced out and saw the two lads dancing wildly, their arms -about each other, Don Felipe's cap, with the insignia of his rank, on -Diego's head, and Diego's cap, with no design at all, on Don Felipe's -head. The sight brought a smile to the Admiral's face. - - - - -II - -THE DAWNING OF THE LIGHT - - -Soon it was time for supper, and all assembled once more in the great, -bare refectory. Diego and Don Felipe felt as if they were in a dream, -so dazzled were they by the prospect before them. They had known what -the Admiral had demanded, and with the sanguine nature of youth they -thought that all the Admiral asked would be conceded, and already -reckoned the great voyage to have been accomplished. But to go to -Granada, to see the close of the stupendous struggle, to be present -in the hour of victory, was more than they had dreamed. Nevertheless, -though lost in rosy visions, they did not forget to eat their simple -supper. When it was over and they went out into the courtyard, the -Admiral passed them, holding by the hand the little Fernando. - -"Go now," said the Admiral to the child, "and find Brother Lawrence, -that he may put you to bed, where you must sleep soundly until the -birds call you in the morning." - -The child, used to prompt obedience, went away; and then the Admiral -said to the two youths: - -"Come, Don Felipe and Diego, and walk with me to the seashore, and I -will tell you some of the wonderful things of the sea." - -Don Felipe's heart throbbed with pleasure. He felt a strange sense of -being honored when he was treated as a son by the Admiral. - -It was then about six o'clock on a warm October evening. Not yet was -the sun gone, and the western sky was all opal and gold and crimson. -The rosy light reddened the far-off sea, and the white billows gleamed -with an opaline light. - -The Admiral walked between the two lads along the sandy road to the -little town of Palos. Softly the bells of the little church of St. -George were ringing, their mellow music mingling with the distant echo -of waves beating the bar off the harbor. As the sound of bells reached -them the Admiral remained silent; Diego knew that his father was making -a silent prayer, a thing he often did. Presently he spoke: - -"I love to hear the melody of church bells mingling with the sound of -the sea, for the sea has a majestic voice like the voice of God." - -Then the Admiral began telling them some of the marvels of the sea, -speaking in plain and sailor-like language. Soon they entered the -one long street of the town of Palos. The day's labor was over for -all, except the crews of some Neapolitan vessels loading in haste in -order to catch the tide that would take them over the bar, the sailors -working cheerfully, singing as they toiled. The women were standing -at their doorways, their children about them, while the workmen were -returning from their labors. Many were seafaring men who had made many -voyages. They all turned and looked curiously after the Admiral, every -one saluting him with respect. When his back was turned some smiled; -and some predicted evil, saying: - -"That man will take away with him some of the best mariners of Palos, -and they will never be seen again." - -Others said: - -"We shall try to go upon that bold voyage." - -The Admiral returned all salutations with dignity and courtesy. Then, -with the two lads, he entered the Church of St. George, which was -already dark. Before the altar burned the undying sanctuary lamp. An -old priest was leaving the altar, followed by a small fisher-boy not -much bigger than the little Fernando and wearing a white surplice over -a scarlet cassock. When they were gone the Admiral and Diego and Don -Felipe were in the church alone. - -The Admiral knelt, as did the two youths, the Admiral kneeling so -long that Diego and Don Felipe began to look with yearning toward the -open door of the church, through which the cheerful sounds of evening -floated. The voice of the night watchman calling the hour was heard as -he marched up and down the street carrying a lantern on a pole. Sounds -of music and dancing rang from the courtyard of a little tavern near -by, where a pack-train of mules had just arrived and the muleteers -were making merry. The two youths were not often allowed out of the -monastery at that hour, and they longed with the longing of boyhood -to see the life and the gaiety of the town. A half-hour passed, and -Diego and Felipe had remained admirably quiet; but now the limit of -boyish endurance was reached. Don Felipe began to cough, and Diego -knocked over a footstool which made a fearful clatter in the stillness -of the darkened church. The Admiral rose and walked out, followed by -Diego and Don Felipe. Never had the little seaport looked gayer or -more picturesque. From many balconies and casements came the sounds of -singing, and a handsome cavalier in a velvet mantle was coming down the -street strumming his guitar and rehearsing the song he intended to sing -under the window of his lady-love. - -On the quay some sailors were dancing to their own singing. All these -sights and sounds were delightful to Diego and Don Felipe; and the -Admiral, who had not forgotten that he was once a boy himself, indulged -them in watching these pleasant sights. - -A number of fishwives, their skirts tucked up about their hips, stood -watching the dancing sailors and laughing. Diego, moved by a sudden -impulse, ran up to a fat old fishwife, and seizing her by the hand -rushed into the middle of the dancers and began the fandango. At that -even the grave Admiral laughed. - -Don Felipe made no move to join the dancers; but another fishwife, much -stouter than the friend of Diego, suddenly made a dash for him, crying: - -"Come along, you pretty boy, and dance with me like a gentleman!" - -Don Felipe, with perfect grace and politeness, gave the fishwife his -hand as though she were a court lady, and danced the fandango well and -gracefully. - -The Admiral, leaning against a stone wall, watched the merry scene. He -was too wise to check the effervescent spirits of the two lads, and -waited with as much patience for them to finish their frolic as they -had waited for him to finish his prayers in the church. After half an -hour, however, when the church bells chimed seven o'clock, the Admiral -turned and walked away from the town toward the shore, where there were -only a few fishermen's huts. By the time he was clear of the quays he -heard footsteps behind him, and Diego and Don Felipe were running at -top speed to join him. - -"I hope," said the Admiral, turning pleasantly to the two youths, "that -you enjoyed your dancing. When I was your age I did the same thing; -I grew sober at an early age, but I do not like too much sobriety in -early youth." - -"But, my father," said Diego, taking his father affectionately by the -arm, "you gave up dancing very early; but did you give up the love of -fighting quite so soon? I have heard something about the time you tried -to provoke a fight with the Florentine fleet and dashed among them -shouting, 'Viva San Giorgione!' the battle-cry of the Genoese." - -"It was a rash and foolish thing," replied the Admiral; "but I did many -rash and foolish things in my youth. Genoa seemed then on the verge -of war with Florence, and I was in command of a decked vessel in the -Genoese fleet, under the command of my uncle Giovanni. We were going up -the Mediterranean with a fair wind when we discovered the Florentine -fleet of nine vessels coming down toward us on the same tack. My -vessel, the San Giorgione, was a fast sailer both on and off the wind -and answered the helm beautifully. It came into my head that it would -be a good thing for the cause of my country if we could destroy the -Florentine fleet then and there; but we could not attack them without -provocation. Like a rash young man, I thought it would be well to give -the Florentines provocation enough to attack us; so, knowing well the -capacity of my vessel, I steered directly under the quarter of the -Florentine flag-ship. The Florentine admiral was standing on the poop -as we brushed past; when we came abreast of him I shouted, 'Viva San -Giorgione!' as if the battle were on, and expected an answering cry -from the Florentines. But, mark you, the admiral was a steady man, not -to be provoked by a wild young captain such as I was then. He raised -his cap to me and shouted back, smiling, 'Viva San Giorgione!' with the -greatest politeness. It was the last thing I expected, and disconcerted -me much. I have often admired the coolness and restraint of the -Florentine admiral who would not allow himself to be moved by a piece -of boyish insolence. After all, there was no outbreak of war between -the two governments; but there might have been if the Florentine -admiral had not been so wise and master of himself." - -Don Felipe had never seen Diego and his father together before, and -Diego's affectionate familiarity with the Admiral impressed Don Felipe -deeply. His first feeling toward the Admiral had been one of awe, for -there was a dignity and majesty in his bearing that struck all who saw -him. But also there was a gentle unbending and sympathy with youth. Don -Felipe soon felt no more afraid of the Admiral than did Diego, and when -the Admiral stopped and gazed out toward the ocean, leaning an arm upon -the shoulder of each of the youths, Don Felipe felt his heart swell -with gratification and affection. - -Don Felipe asked the Admiral many questions, to which he responded and -told them things of the deepest interest. - -The monastery of La Rabida closed its gates at half-past eight o'clock, -and a few minutes before the closing the Admiral and Diego and Don -Felipe walked under the gray archway. The two lads went immediately to -the small, bare room which they shared together, and each was soon in -his hard little bed. But neither could sleep. Both were excited by the -thought of their coming journey; and Don Felipe was eager to see his -mother, Doņa Christina, and his young sister, Doņa Luisita. - -"Is the castle of Langara very grand?" asked Diego, in a whisper. - -"Not very," answered Don Felipe, who was too sensible to boast of the -splendors to which he was accustomed. "But I love to be there, because -the life is very quiet and pleasant. My sister Luisita and I spent all -our childhood there. I long to see my sister--the sweetest sister in -the world. She is not kept so close with her governess as most girls, -and we are much together when I am at home. Oh, you will like Luisita!" - -Diego said nothing. Don Felipe was his comrade; but he realized that -Don Felipe's sister was a young lady of high rank, and he felt a -natural delicacy in speaking of her. - -"Fray Piņa is to go with us," Diego whispered, after a while, in a -slightly complaining whisper. - -"Then we shall have to work at our books," promptly whispered back -Don Felipe. "All that I fear is that the siege of Granada may be over -before we get there." - -Next morning preparations were begun for the journey to the castle of -Langara, in the Sierra Nevada Mountains, and later, to Granada. On the -following morning, in the cool, sweet October dawn, the cavalcade set -forth. First rode the Admiral and Fray Piņa, with the good Prior, Juan -Perez, who was to ride one stage of the journey with them. All were -mounted on the steady and sure-footed mules which were ordinarily used -for traveling. Diego and Don Felipe were also on mule-back. - -Soon the sea was left behind, and the party began to mount the -foothills. They traveled steadily, and did not draw rein, except to -breathe the mules, until nearly eleven o'clock. Then, in a glade a -little way off from the highroad, they stopped for rest and their -midday meal. When it was over, their elders talked gravely together -before the Prior returned to La Rabida. - -Diego and Don Felipe were left to themselves. They had no notion of -resting quietly, and wandered about the forest, their arms entwined, -putting into words their splendid dreams of adventure, which they were -careful not to let their elders overhear. Don Felipe was talking of -the prospect of once more seeing his mother, Doņa Christina, and his -sister, Doņa Luisita. - -"How glad Luisita will be to see me again!" he cried, a dozen times. -"You see, Luisita leads a very retired life; she has not so many things -to interest her as I have, and, although I love her just as much as she -loves me, I think she is lonelier without me than I am without her." - -"I wonder," said Diego, "if we will find at the castle your cousin, Don -Tomaso de Gama, the daredevil knight of whom you have so often told me? -I should like to meet him, you may depend upon it." - -"I hope we shall," cried Don Felipe. "He is the finest knight in the -world, and so gay and handsome--oh, everybody likes Don Tomaso!" - -Presently they were called to make their respects to the Prior, who was -returning to La Rabida; this they did with much politeness. They loved -the good Prior; but they were glad they were not going back with him. - -At three o'clock they resumed their journey. They traveled all the -afternoon, the road ever rising. At nightfall they stopped at a humble -inn, only frequented by the poorest class of travelers; but there -was nothing better in the neighborhood. Diego thought the supper the -worst he had ever tasted, the small, close rooms dark and dirty, and -he felt inclined to speak of these discomforts. Everything at La -Rabida was plain, but clean and wholesome. But he noticed that the -Admiral and Fray Piņa made no complaint, and Don Felipe, accustomed -to the splendors of a court and a castle, said no word showing -dissatisfaction; and Diego was shamed into keeping silence. - -Next morning they resumed their journey. It was but three days -to Granada; but the castle of Langara lay a long distance to the -northward, and it was a good four days' journey to reach it. The -weather remained beautifully clear, although the autumn air grew sharp -as they climbed farther into the mountains. Diego and Don Felipe -enjoyed every step they traveled, and when they reached another bad -inn, the second night, were secretly delighted that there was no room -for them, so they had to sleep, rolled in their cloaks and blankets, -on a little balcony open to the sky, with the quiet stars shining down -upon them. - -The third night the two lads again slept out, this time in the -courtyard of an inn. It was expected that they would reach the castle -of Langara by six o'clock on the fourth evening. They were now well -into the Sierra Nevada Mountains and were climbing a rocky road which -led to a plateau upon which the castle stood. The trees were quite -leafless, and they could see at intervals the great gray mass of the -castle, which seemed much nearer than it was by road, as the highway -ran around the base of the plateau and was ever on the rise. - -The daylight was not quite gone, and a crescent moon hung in the -heavens, while a rosy glow flooded the western sky, and a band of gold -on the horizon marked the departure of the royal sun. - -As the travelers rode steadily on they heard upon the stony path ahead -the clatter of a horse's iron-shod hoofs coming at a hard gallop, and -in a few minutes a cavalier came into view and rode straight for the -Admiral. - -"It is my cousin, Don Tomaso de Gama, called by some the Daredevil -Knight," whispered Don Felipe to Diego. - -The appearance of Don Tomaso was most attractive to young eyes. He was -extremely handsome, with a sparkle in his eyes; his horsemanship was -superb, and his manner, in speaking to the Admiral, graceful, though -somewhat more debonair than was usual with those who addressed him. - -Don Tomaso, pulling up his horse, a powerful chestnut, bowed politely -to the Admiral, and said: - -"I believe I am addressing Admiral Christobal Colon. I come from the -noble lady Doņa Christina, who sends me in advance to say that she is -expecting with much eagerness you and your party, and that the castle -and all that is in it are at your disposal. Oh! Hulloa! Yonder is -little Felipe! How are you, lad?" - -The Admiral bowed and smiled, while Don Felipe was secretly anxious for -fear Don Tomaso had not treated the Admiral with the deference to which -he was accustomed. - -Having been introduced to the rest of the party, Don Tomaso rode beside -the Admiral and entered into conversation with him. All, including -Diego and Don Felipe, noticed a marked change that came over Don -Tomaso as he conversed with the Admiral. The somewhat saucy manner of -the Daredevil Knight grew every moment more respectful and he finally -brought a smile to the Admiral's grave face by frankly saying: - -"I do not wonder that you can treat with kings and princes as an equal. -You are the first man I ever met of whom I was really afraid--but I -grew afraid of you before you had spoken three times to me!" - -The party now entered a narrow road, leading by many windings to the -castle gates. It was very dark and overhung with rocks and trees and -capable of being defended. When they came out upon an open place in -front of the fortress-like castle and faced the drawbridge, which was -down, Don Tomaso took from his doublet a silver trumpet and gave three -ringing blasts upon it. A warder on the tower of the main gateway -replied with a single loud trumpet-call. - -Lights were moving in the castle, and upon the highest point of the -parapet there were figures faintly seen in the fast-falling darkness. - -"I see my mother and Luisita on the parapet!" cried Don Felipe, seizing -Diego's arm. - -Once inside the gateway the party dismounted, their tired mules were -led away, and they crossed on foot a splendid courtyard with majestic -piles of buildings all around it. Diego had never seen anything so fine -in his life. - -They entered the castle by a low and heavy archway with swinging -lanterns overhead, while servants carried torches on the tips of long -pikes. - -There, standing under the central lantern, stood the Duchess de Langara -y Gama. Diego's first impression of her was of a mingling of dignity -with kindness, grace with stateliness. She was still beautiful, -although no longer young, and the resemblance of Don Felipe to her was -marked. Her dress was of dark-blue velvet, and her hair was adorned -with jewels. Next her stood Doņa Luisita, a charming young girl of -fourteen, the image of Don Felipe, with soft dark eyes and a skin like -ivory. Over her rich black hair was a thin white veil that fell to the -edge of her white gown. As Doņa Luisita stood under the mellow light of -lanterns and torches, her white gown and flowing veil showing against -the dark background, her hands clasped as she gazed toward Don Felipe, -she seemed to Diego like an angel, all whiteness and purity. Don -Felipe, standing next to Diego, held his arms out wide to his sister. -The two could scarcely keep apart while their elders made ceremonious -greetings. - -"Welcome," said Doņa Christina to the Admiral, adding the picturesque -Spanish phrase: "My house and all that is in it are yours." - -The Admiral bowed profoundly and kissed Doņa Christina's hand and that -of Doņa Luisita, who was introduced to him. Then Don Felipe advanced -and was folded in the arms of his mother and sister. The rest of the -party were introduced, Don Felipe saying, as the Admiral presented -Diego: - -"This is my good friend and comrade, Diego." - -Nothing could exceed the kindness of Doņa Christina's manner to Diego; -and Doņa Luisita made him a low bow in return for his. - -Doņa Christina, turning to the Admiral, said: - -"My son is now the head of the house, and must take his father's place. -He is inexperienced; but, like me, he feels honored by your presence -under our roof. I know very well the high esteem in which the Queen -holds you and wishes all to hold you." - -The Admiral expressed his thanks, and then, Doņa Christina leading the -way, they ascended a wide stone stair, and still another stair, where -the apartments for the Admiral and Fray Piņa were prepared. - -"You are to sleep in the same room with me," whispered Don Felipe in -Diego's ear. "I asked my mother to arrange it so." - -After saying that supper would be served as soon as the travelers were -refreshed, Doņa Christina went to her own part of the castle. Doņa -Luisita had mysteriously disappeared. Don Felipe threaded his way -through many halls and corridors, all very splendid, past sumptuous -chambers, until he came to a large room with many small windows. It was -comfortably furnished, but without luxury. - -"This was my room always," said Don Felipe. "There is a room next it -where I studied, and my sister often studied there with me. Below are -my mother's apartments and my sister's. It is surprising how fast my -sister is becoming a woman." - -Diego said nothing of Doņa Luisita, rather to Don Felipe's surprise. - -As soon as the lads were washed and dressed, after their long day's -travel, they were summoned to supper. It was served in a splendid -hall, hung with armor and with tapestries. The table was long, for -the household was large. At the head of the table sat Doņa Christina, -with the Admiral on her right and Doņa Luisita on her left. Next -Doņa Luisita sat her governess, whose name, Seņora Julia Enriquez, -Don Felipe whispered to Diego. She was very grave in manner and -appearance, but not unhandsome. Don Felipe, taking the seat of his -dead father, was at the foot of the table, and Fray Piņa was placed on -his right. - -The supper was sumptuous and ceremonious. Doņa Christina was all -kindness to the Admiral, and her good sense and dignity were displayed -in her conversation. - -When supper was over Doņa Christina retired to her apartment; and Don -Felipe, after seeing that all his guests were comfortable in their -rooms, went to his own, where he found Diego. - -"I think," said Diego, gravely, "that Seņora Julia is the sternest and -severest lady I ever saw. She must be worse than Fray Piņa." - -Don Felipe laughed aloud at this. - -"Seņora Julia takes it out in looking stern. She is the mildest -creature on earth. My mother says the only fault to be found with her -is that she is too easy, and, especially, has ever let me torment her, -poor lady, and has returned it with kindness. I will say, though, that -I should not have been so tormenting to her if I had not loved her -and did not know that she has loved me from a child. If she had told -my mother of some of my pranks--well, it would have gone hard with me! -Now I am going to my mother, who has sent for me. Go you with me to the -library, where you will find many books and manuscripts--for I know -that you love books almost as well as adventure." - -Don Felipe then took Diego to a library, large for those days. It was -lighted with lamps hung from the ceiling. - -"Here," said Don Felipe, handing Diego a small manuscript volume of -verse, "are the works of your Italian poet, Petrarca. I know you know -Italian better than Spanish." - -"Yes," replied Diego, seizing the little book. "Just as you know -Spanish better than Italian--because it is your native tongue." - -Don Felipe went off, leaving Diego in the dim library. Diego looked -about him in delight. Never had he seen so many books together in his -life. - -He began to read the volume of poems and grew so absorbed that he did -not hear Don Felipe open the door, and only knew of his presence when -Don Felipe, slapping him on the shoulder, cried: - -"Come out of the clouds, Diego! My mother wishes to speak with you. She -has something to tell us both." - -Diego went willingly enough. In a small, high-ceiled room close by was -Doņa Christina with Doņa Luisita and Seņora Julia. - -"I hope you will be happy while you are here," said Doņa Christina to -Diego. "I have talked with the Admiral, your father, and he tells me -that he must depart to-morrow to seek the King and the Queen at Santa -Fé. After considering it, as I shall not be obliged to attend the Queen -for a month, the Admiral and I have agreed that it is better for you -and Don Felipe to remain here with me during that month. Then we can -travel to Santa Fé together." - -The first sensation of Diego and Don Felipe was one of disappointment; -their dream was to see the fall of the city of Granada. Doņa Christina, -however, unconsciously reconciled them to this delay by adding: - -"All the information we have from Granada shows that the city can -scarcely be finally reduced before December, and during that long time -both of you will be better off here than at Santa Fé." - -It was not so bad after all--that was the unspoken thought in the minds -of Diego and Don Felipe, and the meaning of the exchange of glances. - -Doņa Christina talked to Diego, telling him many interesting things -concerning the castle, and was pleased with his admiration of the -library. Then she rose, saying: - -"I have many matters to attend to even at this hour, and I will leave -you with Seņora Julia." - -As soon as Doņa Christina left the room Seņora Julia sustained the -reputation Don Felipe had given her. Don Felipe inquired concerning a -certain old gentleman in the neighborhood who was supposed to admire -Seņora Julia very much. The poor lady was deeply embarrassed, and Doņa -Luisita came to the rescue by saying: - -"Do not mind my brother, dear Seņora Julia. He only says such things -because they make you blush. Do not pay the least attention to him." - -In spite of her ferocious appearance, Seņora Julia proved no restraint -on the three young people, who laughed and talked merrily together, -Seņora Julia joining with them. Diego had never before been thrown with -a girl of Doņa Luisita's rank, and he was surprised and charmed at -her gentle and unassuming manner. She was full of curiosity about the -great voyage the Admiral wished to take, and was well informed on the -geography of the world as it was then known. Several times Seņora Julia -said it was time for her to take Doņa Luisita to her apartment; but -every time Don Felipe, with much impudence but great affection, held -her by force and would not let her rise from her chair. At last Seņora -Julia said, in consternation: - -"This is the hour that Doņa Christina always comes to this room to say -good night to Doņa Luisita." - -This was enough. Don Felipe and Diego scampered off as fast as they -could run to their own room. - - - - -III - -THE CASTLE OF LANGARA - - -The Admiral was to start early in the morning, and Diego and Don Felipe -earnestly hoped that Fray Piņa would accompany him. But to their secret -chagrin they found that Fray Piņa was to remain at the castle with -them. They knew very well the meaning of this--hard study during many -hours of the day, while the woods and mountains called to them to be -explored, while the fish in the streams remained unmolested. There -would be little hunting or fishing, and not much time to spend over the -books of poetry and romance in the library. In addition, Don Tomaso -de Gama was to travel with the Admiral to Santa Fé, from whence he -had only been absent a short time. Both youths bitterly regretted his -departure, and that they would not have the delight of listening to his -tales of adventure, his merry songs, nor enjoy his gallant and dashing -manners and company. - -By daybreak Diego and Don Felipe were up and dressed. Already, below -in the courtyard, they could hear the tramping of the travelers' -mules. Diego went to the Admiral's room, and with him descended to the -courtyard. Early as it was, Doņa Christina was present to say farewell -to her guests. The Admiral thanked her with his usual grave courtesy -for her hospitality and, especially, her kindness in asking Diego to -remain and share Don Felipe's studies with Fray Piņa. Don Tomaso, his -foot in his stirrup, cried: - -"What a happy time you will have, Diego and Don Felipe--no distractions -from study--history, geography, astronomy, and mathematics in the -morning, and mathematics, astronomy, geography, and history in the -afternoon! Now, at Santa Fé, I shall have a very hard time--watching -the besieged city of Granada, making sorties against the gates, living -in a tent, jousting with other knights by way of pastime, riding in the -tilt-yard--all the hardships and the pleasures of a soldier's life." - -Don Tomaso, laughing at the long faces of Diego and Don Felipe, flung -himself joyously on his horse. The Admiral kissed and blessed both of -the youths, and said, by way of consolation: - -"All will not be over at Granada in one short month." - -Then the cavalcade rode off. Diego and Don Felipe were in terror for -fear Fray Piņa would call them to their studies at once; but even the -stern instructor had a little mercy on them for two days, in which they -were quite free. - -The two lads started out on foot in the clear October sunrise to climb -the near-by mountains, to ford the streams, to enjoy themselves in -that expenditure of energy which is the glorious patrimony of youth. -Don Felipe had to show all of his haunts to Diego, and together the -two boys climbed and walked and slid down steep places and waded -mountain streams, with the utmost enjoyment to themselves. Both knew -something about plants, thanks to Fray Piņa, and they were surprised -and delighted to find some beautiful pink orchids having their second -blooming of the year. Diego gathered them, roots and all, carefully, -with much earth, saying: - -"These will I take to Doņa Christina." - -"And I will take some to my sister, for her garden. You should see -Luisita's garden. She loves it well." - -They did not return to the castle until near sunset, and were tired, -hungry, and dirty, but very happy. Don Felipe led the way to the back -of the castle, where, sheltered from the north by high stone walls, -was a warm spot, in which a formal little Italian garden was laid out. -Here was Doņa Christina with Doņa Luisita and Seņora Julia. Luisita -ran forward to greet them and at once noticed the plants Diego was so -carefully carrying. - -"I never saw that flower bloom in the autumn!" she cried. - -Diego had the readiness to offer her some at once, saying: - -"The rest are for the noble lady, Doņa Christina." - -Then he won for himself the undying esteem of Seņora Julia by -presenting her with one of the plants. - -Doņa Christina, who was very observant, thought well of Diego for -remembering the old governess, and as the three young people were -busily planting the flowers, she said to Seņora Julia: - -"The youth Diego is well mannered. He knows how to behave to his -elders." - -"Truly he is," replied Seņora Julia. "No youth can be called well -mannered who does not observe politeness to the old and the obscure." - -Soon it was time for supper; and Diego and Don Felipe, washed and -dressed and combed, were ready for it. The meal was not splendid and -ceremonious as the night before, only the family being present, except -Diego and Fray Piņa; but Diego thought it one of the pleasantest hours -he had ever passed. Family life was unknown to him; the recollection -of his mother, of his early childhood in Lisbon, of the modest home -in which the great Admiral toiled to support his wife and child, and -to assist from his narrow means his venerable father, and to help in -the education of his younger brothers, was, to Diego, like a faint and -far-off dream. He had known many phases and vicissitudes of life in -his short span of years, and had not been unhappy on the whole. But -this sweet domestic life, the society of ladies at meals, the gentle -restraint of their presence, was wholly new and delightful to him. -The conversation was chiefly in the hands of Doņa Christina, Seņora -Julia, Fray Piņa, and the chaplain, with two or three other persons, -officers of the great household maintained by the family of de Langara -y Gama. Occasionally Doņa Christina referred courteously to Diego or -Don Felipe; but they were for the most part quiet listeners to the -intelligent conversation of their elders, Doņa Luisita too, being -attentive to all that was said. - -After supper Diego and Don Felipe had a delicious hour in the library, -Diego reading with Don Felipe his newly found treasure, the poems of -Petrarca. Don Felipe was glad to improve his Italian by this reading, -but laughed at Diego for being so passionately fond of the sonnets. - -Then came an hour most delightful of all to Diego, motherless and -homeless as he had long been. Don Felipe and he were summoned to the -room of Doņa Christina. There, every night, it was Doņa Christina's -practice to spend an hour with her children, and Diego was included -with the utmost kindness in this little family circle. Doņa Christina's -kind heart was touched at the thought of Diego's lack of home life and -home affection; Fray Piņa had given her an excellent impression of the -boy, and with the generosity of a warm heart Doņa Christina wished to -make Diego happy and good, as she desired to make her own children. She -therefore treated him as a son, and Diego responded with the depth of -gratitude and affection of a strong nature. - -Doņa Christina encouraged the lads to talk freely of their hopes -and plans, Doņa Luisita listening intently. Diego did not lose Doņa -Christina's respect by his high anticipations, his firm confidence that -his father was about to make the greatest discoveries the world has -ever known. - -"I have but one thing of which to be proud," said Diego, frankly, to -Doņa Christina; "that is my father. I am not of great family like Don -Felipe. I am the son of a poor man. I am not old enough to have done -anything on my own account. But when I think of my father--his courage, -his perseverance during nearly eighteen years, of his knowledge--for -Fray Piņa says my father is the ablest mathematician in Spain--of -the way my father commands the respect of all, from the great Queen -Isabella down to Brother Lawrence, the servant--my heart swells so with -pride my breast can hardly hold it." - -"That is the right kind of pride," quietly responded Doņa Christina. "I -know what the great Queen thinks of the Admiral, your honored father. I -was proud to have a man of so much learning, courage, and virtue under -my roof." - -Then began for Diego a time of new and unusual happiness, for it was -more than mere pleasure. He was very sanguine, as the young must be, of -the success of his father at court. King Ferdinand and Queen Isabella -had promised that as soon as the fearful struggle with the Moors was -over they would redeem the promise they had made and provide the -Admiral with the vessels and men he had asked for his voyage--a force -so pitifully small for an enterprise so great that it staggered the -imagination. And already it was known that the city of Granada was -unable to hold out longer than the first of the year. Diego and Don -Felipe gloried in the prospect of seeing the great military pageants -that would mark the fall of the Moorish power in Spain; and Diego -was enough of a Spaniard to feel a patriotic pride in the thought -of driving the foreign invaders from the soil of Spain. So they had -splendid dreams of what they would see at Santa Fé, the city built -in a day, as it were, across the narrow valley from Granada and -commanding its main gates, and where the armies of Castile and Arragon -were encamped. Meanwhile was a month of joy which was not seriously -impaired by the fact that the two lads spent their mornings in hard -study under the iron rule of Fray Piņa. After twelve o'clock they were -free to explore the mountains, to hunt, to follow the streams--all the -healthy pleasures of an outdoor life. Their respect for Fray Piņa was -increased by the vast knowledge he had of plants and animals, of sports -and of the history of the region. Sometimes they rode, sometimes they -walked, always they enjoyed themselves. In the evening, when they -returned, after they had made themselves presentable, they had the -pleasant family supper in the great hall. Afterward they went to the -library and read for a while, and then Doņa Christina would have them -in her private room, where, with Doņa Luisita and Seņora Julia, Fray -Piņa and the chaplain, they had a delightful hour of conversation and -reading. Often Doņa Christina would ask Fray Piņa to read to them some -interesting book. Fray Piņa was well informed on astronomy, and on -clear nights would give Diego and Don Felipe lessons in the science -of the stars. Doņa Luisita was also a pupil in these lessons. Doņa -Christina and the chaplain became so interested that they too would -join the group, of whom Doņa Luisita and Seņora Julia were a part, on -the highest point of the main tower of the castle. There, in the sharp -autumn nights, they would assemble, warmly wrapped in heavy riding -cloaks, and listen to the mellow voice of Fray Piņa explaining the -mysteries of the palpitating stars and the serene planets that made -the dark-blue sky radiant. Often in after life and among different -scenes the memory came back to Diego of those hours spent on the tower -by night, when earth seemed far away and Doņa Luisita's eyes, so softly -bright, shone like stars. - -When, at last, late in November, the day of departure from the castle -of Langara came and Diego and Don Felipe were to take the road -to Granada, Diego was amazed to find that he was sorry to leave. -Doņa Christina was going with them to begin her tour of duty as -lady-in-waiting to Queen Isabella. Doņa Luisita was to remain at the -castle for the present in care of Seņora Julia and the chaplain. On the -last of their pleasant evenings Doņa Luisita was very sad; and when -they took their last lesson in astronomy, and were all together for the -last time, tears dropped from Doņa Luisita's dark eyes. All tried to -comfort her, because it was not pleasant to be left behind. - -"Never mind, Doņa Luisita," said Diego, "we will not forget you, Don -Felipe and I, and, if Doņa Christina will let us, we will put a little -line at the foot of her letters--and I will try and make you some -pictures of Granada, although I cannot draw and paint as well as Don -Felipe." - -Don Felipe, too, made many promises; and Doņa Luisita submitted -patiently, for Doņa Christina, being a wise woman, was accustomed to -exact prompt and uncomplaining obedience from both Doņa Luisita and Don -Felipe. - -On the cold, dark morning they rode away Doņa Luisita showed a brave -spirit and kept back her tears with smiles. Doņa Christina and two of -her waiting women were to travel on the sure-footed mules, as ladies -did in those times. Besides Fray Piņa and Diego and Don Felipe, there -went for protection, six men armed with harquebuses and mounted, and -the chief steward and his assistant. These last rode ahead to secure -accommodations for the party, as they would be four nights upon the -road. - -When the moment of farewell came in the gray of the early morning, -Diego felt strangely sad. Doņa Luisita was clasped first in her -mother's arms and then in Don Felipe's. Diego made bold to kiss her -hand. - -As the party clattered across the drawbridge, which was hauled up after -them, and watched the lowering of the flag on the keep, signifying that -the head of the house was absent, Diego turned and gave a last look at -the spot in which he had been so happy. - -"You look as if you did not want to see the fall of Granada," said Don -Felipe. "After all, we shall have many more pleasant days together at -Langara." - -"I hope so," replied Diego, from the bottom of his heart. - -Diego carried in the breast of his leathern jacket a treasure which -had been given him by Doņa Christina as a souvenir of his happy hours -in the library of the castle. This was the little manuscript volume of -Petrarca, which Diego had read for the first time with so much delight -at Langara. - -The party traveled on slowly but steadily. After a while the dark -morning brightened and the sun shone gloriously. - -It is a privilege of youth to rally quickly from sadness. So it was -that after a while Diego's heart was light again, and he began to -enjoy already, in anticipation, a return some day to the castle. Don -Felipe's good spirits were contagious. The two youths were full of -health, and of eager and ardent soul, each with a good horse under him, -and traveling toward a scene of splendid adventures. Diego surprised -himself by bursting into a song, with a refrain: - - Merrily, merrily we go, my steed and I, - Soon will we return, - We will return, we will return! - -At every stage of their journey they were met with news of the -impending triumph of the Spanish arms. The country was ablaze with -patriotism. For nearly eight hundred years the Moors had occupied -Spanish territory, had built great cities and fortresses, and had -maintained a great court at Granada, in the magnificent palace of the -Alhambra, grander than that of the Spanish sovereigns themselves. -The Moors were aliens and of another race; they had a different -civilization, Oriental in character and totally unlike the Christian -civilization. Never, during all these eight hundred years, had there -been peace in Spain; nor would there ever be peace until the foreign -invaders were driven out. Gradually they had been hemmed in, their -large cities taken, their fortresses forced to surrender, until now, -under Boabdil, a weak and effeminate king, Granada alone remained to -them. This had been invested on every side, no provisions had been -carried to the city and garrison for many months, and it was only a -question of a few weeks when it must surrender. The Spanish sovereigns -did not intend to carry the city by assault, not wishing to injure the -women and children or to endanger the city by fire, but to reduce it by -steady and incessant attacks. That hour was near at hand. - -The Castilian army had borne its share in the campaign and siege, -and its Queen, Isabella of Castile, who had administered the civil -government of Arragon as well as Castile while King Ferdinand was in -the field, was to join him at Granada. - -The party from the castle of Langara reached the neighborhood of Santa -Fé early in the morning of the day Queen Isabella was to arrive, and -thus were to witness the meeting between the Queen of Castile and the -King of Arragon; for, although they were husband and wife, they were -independent sovereigns, and met first as such. - -Early in the bright November morning, upon the last stage of their -journey, the party from the castle was met by the Admiral coming -from Santa Fé to greet them. They met in the narrow pass of Pinos, -about six miles from Santa Fé. Already the highway was crowded with -the advance-guard of Queen Isabella's party, together with the great -concourse which always flocks toward the scene of coming exciting -events. The Admiral was accompanied by Don Tomaso de Gama and Alonzo -de Quintanilla, an accountant to Queen Isabella, and who was the -steady friend of the Admiral. As soon as they met Doņa Christina -they all dismounted and respectfully greeted her. Then the Admiral -embraced Diego; and when greetings with all were exchanged they set -forward briskly. Doņa Christina wished to reach Santa Fé and put on -the splendid attire of a court lady, in which to greet her Queen. Don -Tomaso, too, must return quickly, as well as Alonzo de Quintanilla. The -Admiral decided to return with them, so that Diego and Don Felipe, -with Fray Piņa alone, standing on a rocky height directly overlooking -the road, witnessed the splendid pageant of the meeting of the -sovereigns. The multitude of persons was very great and of all sorts, -from peasants to great nobles with their long trains of attendants. -None suspected that the fair-haired and blue-eyed youth standing by -the grave young ecclesiastic was the son of the man most talked of in -Spain at that moment, for the whole country was awake and alive to the -projects of the Admiral, who was derided by some, denounced by others, -strongly supported by a few, and eagerly discussed by all. Nor was it -known that the slim, handsome, black-eyed lad was one of the first -grandees of Spain, inheritor of a great dukedom with all its wealth, -honors, and responsibilities. - -On every hand the sights and sounds were enchanting to Diego and -Don Felipe. Before them rose the splendid walled city of Granada, -the Moorish flag with its silver crescent floating from the highest -point of the citadel. The gilded domes and minarets of the doomed -city glittered in the noonday light. On one side the ground fell -away abruptly into a long, narrow gorge, through which the little -river Xeni flowed, bridged in many places. On the opposite heights -the improvised city of Santa Fé stretched away, grimly watchful of -the Moorish stronghold. Beyond that still were the long lines of the -encamped armies of Castile and Arragon. All the troops were under arms -to greet the Queen. In a large open space between the armies was a -splendid pavilion, of painted linen outside and luxuriously equipped -inside, which King Ferdinand had caused to be prepared for his Queen. -Over it hung the Gonfalon, the gorgeous banner of the two kingdoms, -bearing on one side the Castilian coat-of-arms and on the other that of -Arragon. From this camp first came a vast cavalcade of royal princes, -nobles, knights, and soldiers, halberdiers and harquebusiers to meet -the Queen and her party. Among them rode a number of ladies, of whom -Doņa Christina was one. - -As the procession wound its way over the plain toward the narrow road -that led from the plateau into the lower country, music rang out, -flags and banners fluttered gaily, and the armored knights seemed clad -in gold, as the sunlight gleamed upon their coats of chain mail. First -came a band of musicians playing the national hymns, followed by the -trumpeters with their silver trumpets. Then came the heralds in their -gorgeously embroidered coats, followed by a group of the chief officers -of state and the highest nobles in Spain, all superbly mounted. Next -came the ecclesiastics, headed by the great Cardinal Pedro Gonzalez -de Mendoza, afterward the firm friend of the Admiral. In an open -space, surrounded by the princes of his house, rode King Ferdinand, -a man of splendid appearance, a soldier as well as a statesman. He -rode a magnificent charger and was all smiles, bowing to the applause -of the thousands of spectators. After him rode Prince Juan, who, to -Diego and Don Felipe, was so far the most interesting person who had -yet appeared. He was about their own age, extremely handsome, with an -expression the most winning, a true son of his mother, the great Queen -Isabella. Diego thought it would not be hard to serve so gallant and -so gentle a young man. - -Behind them came a guard of honor, consisting of the foremost knights -in Spain. Toward the end rode three young knights abreast who deeply -interested Diego. The first was his friend, Don Tomaso de Gama, looking -every inch a knight. On one side rode a dark young man, not handsome, -but with a soldier's eye. This was Gonzalez de Cordova, afterward the -celebrated general who won deathless glory in Italy. On the other side -rode the most beautiful knight Diego had ever seen. He looked the -embodiment of beauty, such as the Greek sculptors gave to their young -gods. It was Ponce de Leon, later on to discover Porto Rico and Florida -in his search for the fabled Bimini--the fountain of perpetual youth. -It was Don Felipe who gave Diego the names of these and many others in -the gorgeous cavalcade. - -When the procession reached the edge of the plateau it halted, the -music was hushed, and a deep silence of expectancy followed. Presently, -from the narrow gorge beneath, floated the sweet sound of the silver -trumpets, which was the signal of the Queen's approach. Instantly from -the brazen throats of the King's trumpets came a joyous response. Soon -the head of the Queen's procession came into view. It was as splendid, -though not so large, as that of the King. The Queen, after the fashion -of the time, was mounted on a mule, splendidly caparisoned. Queen -Isabella wore a superb riding costume of black velvet with a hat and -feathers, and across her breast and on her slender arms was a delicate -gold chain armor, showing that this great and noble Queen, this tender -wife and devoted mother, was also a warrior and a sovereign. On her -right, similarly mounted, was the Princess Katharine, afterward the -noble and unfortunate wife of the eighth Henry of England. - -When Queen Isabella reached the plateau King Ferdinand spurred -his charger forward, but stopped when about twenty yards off and -dismounted, approaching his wife with deep respect. Although devotedly -attached to each other, King Ferdinand and Queen Isabella were yet -independent sovereigns, and the great Queen was the last person in the -world to abate any of the honors and dignity due to her country and -herself as its Queen. - -Prince Juan and every one else dismounted. - -The King, first taking off his plumed helmet and sweeping the -ground with it, bowed low to his wife. Queen Isabella, who had also -dismounted, removing her hat from her head, revealed her beautiful -chestnut hair, coifed with jewels, and returned the King's bow -ceremoniously. Then walking toward each other, they met, and the -King kissed the Queen formally on the cheek, as one sovereign kisses -another on meeting. When that was over, however, the King and Queen -embraced and kissed heartily as husband and wife. Prince Juan, after -ceremoniously saluting his mother, was also kissed and embraced. The -young Princess Katharine was then clasped in the arms of her father and -her brother. - -Then, again remounting, the two processions united and took their way -toward Santa Fé. The loud acclaims increased as the joint armies of -Castile and Arragon beheld the Queen whom they both adored; and, long -after the procession had become a mere moving speck in the distance, -the far-off sound of cheers and of swords drawn and driven back to -their scabbards still floated across the little plain. - -The sight of Ferdinand in all his splendor impressed Diego deeply; but -when his young eyes fell upon Queen Isabella a feeling of reverence -stole into his heart which could only be compared with what he felt -for his father. Here was a woman, a Queen, a saint, a gentlewoman, the -soul of courtesy, the model of integrity, proud where she should be -proud, meek where she should be meek, nobly ambitious for her country, -the mother of her people, ready to lead her soldiers in battle like a -king, and then kneeling by them and binding up their wounds as would a -mother--Diego's mind was lofty enough to render full tribute to this -Queen, one of the most glorious women who ever lived. - - - - -IV - -THE LAST SIGH OF THE MOOR - - -The short November afternoon was melting into twilight when Diego and -Don Felipe, with Fray Piņa, took their way on horseback across the -plateau to the town of Santa Fé. The plain was still thronged with -persons going homeward after the great spectacle of the day, and with -those who dwelt in Santa Fé or were encamped outside. - -The Admiral had engaged lodgings for the party in a tall, old house, -one of those in the original small town where he himself lodged. It -was in a crooked and retired street, but Diego and Don Felipe were -delighted to find that one window of the room which they shared -together, under the roof, looked toward the plain upon which were -encamped the armies of Castile and Arragon, while another gave a -view of the deep and narrow valley that lay between Santa Fé and -the beleaguered city of Granada. Directly before them lay the "Gate -of Justice," one of the main gates of the city, and from its towers -they could hear, in the clear November air, the shrill cry of the -muezzin, the Moslem call to prayer. "Prayer is better than sleep--than -sleep--than sleep." - -After the traveler's supper, at which were present the Admiral and his -friend, Alonzo de Quintanilla, Diego and Don Felipe were willing enough -to go to their room. They felt as if they were living under a spell of -enchantment. The splendid personages they had seen, the great events of -which they were to be spectators, the pomp and glory of war, impressed -their young imaginations powerfully. Although tired with their long day -of travel and excitement, they could not sleep. So an hour passed. They -rose at last, and, as they were gazing out of the window toward the -camp, at ten o'clock they noticed in the middle of the camp, lying a -mile away, a great mass of flame shoot skyward. Instantly the camp was -roused, and there was a great commotion in the town. De Quintanilla -ran out of the house and, mounting his horse, still standing at the -door, galloped away toward the camp. The fire, though violent, soon -burned itself out, and in an hour De Quintanilla returned with the -news that the beautiful tents erected by the King for Queen Isabella, -the Princess Katharine, and their suites, had mysteriously caught fire -while the Queen was at prayer in the tent arranged as a chapel. She had -made an almost miraculous escape, and by her courage and presence of -mind not a life had been lost, although the splendid row of tents, hung -with rich brocades and gorgeously furnished, were only a heap of ashes. - -"The Queen," said De Quintanilla, to the listening group, "showed as -ever the spirit of ten men-at-arms, being composed and even smiling, -and saying that the humblest tent in the army is enough to shelter her, -for she is a soldier like the rest of the army." - -The next morning Diego and Don Felipe were not surprised when Fray Piņa -began at once the same routine that had been followed at La Rabida -and at the castle of Langara. It was irksome to them and tantalizing -to be held down to books and studies in their narrow little room, -while living in the midst of a great camp with all its charms and -fascinations for brave and imaginative boys. But they knew too much to -appeal against it, for Fray Piņa's stern rule was upheld by the Admiral -and by Doņa Christina. Still they enjoyed their new life and felt as if -they were living every minute of it. - -The arrival of Queen Isabella had put new vigor into everything. The -armies were impatient to take the city of Granada by storm; but King -Ferdinand, a capable soldier, would not consider this. From spies and -the Moorish prisoners occasionally captured, both the King and the -Queen knew that there was utter demoralization within the walls of -Granada. The weak and effeminate spirit of the Moorish King, Boabdil, -would not listen to the counsels of those who were willing to die with -honor in an attempt to break out of the city. His eldest son, a boy -of seven, had been captured by the Spaniards when an effort was made -secretly to transport the child to the coast. This had broken the heart -of Boabdil. He had no idea of civilized warfare, and would not believe -the messages sent him that the boy was well cared for, and Queen -Isabella charged herself with his welfare. The word "Kismet"--"It is -fate," paralyzed King Boabdil. He waited where his ancestors had fought -boldly and had taken desperate chances with unshaken courage. - -Although there was still hard fighting to be done, the presence of -the Queen and her ladies led to many splendid entertainments, jousts, -and tilts. Neither Diego nor Don Felipe, nor any of their party, saw -anything of these brilliant gaieties. The Admiral lived in retirement, -except when he went to attend men in power, whose understanding and -approval of his plans he wished to secure before making his final -appeal to the sovereigns after the city should have fallen. He soon -found that, although King Ferdinand was not averse to the enterprise, -he was quite willing to let the money for the expedition come out of -the coffers of Castile instead of Arragon, and that the ships should -be named by Castilians. Alonzo de Quintanilla was a hard-working -accountant who went to his daily labor early and remained late. In -the evening he, and the Admiral, Fray Piņa, and the two lads, supped -together; their talk was not of festivals, but of the chances of the -great voyage of the Admiral. - -Sometimes, however, the party was increased by the presence of Luis de -St. Angel, also an accountant of the Queen, and Father Diego de Deza, -tutor to Prince Juan and one of the most scientific men of the age. To -him, in later life, the Admiral bore tribute in writing as one of the -two men without whom he could never have got the support of the Court -of Spain in his enterprise. The second man so immortalized was Juan -Perez. - -With the two ecclesiastics and Alonzo de Quintanilla the Admiral held -long conferences, not only on scientific subjects, but on the best -method of urging his plan upon the King and the Queen when the time -should be ripe. - -It was plain to the quick intelligence of Diego and Don Felipe that the -two ecclesiastics, both of them able mathematicians and astronomers, -frankly conceded the superiority in mathematics and astronomy to the -Admiral, and their faith in his ideas was strengthened continually by -the evidences of his extraordinary attainments, as well as his great -natural powers and lofty and unsullied character. - -There were two others who sometimes joined this circle of remarkable -men. One was Don Tomaso, who brought with him the beautiful knight, -Ponce de Leon. In spite of his surpassing good looks, Ponce de Leon was -an intelligent man, and had, for his own pleasure, studied navigation. -He would talk much with the Admiral and Fray Piņa, studying maps and -making astronomical calculations, while the Daredevil Knight, twirling -his mustaches, clanking his sword, and rattling his great spurs, would -charm Diego and Don Felipe with stories of jousts at arms, for the -favor of the ladies, and splendid balls at which those same ladies -danced with gallant gentlemen. - -Doņa Christina was in attendance upon Queen Isabella, who, with the -King, lived in the midst of the camp in tents almost as splendid as -those which had been destroyed by fire the first night of the Queen's -arrival. It was arranged that Don Felipe should visit his mother once a -week; and the first visit he paid Doņa Christina he asked permission -to bring Diego, which was granted. This gave Diego great joy. Not only -did he wish to see the kind and gentle Doņa Christina, but he longed -ardently to see the splendid encampment, and the great Queen, for whom -he had a reverence and affection dating back to the days of his first -visit to La Rabida, and to whom he looked as the one person who would -open the way of glory to his father. - -On the appointed day the two youths, with Fray Piņa, set out on foot -for the camp. They were both dressed alike, suitably, but with much -simplicity. As the two started off from the door of their lodgings -Diego looked back, and a sudden pang went to his heart. His father, -who stood watching him, was shabbily dressed, although with that -extraordinary neatness which always distinguished him. It suddenly -came home to Diego the patient sacrifices made for him by his father, -and a passionate desire welled up in his heart that some day he might -repay that father, so noble in every way, and yet with the tenderness -of a woman. But more cheerful thoughts filled Diego's ardent young -mind as he and Don Felipe, with Fray Piņa, passed through the great -encampment and finally came to the tents occupied by the Queen and her -ladies. Doņa Christina received them with the greatest kindness, making -courteous inquiries of the Admiral and expressing much satisfaction -when Fray Piņa told her of the good conduct of Don Felipe and Diego. - -"You shall be rewarded," said Doņa Christina. "In an hour the Queen -sets forth to review the Castilian troops, and, if Fray Piņa will -permit, you may both see that splendid sight." - -The heart of Diego leaped with joy, and he and Don Felipe exchanged -delighted glances. - -It was not Doņa Christina's duty to attend the Queen that day. When the -blowing of the silver trumpets in the clear December noon announced -that the Queen was about to issue from her tent, Fray Piņa and the two -lads went out and stood at a respectful distance watching the splendid -sight. The Queen's charger, a superb war horse, was led out, and a -brilliant array of knights and the gorgeous body-guard awaited her. -Queen Isabella issued from her tent escorted by her ladies. She wore -a handsome but simple riding costume and the same light but beautiful -corselet and arm-pieces of glittering chain mail. On her delicate, fair -head was a small and resplendent casque with purple plumes. She was -that day the sovereign and the soldier. As she caught sight of Fray -Piņa she bowed to him courteously and spoke a word to Doņa Christina, -who beckoned to Fray Piņa and the two youths. Diego could have shouted -for joy when he found himself approaching the Queen. She spoke first to -Fray Piņa, and then to Don Felipe, saying: - -"I am pleased to hear, Don Felipe, that your conduct is good and that -you have learned how to obey, which is a necessary thing for all who -wish to live creditably in the world." - -Then, turning to Diego, she said, sweetly: - -"And this is Diego, the son of the great captain whom I esteem highly. -I remember this youth as a little lad when first his father came to me -at Cordova seven years ago." - -Then the remembrance of Diego falling asleep on the steps of the dais -came to the Queen, and she smiled, saying: - -"You were but a little lad then, and fell asleep with your head upon my -knee. All youths of your age are dear to me, for in them I see the hope -of Spain." - -With that the great Queen bowed in dismissal, and, mounting, showed -perfect horsemanship as she put her horse to the gallop and rode off, -followed by her retinue. - -The two boys, with Fray Piņa, scampered through the camp and were able -to reach a point where they had a full view of the Castilian troops -drawn up in splendid order upon the open plain. The Queen's appearance -was greeted with thundering cheers, with the clash of lances in the -bright air, the joyous rattling of swords in their scabbards and salvos -of artillery, and the playing of the national hymn. Queen Isabella rode -up and down the ranks inspecting everything with a keen eye and sharp -judgment, questioning the officers with the knowledge of a king as -well as of a queen. When the inspection was over, the troops marched -past, saluting their sovereign; and the Queen, with the great standard -of Castile held above her, gracefully acknowledged every salute. The -march-past over, the Queen then visited the sick quarters of the camp, -going through the hospital tents, cheering and encouraging the poor -inmates. When this was over and the Queen, with her retinue, returned -to the royal tents, it was late in the afternoon. Fray Piņa and the two -lads were already in Doņa Christina's tent to see the Queen dismount. -Doņa Christina, within the tent, opened the door. She held by the hand -a little black-eyed, dark-skinned, sad-looking boy about the age of -little Fernando. - -"This," she said, to Fray Piņa, in Spanish, which the child did not -understand, "is the son of King Boabdil, held as a hostage. Every day -the Queen has the little boy brought to her, or visits him privately to -show him some kindness. To-day she will come into this tent to speak to -him." - -In another minute the Queen entered unceremoniously from the adjoining -tent. The little boy's sad face brightened as he saw her, and, letting -go of Doņa Christina's hand, he went willingly to the Queen and -respectfully kissed her hand. The Queen, putting her arm around his -shoulder, gave him a little toy, a horse, carved and painted, and -said to him a few words in the Moorish tongue. The boy, silent and -undemonstrative, was yet not unfeeling, and his face showed a faint -pleasure. - -The Queen then entered into a short conversation with Fray Piņa. She -was fond of the society of learned men, and always treated them with -much respect. Fray Piņa, with quick art, brought in the name of the -Admiral, saying that Father de Deza and himself profited much by the -Admiral's superior scientific knowledge. - -"We are but postulants, madam," he said, "in mathematics and astronomy -when compared with the Genoese navigator. This Father de Deza and I -often say to each other." - -The Queen looked fixedly at Fray Piņa, showing herself impressed by -such words from such men. Then, in a few moments, she left the tent, -accompanied by Doņa Christina, who still held the little prisoner by -the hand. - -Diego and Don Felipe then walked back through the sharp December -afternoon to their lodgings in the town. The brilliant military -spectacle they had seen made them long for more of the same kind. They -were at the age when they chafed for action, not realizing how little -prepared they were for it and that the stern rule under which they -lived was the best school for them. Still, so strong was the pressure -brought to bear upon them by Fray Piņa and by the Admiral that they did -well at their studies. - -Meanwhile, they were not the only ones whose patience was painfully -tried. The Admiral had the promise of the King and the Queen that as -soon as the struggle with the Moors was over they would arrange for -the great voyage. It was only a question of time now when the city of -Granada must surrender. The arrival of the Queen had put new force into -an attack already vigorous. The Spaniards gave the Moors no rest by day -or night. First at one gate and then at another, they made desperate -assaults, overwhelming the Moorish troops and driving them back with -terrible loss into the city. - -The Admiral, hoping that his sublime projects would immediately follow -the fall of Granada, was eager to make his arrangements that he might -begin his voyage early in the summer. But at the moment when, after -eighteen years of desperate and determined struggle, the dayspring of -hope was at hand, an unexpected difficulty arose. Fernando de Talavera, -Archbishop of Toledo, who was destined to be the first Archbishop of -Granada, a man of honesty, but without enthusiasm, who had heretofore -befriended the Admiral, strongly opposed the honors which the Admiral -claimed in the event of his success. Diego and Don Felipe knew this, -not from the mouth of the Admiral, who scorned to make any complaint, -but from the conversation of those around them. Diego saw his father go -forth every day to wait in the anterooms of the great, who seemed to -have no time to listen to him. The events passing before them were so -brilliant and dazzling that they put off the more stupendous thing, the -discovery of a new world. Every day, in the evening, when the Admiral -returned, he showed unbroken patience; but Diego knew that no progress -had been made. Once he heard his father say to Fray Piņa: - -"I will wait here patiently until the fall of the city. If then no one -will listen to me, I shall leave Spain, and another country shall have -the glory of my discoveries." - -All through December the cordon was tightened around the city, the loss -inflicted on the Moors greater, their sorties more desperate and more -disastrous. It was hoped that by Christmas the standard of the Cross -would float over the great mosque in the Alhambra; but still the city -held out desperately. On Christmas Day, however, an adventure happened -that thrilled Diego and Don Felipe and all who saw it. On that day the -fighting had been unusually severe all around the city of Granada, -except on the plateau of the Gate of Justice, which faced Santa Fé. -At midday, as the Admiral, with Fray Piņa and Diego and Don Felipe, -stood at an open window watching the fighting, they saw three carts, -apparently loaded with provisions, steal out of a small ravine close -to the Gate of Justice, and then trot rapidly to the gate. The carts -were evidently seen and their burdens noted, for the postern-gate was -instantly opened. The first cart entered and became at once wedged in -such a manner that the gate could not be shut. Suddenly a knight clad -in a light and glittering chain armor and mounted on a superb black -horse dashed up the acclivity, followed by fifteen other knights, -all picked men. The Admiral and Fray Piņa recognized the leader, the -gallant Hernando Perez del Pulgar, a cousin of the Prior, Juan Perez, -and a man renowned for his daring even among the fearless and brilliant -knights of Spain. He carried on his lance-head a fluttering piece of -linen; and, dashing at the narrow opening, his horse leaped over the -cart, and was followed by another knight, whom Diego and Don Felipe saw -was Don Tomaso de Gama. Fourteen other knights rode into the gateway -and disappeared. - -"What does it mean?" said Diego, turning to Fray Piņa. - -"It means, I fear," replied Fray Piņa, "that those sixteen gallant -gentlemen are lost to Spain; they will never return." - -"I think they will," replied the Admiral. "Hernando Perez del Pulgar -is a daring man, but prudent withal. He has not entered the Moorish -city to be trapped along with his companions; some of them will return." - -As the Admiral spoke they saw the carts push slowly through the gateway -and become strongly jammed with each other. - -"See," said the Admiral, "the gate remains open. There is a stratagem, -you may depend." - -By that time the word had sped from mouth to mouth through the town of -Santa Fé and among the encamped soldiers of what was going on, and, -like the Admiral, all saw that the postern-gate was purposely blocked -and kept open by the supposed food-carts. Thus all eyes were fixed upon -the open gateway, visible in the bright noon. The King and the Queen -had been informed, and had come from their tents, surrounded by the -court, to watch the exciting event happening before their eyes. Ten -minutes passed, ten minutes of agonized tension and breathless anxiety, -and then the black charger of Del Pulgar appeared before the open gate, -and, making a magnificent leap over the carts, which acted as a wedge -in the gate, the knight appeared shouting the battle-cry of Spain: - -"Santiago for Spain!" - -He still carried his lance; but the fluttering piece of white linen was -no longer there. He dashed down the declivity, followed by the fifteen -knights, their numbers counted by tens of thousands of anxious eyes. As -the last of the sixteen men leaped the cart a great cry went up from -the city and camps of Santa Fé: - -"Santiago, Santiago for Spain!" burst from the watching multitudes. - -Many of the women were weeping with excitement and triumph. As the -sixteen men disappeared in the valley Don Felipe found himself clasping -Diego, both of them shouting in their high, boyish voices: - -"Santiago, Santiago for Spain!" - -At that moment Alonzo de Quintanilla burst into the room with the great -news. - -"The brave knight, Del Pulgar," he said, "meaning to do honor to Christ -on this Christmas Day, had a Christian prayer painted on a piece -of linen to nail upon the doors of the great mosque in Granada. He -arranged a stratagem by which a gate of the city should be open, and -then, riding in with his companions, he galloped up to the door of the -great mosque and nailed upon it with his dagger the Christian prayer. -The Moors were so taken by surprise that they could not stop him. Not -one of the sixteen knights received a scratch." - -The eyes of the Admiral shone bright. He loved deeds of valor, and the -daring of the young knights pleased him well. - -While the elders of the party were discussing the splendid dash of Del -Pulgar and the possibilities of the siege, Diego, who was standing at -the open window, silently motioned to Don Felipe to join him. They -saw a Moorish officer ride out from the Gate of Justice and walk his -horse up and down the plateau of the Vega. He wore the heavy turban, -under which the Moors had a small steel skull-cap, and he had on a -breastplate and his arm-pieces of solid armor. He carried no lance or -shield, but only a great curved sword, such as the Moors used. His -horse was a milk-white Arabian with a long and flowing mane and tail, -dyed purple at the ends. From the horse's tail floated, tied with -bands of red and yellow, the Spanish colors, a piece of white linen. A -cry of rage and horror went up from the watching multitudes of Santa -Fé; it was the Christian prayer that had been nailed to the door of the -mosque by Hernando Perez del Pulgar, and which the Moorish warrior had -torn down and was dragging at his horse's heels in full sight of the -Christian city and armies. - -The Admiral and Fray Piņa and Alonzo de Quintanilla turned to the -window and saw what was happening. Great crowds were already assembled, -and the streets of Santa Fé and the walls of Granada were black with -people. The Moorish warrior passed slowly toward the edge of the -valley, or rather ravine, and, reining up his horse, dashed an iron -glove as far as he could throw it toward Santa Fé. The challenge did -not remain long unanswered. Across the bridge of the Xeni and up the -rocky roadway a Spanish cavalier was seen urging his horse. - -"That is Manuel Garcilosa," said Alonzo de Quintanilla. "I know him -well. He is not of noble birth; but, by Heaven! he will be ennobled if -he rescues the Christian prayer from the Moor." - -Garcilosa, like the Moor, had neither lance nor shield, but a sword, -which, like most of the Spanish swords, was a Toledo blade, made of the -finest strength and temper. - -Arrived on the plateau, Garcilosa stopped to breathe his horse, a noble -chestnut. Man and horse stood motionless, as if cast in bronze. The -Moor advanced warily, his horse at the trot. Garcilosa, his sword in -rest, seemed waiting for the onslaught. When the Moorish warrior was -within twenty yards of Garcilosa, he gave his horse the spur, and the -chestnut sprang forward like an arrow released from the bow. The Moor -also put spurs to his horse to meet the shock, but Garcilosa was too -quick for him. The Arabian horse swerved a little, answering a touch of -the bridle; but the chestnut, dashing full at him, man and horse were -ridden down. The white horse had fallen upon his master; but with the -intelligence of the Arabian he struggled to his feet in an instant. -The Moorish warrior rose, too, as Garcilosa dismounted. Then followed -a desperate combat on foot. The Moor was the heavier man; the Spanish -gentleman the more active. They fought in a narrow circle, the clashing -of their swords ringing out in the clear December air. Blood streamed -from the faces of both, and presently the Moor was seen to stagger. -Garcilosa suddenly gave his antagonist a thrust upon the sword-arm -which brought him to the ground. Then, running to the Arabian, which -stood perfectly still, Garcilosa, first tearing away the Christian -prayer and putting it in his breast, took his Toledo blade and cut off -the flowing tail of the Arabian horse. Cries resounded from the people -on the walls of the city. The horse was of the breed of the Prophet -Mohammed, and to cut off his tail was reckoned sacrilege. - -The Moor still lay insensible on the ground; and Garcilosa, vaulting -into the saddle upon the white horse, gave his own chestnut steed a -thwack with the sword, which sent him flying back down the road he -knew, followed by his master on the Arabian steed, hard galloping. Once -more shouts and cries of "Santiago, Santiago for Spain!" rent the air. - -[Illustration: GARCILOSA SUDDENLY GAVE HIS ANTAGONIST A THRUST UPON THE -SWORD-ARM] - -When Garcilosa rode into Santa Fé he was met by a messenger from the -King and the Queen. With Del Pulgar he received the thanks of both and -the cheers of the men and the tears of the women. That day Garcilosa -was ennobled, becoming Don Garcilosa del Vega, in commemoration of the -spot on which he fought his gallant fight. - -On January 1, 1492, the offer of surrender was made by King Boabdil. -The following day the Moorish king and all his followers passed out -of Granada and left Spain free from the foreign invaders after nearly -eight hundred years. The joy and triumph of the day inspired every -heart, even the torturing soul of the great Admiral, who was forgotten -and overlooked in the universal excitement. All the highest nobles -and grandees of Spain--the warriors, the statesmen, the scholars, all -that made Spain great--were assembled on that January day to see the -surrender of Boabdil. Only one man, and he the greatest of them all, -was not provided with a place and a position. That was the Admiral, -Christobal Colon. Diego, however, sharing as he did everything with Don -Felipe, was enabled by the thoughtfulness of Doņa Christina to see the -inspiring spectacle. - -The surrender of King Boabdil to the Spanish sovereigns was to take -place near a little stone building, until that time a Mohammedan -mosque. On that day it had been consecrated as a Christian chapel, the -chapel of San Sebastian. - -Early in the morning the two lads, with Fray Piņa, walked through the -town, which was wild with jubilation, down the rocky path to the place -assigned for them. Already vast crowds of persons were assembled. The -Spaniards had taken possession of the city the day before, and Fernando -de Talavera had been created Archbishop of Granada. To him was allotted -the honor of raising the standard of Spain over the great mosque, -now to become a Christian cathedral. Some expressed pity for the -unfortunate Moorish king; but Fray Piņa, a man of lion heart, had only -contempt for him. - -"He has no courage," said Fray Piņa, to the two lads, watching the -enormous concourse coming together and the marching across the plain -of the armies of Castile and Arragon. "Instead of showing his people -an example of fortitude in adversity, he mounted his mule and rode all -through the streets of Granada beating his breast and tearing his beard -and wailing: 'Woe is me! Woe is me!' and inciting the people to shrieks -and bewailing. Do you think our great Queen Isabella in the place of -the Moorish king would have so acted? No; she would have met disaster -with the same calmness that she meets triumph. No cry would have come -from her lips, no beating of the breast, no tearing of the hair. She -would have been the same great queen in defeat as well as in triumph." - -Every moment in the bright January day the multitude grew larger and -more brilliant. The sound of martial music filled the air as the -victorious armies assembled and the sun glittered upon the casques, -the shining arms, and the splendid standards. Presently the royal -procession appeared. The King and the Queen, with their son, Prince -Juan, and their daughter, the Princess Katharine, all superbly -mounted and surrounded by a magnificent train of nobles, knights, and -ecclesiastics, rode across the plain toward the little chapel by the -side of the rocky road. As Diego and Don Felipe were watching the -glorious sight they heard Doņa Christina's voice close by them. She was -leaning out of a closed litter, with the curtains slightly drawn back. -Within the litter a glimpse could be caught of the little Moorish boy, -the son of King Boabdil. - -Fray Piņa, with Don Felipe and Diego, obeying a signal from Doņa -Christina, advanced to the litter. - -"The Queen," whispered Doņa Christina, "directed that the little boy -be brought here, so at the moment of King Boabdil's surrender the poor -King may have a moment's joy in seeing his child alive and well. Remain -by me until the Queen calls for me." - -The King and the Queen were now approaching very near. The face of King -Ferdinand shone with triumph; and Queen Isabella, although calmness and -dignity itself, had a glorious light in her eyes and a flush in her -cheek deeper than any one had ever seen there before. Her patriotism as -a Castilian, her pride as a sovereign, her earnestness as a Christian, -were all exalted by the driving forth from her kingdom of the enemies -of the people and of the Christian religion. It was, indeed, a -stupendous event for Spain. - -The sound of music, the cheering, and all excited conversation quickly -ceased, as from the Gate of Justice of the city on the heights came -forth a cavalcade. A silence like death seemed to fall upon the world, -which was broken by a sudden, loud crash of masonry. At the request -of King Boabdil, the gate behind him had been forever closed by the -destruction of the towers of masonry on each side of the gateway, -thus blocking it up forever. Every heart was thrilled by the sound, -preternaturally loud in the clear January day. The procession of the -conquered wound its slow way down the hillside, across the bridge, and -up again, until it reached the Spanish sovereigns. Then Boabdil, a -miserable, downcast object, without dignity or fortitude, slipped from -his horse and would have prostrated himself upon the ground and kissed -the hand of King Ferdinand; but this the King magnanimously forbore, -himself dismounting as did the Queen, out of courtesy to the fallen -monarch. At the same time the Moorish vizier handed to King Ferdinand -the keys of the city of Granada. The King passed them to Queen -Isabella, as Granada was in the territory claimed by Castile. These -the Queen in turn gave to Prince Juan, heir to the thrones of Castile -and Arragon, who handed them in his turn to the Count de Tendila, -the new Spanish governor of the city of Granada. At that moment Doņa -Christina, slipping from the litter and holding by the hand the little -Moorish prince, led him to the Queen and placed his hand in hers. As -King Boabdil made his obeisance to her, Queen Isabella placed the hand -of the child in that of the father. The little boy gave a sharp cry of -joy, and the poor weeping Boabdil caught his son to his breast. Then, -in the midst of a death-like silence, every eye saw rising slowly -over the citadel of Granada the red and yellow standard of Spain, the -Gonfalon, until it floated over the flag of the Crescent, which came -down quickly. A great shout that seemed to shake the earth, a crashing -of music, a roaring of artillery, broke forth as if the whole world -rejoiced. The King and the Queen, going into the Christian chapel of -San Sebastian, until that morning a Moorish mosque, fell on their -knees and gave thanks to God for the liberation of their country from -the invader and for the triumph of the Christian religion. - -The event was up to that time the most glorious in the history of Spain -and the most important. But a day was about to dawn for Spain more -brilliant, more imposing, more full of triumph than any country on the -globe has ever known, a day never yet surpassed in all the countries -upon which the sun has risen since. - - - - -V - -THE SPLENDOR OF THE DAWN - - -The Spanish court, the army, and the whole nation gave itself up to -gladness at the driving from Spanish soil of the Moorish invaders. The -city of Granada had to be invested, its government established, the -people who remained provided for, and all of the vast details settled -of a new acquisition. The court remained at Santa Fé, although often -giving audiences and holding splendid functions in the magnificent -palace of the Alhambra in the city of Granada. There were great reviews -of troops, receptions of ambassadors, gorgeous religious ceremonials -in the consecration of the Moorish mosques into Christian churches. -Through it all Diego and Don Felipe pursued their quiet, studious life -under the stern rule of Fray Piņa. Every day the Admiral went upon his -usual round, visiting those persons who were interested in his scheme -and those in power whom he hoped to interest in it. Father Diego de -Deza and Alonzo de Quintanilla remained his steadfast friends. At last, -one day, a fortnight after the surrender of Granada, De Quintanilla -brought the joyful news that the King and the Queen were prepared to -redeem their promise to the Admiral, that when the war with the Moors -had reached a conclusion they would assist him in his enterprise. - -Diego and Don Felipe were wild with delight. To them it seemed as if -the voyage were already made and concluded, the Admiral returning -loaded with honors and Diego made a grandee of Spain. They watched -the Admiral set forth, plainly but suitably dressed, and with that -incomparable air of dignity and composure that always made him a marked -man. All during the morning Fray Piņa found his pupils inattentive and -more disposed to reverie than work; but under his sharp admonition they -were compelled to pay attention. - -It was a little after noon when the sound of steps was heard upon the -stairs, and the Admiral and Alonzo de Quintanilla entered the room. De -Quintanilla appeared deeply agitated, and for the first time there were -indications of subdued anger on the Admiral's part; but his voice, in -speaking, was composed. - -"All is over," he said to Fray Piņa; "I have appeared for the last time -before the great council. They recognize the value of my enterprise; -but under the leadership of Fernando de Talavera, the Archbishop of -Granada, an honest man but narrow, they declare that my claims are -extravagant and should not be allowed. I, in my turn, declared that if -I return I shall give to Spain far more than what I claim--the title of -Admiral of the Ocean Seas and Viceroy and Captain-General of all the -lands I discover, and my son Diego to be page-in-waiting to Prince Juan -in my absence and to become a grandee of Spain if I return successful. -If the spirit of pride be in this, it is a just and honorable pride. -I ask only what I shall acquire by my own strength. Those things have -been refused me in advance. Now, after nine years of effort, I shall -make no further appeal to the Court of Spain. Perhaps the King of -France will be as generous and more just than the sovereigns of Spain." - -The shock of painful surprise kept all silent until Fray Piņa spoke in -a low voice. - -"This is indeed a calamitous decision for Spain." - -"True," said Alonzo de Quintanilla, "but I will say that the Admiral's -course is but just. He treated with the representatives of the King and -the Queen with a noble haughtiness, proving himself their equal, and -demanded firmly, as they recognized the magnificence of his scheme, -that he, at least, should have those honors which must go to some -one. Shall he, the discoverer, be under the authority of a viceroy or -another admiral? They thought he would be intimidated, that in his -anxiety to carry the matter through he would yield what he thought his -due; but he would not." - -And then, growing scarlet in the face, De Quintanilla suddenly brought -his fist down on the table and shouted: - -"Upon the heads of those persons, and especially upon the Archbishop -of Granada, will lie the loss of a new world to Spain!" - -The Admiral remained silent for a moment, and then with his usual -calmness began to make arrangements for his immediate departure with -Diego for France. Diego and Don Felipe were stunned. They knew not -until the moment of separation came how quickly and strongly the bond -of brotherhood had been forged between them. Their elders left them -alone, the Admiral telling Diego to pack at once his few books and -clothes, as they were to mount and ride within three hours. It took but -a short time to collect Diego's books and clothes, Don Felipe helping, -and neither lad saying much. It seemed to them an eternal separation, -and it was indeed doubtful if they would ever meet again. Don Felipe -drew from his finger a little ring made of two hoops entwined. He took -them apart and, placing one on Diego's finger, he put the other back on -his own. - -"As long as we wear each the half of this ring," he said, "we shall be -friends still, no matter how far separated." - -At last, with his small belongings packed in a portmanteau and his -cloak around him, Diego with Don Felipe went down the stair, their -arms entwined about each other's shoulders. At the door stood a horse -for the Admiral and another for Diego, both equipped for hard travel. -There were but three persons to say farewell to the Admiral--Fray -Piņa, Alonzo de Quintanilla, and Luis de St. Angel, controller of the -ecclesiastical revenues. All showed marks of the deepest grief and -chagrin at the loss of the honor and glory for which they had hoped -for their country. No word of remonstrance was said, however, as the -Admiral made his farewells. No one could have judged from his composure -that this meant the wreck and ruin of eighteen years of constant and -earnest effort, nine of which had been spent in Spain. The farewells -were soon said, Diego and Don Felipe kissing each other on the cheek -silently. As Diego flung himself into the saddle and rode off, tears -were dropping upon his face; but he said no word. - -They rode rapidly in the cold January afternoon and were soon clear of -the town. Many persons recognized the Admiral and looked after him -curiously, not understanding the meaning of his sudden departure. When -the Admiral and Diego reached the highroad they rode still faster. -The sky was overcast, and a fine, small rain began to fall. They met -few travelers, and those mostly seeking shelter. When they had ridden -nearly an hour and were nearing the pass at the foot of the mountain -of Elvira, where many desperate battles had been fought between the -Moors and the Christians, the tears were still dropping upon Diego's -face; the whole world seemed dark to him. The Admiral then said to him, -gently: - -"I see you have a good heart, for you are still grieving for Don -Felipe." - -"Yes," answered Diego, "and for you, my father." - -"It is as God wills," replied the Admiral, upon whose lips those words -were often heard. - -The gorge grew dark in the winter twilight, and the rough road was -slippery with rain and snow. They had just crossed the bridge of Pinos -when behind them they heard the clattering of horses' hoofs coming at -a sharp gallop. Neither the Admiral nor Diego turned to see who was -coming. Suddenly, the rider, on his steaming horse, came alongside and, -laying a bold hand upon the Admiral's bridle, brought the horse back -on his haunches. In the gloom of the evening the Daredevil Knight, Don -Tomaso de Gama, was recognized. - -"I come, Christobal Colon, with the command of her Majesty, the Queen, -that you are to turn about and ride back to Santa Fé with me--now--this -instant--in the present moment." - -Even as Don Tomaso spoke he turned the head of the Admiral's horse -around; but the Admiral checked him. - -"I honor and respect her Majesty, the Queen," he said, sharply; "but I -owe her no allegiance. I was born a subject of the Duke of Genoa, and I -am a naturalized subject of the King of Portugal." - -"That is all very well, Christobal Colon, born a subject of the Duke of -Genoa and a naturalized subject of the King of Portugal, but I have ten -good men-at-arms within a stone's throw, and if you will not ride back -with me holding the reins in your own hand you shall ride back with -your hands tied behind your back and a man-at-arms on each side of you -holding your bridle." - -At that Diego heard what he had known but seldom in his life, a clear -laugh from the grave Admiral. The impudence of the young knight, the -threat of force against a man accustomed to command all, like the -Admiral, could not but move to laughter. Don Tomaso, suiting the action -to the word, gave the Admiral's horse a sharp cut, and before they knew -it all three were trotting rapidly back across the bridge. The Admiral -held the reins in his own hands; but the Daredevil Knight kept a firm -grip upon the bridle. - -"And for what does her Majesty, the Queen, wish me to return?" asked -the Admiral. - -"I do not know," responded Don Tomaso. "I have not been accustomed -to ask the King and the Queen their reasons; but I know that Luis de -St. Angel went straight to her Majesty, Queen Isabella, and told her -plainly that she was throwing away the greatest honor and glory that -ever awaited any sovereign and any country in not granting you the -terms to which you were justly entitled, and that you must be brought -back to Santa Fé by force, if necessary. He was reinforced by that -stern tutor of Prince Juan, Father de Deza. After a short conference -with the Queen, St. Angel and De Quintanilla ran to me and said: - -"'Go you and fetch Christobal Colon back, and tell him all shall be -as he wishes. We send you, knowing you to be a daring fellow, and -not to be overawed by Christobal Colon, as most men are.' So here -I am, carrying back the Admiral of the Ocean Seas, the Viceroy and -Captain-General of all the lands you discover, and your son, Don Diego, -grandee of the first rank in Spain." - -Diego listened, almost dazed by Don Tomaso's words. Presently the -Admiral spoke as the horses kept up their sharp trot through the pass, -growing darker every moment. - -"Where are your ten men-at-arms, Don Tomaso?" - -"I have no men-at-arms," answered Don Tomaso, coolly, "but I have a -good harquebus; if you ask for my order, this shall be my order." - -At that Don Tomaso drew his harquebus and leveled it straight at the -Admiral, who laughed again and put it aside. - -"I wish you were a seaman, Don Tomaso," he said. "I should make you my -first lieutenant." - -After riding for nearly an hour in the darkness they saw the lights -of Santa Fé, and soon they were clattering through the streets. The -Admiral was about to take the way to his lodgings when the Daredevil -Knight again laid his hand upon the bridle. - -"No," he said, "we cross the Vega and ride straight to the Queen's -pavilion, where her Majesty awaits you." Then, having assumed the -direction of the Admiral, the Daredevil Knight also gave orders to -Diego. "Go you," he said, "back to your lodgings. Your father will -return sometime before midnight--perhaps." - -Diego leaned over and caught his father's hand and kissed it. He had no -words in which to express the tumult of joy and pride in his soul. - -Ten minutes afterward he dismounted from his spent and dripping horse -in front of the lodgings he had left only a few hours before. The next -moment he was dashing up the long, dark, narrow stairs. He stopped for -a moment outside the door of the little room in which he had lived and -studied for many weeks with Don Felipe and softly opened the door. Don -Felipe sat at the table, upon which a rushlight burned, making a little -glow in the darkness. He was neither reading nor writing, but leaning -his head upon his hands, looking the image of forlornness. Diego -slipped in softly and threw himself upon Don Felipe. - -"All is as we wished!" he shouted. "It is glorious, glorious, I tell -you! When the Queen heard my father was indeed gone she sent Don Tomaso -galloping after him, who brought him back. The Queen will do for my -father all he asks. He is now on his way to the Queen, and you and I, -Don Felipe, are here together once more!" - -In one day the whole face of the world seemed to have changed for -Diego. The Admiral, who, but a little while before, could count on -only a few steady friends like Alonzo de Quintanilla and Luis de St. -Angel, both accountants to the Queen, and Father de Deza, was now -treated with the greatest outward respect by all. Fernando de Talavera, -Archbishop of Granada, withdrew his opposition to the Admiral, which -had been based solely upon what he considered too high honors to be -demanded in the event of success. He believed in the Admiral as a great -navigator and looked for the success of the expedition. - -One of the points tenaciously upheld by the Admiral was that certain -honors should be given his sons, especially Diego, as the elder. -That the enterprise would result in immortal glory for himself the -Admiral never doubted; but with the passionate love of his children -was the natural desire that they should have a place and a degree of -consideration. For this reason, after many long consultations with -Father de Deza, tutor to Prince Juan, the Admiral had required that -Diego should be ennobled by the title of Don and should be made a -page-in-waiting to Prince Juan. It was by this steadfast maintenance of -the dignity of his position that the Admiral, a foreigner and penniless -but for the Queen's pension, made it apparent that he understood in -advance the enormous gift he was about to make to Spain. All he asked -for Diego was conceded to him at once on his return to Santa Fé. - -At any other time the thought of the singular change in his life from -poverty and uncertainty into a footing of equality with the grandees of -Spain would have impressed Diego more deeply; but the thought uppermost -in his mind was the great voyage upon which his father was to set -forth. Everything seemed small beside it. - -It seemed to Diego and Don Felipe as if they had entered upon a new -world since the pleasant autumn days at La Rabida. - -They had witnessed one of the greatest and most splendid events of -the age in the driving-out of the Moors from Spain, and they were -brought close to the contemplation of an enterprise so vast that the -imagination was bewildered. In the midst of it they lived the ordinary -life of youths of their age under a strict master and stern discipline, -but they saw and heard men and things that fall to the lot of few young -souls. - -The winter passed like a dream. Everywhere was the coming voyage of the -Admiral talked of, and the King and the Queen supported him loyally. -Especially was this true of Queen Isabella, whose lofty and resolute -character made her very steadfast in all her undertakings. Diego saw -but little of his father in those fleeting months between January and -April. Once it had been difficult for the Admiral to obtain audiences -of those in power; now he could not see all who flocked to his plain -lodgings. It was then expected that he would be able to collect his -squadron and sail before the first of June. On a glorious April day -the King and the Queen were to sign the agreement between themselves -as independent sovereigns and the Genoese captain, to whom they were -to give the noble title of Admiral of the Ocean Seas, and Viceroy and -Captain-General of all lands to the westward. The great event was to -take place at the Alhambra, in Granada, and it was on that day that -Diego and Don Felipe first saw the dazzling and overwhelming beauty of -the palace of the Moorish kings. The splendor of the "Red Palace," as -the Alhambra means, the glory of its architecture, the magnificence of -its halls and courts and fountains, the treasures of gold and silver -and jewels used in decorating its vaulted ceilings and marble walls, -amazed all who saw them, from the King and the Queen down to the -private soldiers and servants. - -On this spring morning, April 17, 1492, Diego and Don Felipe were to be -of the group that was to accompany the Admiral into the presence of the -King and the Queen, where the agreements were to be formally signed and -sealed. - -The Queen, with characteristic delicacy, had advanced a sum of money to -the Admiral which enabled him to make a good appearance for himself and -for Diego. Gorgeous dress would have been out of place upon Columbus, -whose personality made all accessories appear trivial. On that day he -wore a plain costume of black satin with a small collar of lace and -a cloak of black cloth. At his side was a plain sword. Diego and Don -Felipe were dressed alike in dark-blue cloth with handsome shoes of -Cordovan leather and black satin cloaks. The Prior of La Rabida, Juan -Perez, the first friend the Admiral had found in Spain and the most -devoted, was to be present on this great day, which was one of triumph -to him. With him he was to bring the little Fernando, in the care of -Brother Lawrence. The party from La Rabida reached Santa Fé on the -night of April 16th, and were joyfully greeted. Fernando was delighted -to see his father and brother again, and was charmed with the sight of -the knights and soldiers. - -At ten o'clock next morning, when Diego and Don Felipe were ready to -start, they were sent for to go to the Admiral's room. On the table lay -two swords with sword-belts. - -"Don Felipe and my son," said the Admiral, "the time has now come when -you must wear swords, not as boys, but as men. I give you these praying -you to consider the solemn meaning of a sword. A sword means courage, -truth, and honor. Courage is the greatest virtue in the world, for on -it all other virtues are built. It does not avail a man to love the -truth unless he has the courage to speak it. The beginning of lying -is cowardice. Sin has many tools; but a lie is the handle that fits -them all. So must you ever be ready to draw your swords in the cause of -truth. A man should reverence his sword as a symbol of his honor. When -he is disgraced his sword is taken from him and broken, signifying that -he has no more honor. Do you understand this?" - -"Yes," instantly and clearly replied both youths. - -The Admiral then, taking the first sword, clasped it around the waist -of Don Felipe, who, drawing it from its scabbard, kneeled and kissed it -reverently. Then, the Admiral belting the second sword around Diego's -body, Diego, too, kneeled and kissed the sword. Both were vividly -impressed with the Admiral's words and the deep meaning he had attached -to them. - -"It is a good thing, though not of obligation," said the Admiral, -"that when a young man receives his sword he shall take it to the -church and, laying it on the altar, shall spend the night in prayer and -contemplation, asking the help and guidance of God in his future life." - -"That will we do, my father," answered Diego. - -"This very night," added Don Felipe. - -The gift of the swords seemed at once to make men of the two youths. -They were too intelligent not to understand the full meaning of what -they had received. - -Below in the street well-caparisoned horses were awaiting them. The -Admiral, accompanied by his unfailing friends, De Quintanilla and Luis -de St. Angel and Juan Perez, the Prior of La Rabida, rode in advance. -Behind him came Fray Piņa, while Brother Lawrence, mounted on a steady -mule, carried in his arms the little Fernando. Diego and Don Felipe -brought up the rear. The eyes of the curious crowd of soldiers and -citizens were turned upon the cavalcade. They no longer ridiculed the -Admiral, but regarded him with fear, as a person likely to draw to -him many ardent souls in his voyage into the unknown. Many remarked, -however, upon the beauty of the little Fernando and the manly and noble -appearance of Diego. They rode through the town of Santa Fé, across -the bridge of the Xeni, and climbed the broad acclivity down which the -abject Moorish king had traveled on a January day. Neither Diego nor -Don Felipe had been within the walls of Granada, and they were deeply -interested in the strange and gorgeous architecture of the city, the -barred windows of the women's quarters, and the mosques, now converted -into Christian churches. - -At the Gate of the Pomegranates the Alhambra really begins, that -marvel of beauty, palace and citadel in one, with walls a mile in -circumference, and containing within itself wonderful varieties of -loveliness. At this gate the party dismounted and proceeded on foot -through the gardens and courtyards leading to the Hall of Ambassadors, -where the King and the Queen in state would pledge themselves to the -Admiral and sign and seal their agreements. Never had any of them -seen anything like the splendors of the glorious courts and superb -corridors. The gardens were blooming in all the beauty of the late -April, and in the trees and shrubbery were the rare birds caught and -tamed for the pleasure of the Moorish kings. - -Through long, arched colonnades of gleaming malachite they passed; -through the exquisite gardens watered by the icy waters of the -Darro, trickling in silver streams or in crystal waterfalls. In every -beautiful courtyard great fountains played, making showers of diamonds -in the April sun of Andalusia. The air was drenched with the perfume -of violets and hyacinths, jasmine and myrtle blooming in splendid -profusion. - -At the entrance to the magnificent Court of the Lions they were -met by a brilliant group of court officials, and passed from one -superb apartment to another until they reached the splendid Hall of -Ambassadors. - -The scene was worthy of the stupendous event that was to take place -in it. The walls of polished marble, inlaid with arabesques, its -graceful columns, its lofty and beautiful ceilings, its riot of color, -was overwhelming in its beauty. Here had the Moorish kings exercised -their despotic power; here had they treated with haughty contempt the -ambassadors of the Christian nations. Upon this glorious throne-room -had been spent the vast sums wrung from the toilers of the land and -sea, the money gained by piracy, robbery, and the ransom of Christian -captives. Driven forth at last from it, their places had been taken by -great and enlightened Christian monarchs. Ferdinand of Arragon was a -brilliant soldier, a statesman, shrewd in affairs, and of enlightened -views according to his time. The name of Isabella of Castile makes a -blaze of splendor upon the page of history. Not less desirous than -Ferdinand for the glory and material welfare of her country, Isabella -had a loftier mind, a nobler conception of all things, than any monarch -of the age. She looked to the spread of the Christian religion, to -the civilization of the new peoples in those far lands which Columbus -might discover. It was her great and magnanimous mind which caused the -introduction into the compact with Columbus of that clause providing -that the inhabitants of the new world to be discovered should have the -same protection of law as the Spaniards themselves. - -At the farther end of the Hall of Ambassadors, upon the great gilded -throne of the Moorish kings, sat in throne chairs King Ferdinand and -Queen Isabella, Prince Juan and Princess Katharine seated below them, -and surrounded by a huge company of officials, statesmen, soldiers, -and ecclesiastics. At the steps of the throne was a small table with -pens and inkhorns and a great document inscribed upon many leaves of -parchment. It was the agreement between the courts of Arragon and -Castile with Columbus, and it was in that hour to be signed by King -Ferdinand and Queen Isabella and the great Admiral. - -It is the prerogative of men of the first order of genius that those -nearest to them, who see them oftenest, should have greater reverence -for them than those who do not know them so well. So it was with -Columbus. Never had those who had been associated with him through his -eighteen years of toil, poverty, disappointment, broken hopes, and -baffled plans admired him so much as at the moment when he entered -the great hall. The friends who escorted him fell back. Columbus, -taking the hand of the little Fernando, placed it in that of Diego and -advanced alone to the foot of the throne, where he knelt respectfully. -All present, from the King and the Queen down to Diego and Don Felipe, -showed a visible agitation and tremulous emotion at what was about to -take place, except one person; that was the great Admiral himself. He, -a man of the people, a foreigner without fortune, with no endowment but -his genius, his courage, his virtue, was about to be invested, in case -of his successful return, with honors and dignities that dwarfed those -of the highest nobles present and placed him one step in advance of -all of them. King Ferdinand's keen face wore an expression of triumph -he could not conceal. The cost of the expedition was small, and the -King had become convinced that the chances of a stupendous return were -very great. Queen Isabella was inspired with a profound and noble -enthusiasm; she had eagerly offered to pledge her jewels, and on this -offer the amount of money had been raised necessary for the expedition. - -The Queen's face was unusually pale; but her eyes, of a dark and -beautiful blue, were shining, and she leaned forward in her chair, -returning with a deep bow the reverence made her by the Admiral. He -alone was perfectly composed, and gave no sign either of triumph or -of nervousness. When he rose from his knees, a chair was placed for -him, and then Luis de St. Angel read in a loud voice the terms of the -agreement which was to be signed. These were as follows: - - 1. That Columbus should have for himself during his life, and his - heirs and successors forever, the office of admiral in all the lands - and continents which he might discover or acquire in the ocean, with - similar honors and prerogatives to those enjoyed by the high admiral - of Castile in his district. - - 2. That he should be viceroy and governor-general over all the - said lands and continents, with the privilege of nominating three - candidates for the government of each island or province, one of whom - should be selected by the sovereigns. - - 3. That he should be entitled to reserve for himself one-tenth of all - pearls, precious stones, gold, silver, spices, and all other articles - and merchandise, in whatever manner found, bought, bartered, or gained - within his admiralty, the costs being first deducted. - - 4. That he, or his lieutenant, should be the sole judge in all - causes and disputes arising out of traffic between those countries - and Spain, provided the high admiral of Castile had similar - jurisdiction in his district. - - 5. That he might then, and at all times, contribute an eighth part of - the expenses in fitting out vessels to sail on this enterprise and - receive an eighth part of the profits. - -[Illustration: THE SIGNING OF THE DOCUMENTS OF AGREEMENT] - -Splendid, indeed, were these terms, but all present knew that the great -Admiral would accept nothing less; and they respected him the more for -his steady defense of his rights. When the reading was over, Luis de -St. Angel, taking the copies in duplicate, ascended the steps of the -throne and laid them first before King Ferdinand, who signed them. He -then handed them to Queen Isabella, who also signed them, after which -she clasped her hands and engaged a moment in silent prayer. Then the -documents were handed to Columbus, and he, in his turn, signed them. -A tremor ran through the whole of the great company; the tension was -relaxed. The King and the Queen descended from the throne and, followed -by Prince Juan and Princess Katharine and a splendid train, passed out -of the hall. Luis de St. Angel made a sign to Columbus, who remained -standing as did the rest of the company. In a minute or two St. Angel -returned, and speaking a word to Columbus, the Admiral motioned to -Diego, who followed his father and St. Angel. They crossed the vast -hall and entered a small, high-ceiled room where the King and the Queen -awaited them with Fernando de Talavera, Archbishop of Granada, and Doņa -Christina, as lady-in-waiting to the Queen. There were also present -Prince Juan and Princess Katharine. The Admiral, on being greeted by -the King and the Queen, expressed in a few words his deep sense of -gratitude. The Queen then said: - -"We are now prepared to fulfil the request you made of us some months -ago, and to issue letters patent giving your eldest son the title of -Don, and making him a page-in-waiting to our son, Prince Juan, and -granting him an allowance for his maintenance. I, myself, Christobal -Colon, will not forget your son during your absence and will keep -informed of his conduct and progress in study. Doņa Christina will -represent me. For your younger son we shall also provide suitably, -though he is not of an age to be at court." - -"I earnestly thank your Majesties," replied the Admiral, "especially -for the gracious offer you make of keeping informed concerning my son's -conduct and progress. It shall be my constant prayer and hope that my -son may never be unworthy of your Majesties' kindness. And my thanks -are also made to the noble lady, Doņa Christina." - -Diego then advanced and made his obeisance to the sovereigns, Queen -Isabella giving him her hand to kiss. Nobility of soul and kindness -of heart radiated from the Queen, and Diego felt that he would be ten -times a traitor if he did not do his best to deserve her good opinion. -The King and Queen then engaged in earnest conversation with the -Admiral, and Diego had time to observe Prince Juan at closer range than -ever before. He was a handsome, slender youth, strongly resembling his -illustrious mother in the frankness and nobility of his countenance; -but his slenderness and delicacy foreboded that his life would not be -long, although he lived to be knighted upon the field of battle by his -father. The Princess Katharine, destined also for a tragic fate as the -wife of the eighth Henry of England, though then but fourteen years of -age, also resembled the Queen, and had a dignity and a fearlessness of -character that was to sustain her through her stormy and unfortunate -life. Diego felt all confidence when he looked into the honest and -kindly eyes of Prince Juan, and thought to himself: "This must be a -noble prince, being the son of his mother." - -After a short conference the Admiral was dismissed, and in a little -while Diego had rejoined Don Felipe and Fray Piņa and Brother Lawrence -with the little Fernando. Leaving the splendid palace, they rode back -through the soft, bright April noon to their lodgings in Santa Fé. -Diego said nothing of what had passed until he found himself alone -in the small, plain room he shared with Don Felipe. Then he told Don -Felipe all. - -"If I should ever forget the kindness of the great Queen, or fail to -live as she expects me to, I think I should have the blackest heart in -the world," he said. "Besides giving me honors and money, she gave me -kindness, and your mother, Doņa Christina, has said that she will have -a care for me as for you. What a good woman your mother must be, Don -Felipe!" - -"The best on earth," answered Don Felipe. "As good as Queen Isabella." - -Diego then unbuckled his sword and laid it on the table, and Don Felipe -did the same. Then came a long pause before Diego spoke. - -"This is the first day," he said, "that we have worn swords as men. -Ought we not to consecrate them with prayer as knights do?" - -"Yes," answered Don Felipe. "My mother has told me that my father, when -first he was girt with a sword, spent the night in prayer on his knees -before the altar of the Cathedral of Seville." - -"Then," replied Diego, gravely, "let us ask that we may lay our swords -upon the altar of San Sebastian this night and pray earnestly that we -may be worthy to wear our swords in honor." - -That night at ten o'clock Diego and Don Felipe walked through the -quiet streets of Santa Fé, the darkness lighted only by the watchmen's -lanterns and the watch fires of the sleeping camp, and the silence -broken only by the warders' call and the sentries' challenge. The -night was illuminated by a great white moon hanging high in the blue -heavens and making the world all white except for the black shadows -of the rocks and hills and forests. The two youths soon reached the -narrow road that led to the little stone chapel, so lately converted -from a Mohammedan mosque into a place of Christian worship. They were -expected, and at the tap on the door from the hilt of Diego's sword -the door was quickly opened from within and closed after them, leaving -them alone in the solemn darkness of the little church, lighted only by -the faint glow of the sanctuary lamp. Diego and Don Felipe, advancing -reverently, drew their swords and laid them on the altar steps, and -then, retiring to a little distance, knelt with reverence. Through -the long hours of the night they remained on their knees, their minds -filled with solemn and glorious thoughts, striving to understand their -obligations to God and men, and fortifying their souls with good and -honorable resolutions. The hours slipped by with strange quickness. A -deep and subtle change was taking place in the heart of each. In those -hours they became men. When, at last, the darkness gave place to the -pallid dawn, they rose from their knees and passed silently out of the -church. As they breathed the fresh April air and saw the sky, flushed -with the sudden glory of the sunrise, a new life seemed infused into -their bodies and their souls. They swung rather than walked up the -steep roadway. They felt capable of all things. - - - - -VI - -THE HARBOR BAR IS PASSED - - -The days that followed were crowded with events for all. Even Fray -Piņa was forced to suspend the studies of Diego and Don Felipe, that -he might act as secretary to the Admiral. He, the man once avoided, -was sought by all. Many adventurous souls, like Ponce de Leon, wished -to sail upon the great voyage; but the Admiral was careful in making -his choice, not taking all who applied. As in all enterprises of the -sort, men of the higher grades were found; but the Admiral feared -difficulties in getting foremast men, the sailors to do the actual work -of the promised vessels. This problem was postponed until the vessels -were purchased and the enlistments were to be made at Palos and Huelva, -places renowned for producing a race of hardy mariners. - -Every day the Admiral held long conferences with the King and the -Queen and their advisers. The high respect with which the sovereigns, -and especially Queen Isabella, treated the Admiral won for him that -kind of popularity which follows the favor of the great. All who -pretended to be scientists or mathematicians were eager to be seen in -the company of the Admiral. But Columbus knew human nature too well -to value highly this kind of favor and maintained an equal behavior -to all. Only those were admitted to his confidence whom he knew well, -like Juan Perez, Father de Deza, Alonzo de Quintanilla, Luis de St. -Angel, and a few others equally sincere. Among the great dignitaries -of the court the Cardinal Pedro Gonzalez de Mendoza had always shown a -profound esteem for the character and attainments of the Admiral, and -to him and certain other learned men the Admiral felt deeply grateful. - -The Admiral worked hard at his plans, and every facility was now -afforded him. On May 8, 1492, Queen Isabella redeemed her promise -concerning Diego by appointing him a page-in-waiting to Prince Juan, -giving him the title of Don, and at the same time providing a modest -pension for his maintenance at court. Thenceforth Diego was Don -Diego. Also Don Felipe, by virtue of his rank and age, was made a -page-in-waiting to Prince Juan. - -The Admiral, who was to leave Granada in four days, and who then -expected to sail within a fortnight, asked that Diego be allowed -to remain with him until his departure. To this the Queen readily -assented, and Don Felipe, who earnestly desired to witness the sailing -of the Admiral, was also permitted to return to La Rabida with Diego. -Both youths were to report at the same time to the court. While not yet -in attendance upon Prince Juan, Diego and Don Felipe often saw him. He -seemed to them the embodiment of honor, courtesy, and modesty. - -Although left more to themselves than they had ever dreamed possible, -Diego and Don Felipe observed their hours of study without any -compulsion. So inspiring is the association with noble characters that -young minds thrown with these lofty types of men insensibly become -lofty-minded too. It is true that the two youths did not make the same -progress in their studies as when regularly schooled; many of their -hours were passed in those brilliant dreams of the future which are a -part of the heritage of youth. But both became deeply interested in -astronomy and mathematics, sciences of which they heard much in those -days of preparation, and really did well at them. That which was best, -however, was their voluntary regulation of their lives, according to -their accustomed rules, when there was no one to compel them. - -On the twelfth day of May, 1492, Diego once more crossed the bridge -of Pinos on his way to Palos; but in very different case from that -in which he had crossed it on the January night when the Admiral was -halted and turned back by the Daredevil Knight, Don Tomaso de Gama. -Don Tomaso was with them now, as he ardently wished to witness the -departure of the Admiral, which it was supposed then to be a matter of -a few days. Alonzo de Quintanilla went as the representative of the -sovereigns, and Fray Piņa acted as secretary to the Admiral. Little -Fernando and Brother Lawrence completed the party. Both Diego and Don -Felipe had hoped for a stop, if of a night only, at the castle of -Langara, where Doņa Luisita had remained in the care of Seņora Julia. -But as it was out of the direct route to Palos, no one thought of it -except the two youths. After the sailing of the ships, they were to -join the court wherever it might be; and then Doņa Luisita, being now -fifteen, was to be with Doņa Christina at court. - -The May day was bright and beautiful, and all were in high spirits, -even the Admiral's grave face showing a new animation, and his piercing -eyes radiated light. As for Diego and Don Felipe, they could scarcely -forbear caroling aloud as they trotted along on their spirited horses -in the golden morning. The little Fernando, whom Brother Lawrence held -before him upon his sturdy mule, laughed, talked, and sung incessantly -without being checked by any one. Diego's confidence that his father -would return triumphant became more than ever a fixed conviction. The -thought of the separation gave him pain; but the pain was compensated -by the anticipation of the glory that awaited the Admiral's return. - -Diego had hung at his saddle-bow the little manuscript volume of the -poems of Petrarca, which had been given him by Doņa Christina. As he -rode along he read the soft lines to Don Felipe, who did not understand -Italian so well as Diego, whose native tongue it was. Diego became so -absorbed in his reading that he let the reins lie upon his horse's -neck, while Don Felipe, equally careless, leaned over, taking one foot -out of the stirrup in order to look at the page Diego was reading. -Suddenly, Don Felipe's horse stepped into a deep mud-puddle in the -road and came down on his knees. The next thing Don Felipe knew he was -floundering in the puddle. Meanwhile, Diego's horse made a spring to -cross the puddle, and Diego, quite unprepared for it, slipped off and -went down, even more ignominiously than Don Felipe, on his back with -his heels in the air. In an instant both scrambled to their feet, their -faces scarlet with mortification, but so covered with mud that their -color was unknown. The horses stood still, as if pitying them, and -the whole party, led by the Daredevil Knight, burst into laughter at -their predicament. Their chagrin was increased by the Daredevil Knight -sarcastically advising them to change their horses for old steady-going -mules such as ladies rode in traveling. In vain Diego and Don Felipe -strove to get the mud off their faces, out of their hair, and from -their clothes. Their bath in the mud-puddle by no means improved their -appearance. They mounted and rode on, therefore, unable to reply to -the jokes and good-natured taunts of the rest of the party. They were -exceedingly careful after that and were not again unhorsed, nor did -Diego again tie the book of his favorite poet to his saddle-bow. - -Every moment of the journey was enjoyed, however, by the two youths, -in spite of their misadventure in the mud-puddle. They liked the rapid -travel in the soft May air, and at night, instead of sleeping at the -inns like their elders, they wrapped themselves in their blankets and -cloaks and slept in the open under the palpitating stars. They talked -of many things in those two quiet nights spent on the road. They were -studying astronomy, and they pictured to themselves the ship of the -Admiral ploughing its way along into the wide, unknown ocean, and -guided by the planets in their courses. They mutually resolved that -when the Admiral went upon his second voyage they would take no denial -and would go with him. - -At last, at nightfall on a warm May evening, they reached La Rabida. -Once more Diego and Don Felipe slept in the little tower room and -recalled, before they slept, the great and exciting events which -had happened since they left that quiet place seven months back. In -the morning they waked early, because on that day at ten o'clock -proclamation was to be made from the steps of the Church of St. -George in Palos of the commands of King Ferdinand and Queen Isabella -concerning the voyage. - -By sunrise the whole of Palos, of the neighboring towns of Moguer -and Huelva, and the country-side with its towns and villages, was -astir, palpitating with excitement. For them the voyage meant much. -Each family feared and dreaded that some of the adventurous spirits -among them would want to go upon the expedition. It was expected that -the ships would be found and manned and made ready to sail within a -fortnight. - -The seafaring people of the Andalusian coast were brave and -adventurous; but the proposed voyage appalled them. Never in the -history of the world had anything been known like it. The mariners -could face ordinary and even extreme danger: but to set forth into -the boundless wastes of unknown seas; to meet mysterious dangers, -perhaps to be engulfed in great abysses; or to sail on and on until -they died of thirst and starvation; to find land, it might be, peopled -with savages who would murder them on landing; to encounter frightful -monsters on land and sea which might devour them--these and many -other horrors terrified the souls of the bravest sailors of the time. -Only once in a great period of time a man is born with the stupendous -courage of Christopher Columbus. - -The whole population of the region had begun pouring into Palos very -early in the morning. All classes were represented--mariners and -peasants, cavaliers on horseback, great nobles with their retinues, -merchants and ecclesiastics on mule-back--all eager to hear the royal -proclamation. It was known that the sovereigns had given orders to -impress men and ships, and no man knew whether he or some of his family -might not be impressed for the voyage or be compelled to furnish the -ships or any part of their equipment. - -At half-past nine in the brilliant May morning the cavalcade was to set -forth from La Rabida; but long before that Diego and Don Felipe, with -Brother Lawrence carrying the little Fernando, had started for Palos -and had taken their places on the porch of the little stone Church of -St. George. Diego held the little Fernando's hand with a feeling in his -heart that for the first time he was to take his father's place toward -the little lad. - -The vast and excited multitudes that thronged about the church and -crowded all the streets leading to it were in themselves a great -picture. - -A strange hush fell upon all when the head of the cavalcade from La -Rabida appeared at the top of the street leading to the church. First -rode the Admiral, wearing the costume of black satin with the black -cloak in which he had attended the Queen, and with his sword at his -side. On his right rode Alonzo de Quintanilla, the Queen's accountant, -who was to make the proclamation in the name of King Ferdinand and -Queen Isabella. On the Admiral's left rode his steady friend, Juan -Perez, Prior of the monastery. Behind them rode other persons of -distinction, including the three Pinzon brothers, wealthy ship-owners, -Dr. Garcia, and the pilot Rodriguez, who had been the messenger sent by -Juan Perez to Queen Isabella more than nine years before. - -The Admiral and his friends dismounted, and were received by the mayor -and other officials of the little town of Palos. They then took their -places upon the porch of the church; a fanfare of trumpets rang out; -and the mayor, commanding silence in the great multitude, ordered -attention and obedience to the orders of their Majesties King Ferdinand -and Queen Isabella, to be read by Alonzo de Quintanilla, their deputy -on that occasion. Then De Quintanilla, standing next the Admiral, read -in a ringing voice the commands of King Ferdinand and Queen Isabella. -The authorities of Palos were to have two caravels ready for sea within -ten days after this notice, and to place them and their crews at the -disposal of Columbus, who was empowered to procure and fit out a third -vessel. The crews of all three were to receive the ordinary wages of -seamen employed in armed vessels and to be given four months' pay in -advance. They were to sail in such direction as Columbus, under the -royal authority, should command, and were to obey him in all things, -with merely one stipulation, that neither he nor they were to go to -St. George la Mina, on the coast of Guinea, nor any other of the -lately discovered possessions of Portugal. A certificate of their -good conduct, signed by Columbus, was to be the discharge of their -obligation to the crown. - -Orders were likewise read, addressed to the public authorities and -the people of all ranks and conditions in the maritime borders of -Andalusia, commanding them to furnish supplies and assistance of all -kinds at reasonable prices for the fitting out of the vessels; and -penalties were denounced on such as should cause any impediment. No -duties were to be exacted for any articles furnished to the vessels; -and all civil and criminal processes against the person or property of -any individual engaged in the expedition were to be suspended during -his absence and for two months after his return. - -When the reading was finished it was received with a deep and awful -silence by the listening throngs. The mayor of Palos broke this -stillness by making the usual official announcement of his readiness -to obey the orders of the King and the Queen. Then, with ceremonious -farewells, the Admiral and his party, joined by Diego and Don Felipe -and Brother Lawrence with the little Fernando, set out toward La Rabida. - -As they passed through the crowded streets they could not but observe -the fear and dismay which had taken possession of the people. Not until -then had they fully realized the desperate nature of the proposed -voyage, and the knowledge that force would be used if necessary in -order to provide vessels and crews made each one fear that he might be -obliged to go upon this appalling voyage. The men of Palos, Moguer, -and Huelva, and indeed all that part of the Andalusian coast, were -among the boldest mariners of their day; but it was given to but one -man, and that man Columbus, to advance without fear into the trackless -and unknown ocean. The time, ten days, seemed frightfully short, and -had been made so purposely that the people should not have time to -become panic-stricken. But panic-stricken they were; and at the first -moment of triumph to Columbus, when he stood, in the May morning, on -the steps of the Church of St. George, began for him another period of -new and dreadful trial which lasted almost three months. - -Never had Diego understood the unparalleled steadfastness of his father -as in those trying days of La Rabida. Every day some new difficulty -arose. Vessels suitable for the service mysteriously disappeared. The -sailors and seafaring people of the coast said: - -"We are not cowards, but we are not bold enough to sail where no keel -has ever before floated, where we know neither winds nor tides nor the -country for which we are steering, except that it is on the other end -of the world. We can die but once, and we would rather die at home." - -The feeling against Columbus grew so strong that when he appeared in -the streets of Palos the people fled from him. Even on those rare -occasions when Diego and Don Felipe had the privilege of walking in the -town in the evening with the Admiral, and on the seashore, Diego was -pointed at, the people saying: - -"Poor lad; little good will it do him to be a royal page at court -for a while! He is already an orphan, and so will the little boy be -fatherless, and he only seven years old." - -But a handful of brave and intelligent men remained staunch to the -Admiral, especially the Pinzons, the Prior, Juan Perez, the pilot -Rodriguez, and Dr. Garcia. They had not the power, however, to compel -compliance with the commands of the Spanish sovereigns. When the July -days came there were still neither ships nor men provided, and instead -of being able to start early and to return before the winter set in, -as the Admiral confidently hoped, it looked as if the whole summer -would be gone before the little squadron could be assembled. Early in -July Queen Isabella, hearing of the difficulties in the way, sent an -officer of her household, Juan de Peņalosa, with still more peremptory -orders; but these were no better obeyed than the first. Then Martin -Alonzo Pinzon and his brothers, Vicente and Francisco, all experienced -seamen and wealthy ship-owners, accepted an offer to go as commanders -under the Admiral and to furnish a share of the equipment. This had -some effect in overcoming the fear and opposition, and at last three -small vessels were secured--the Santa Maria, which the Admiral chose -for his flag-ship, the Pinta, and the Niņa. Two of these were caravels, -open boats with a high poop and stern, and only one of the vessels was -decked. Even then there were fresh perplexities. The calkers among the -impressed crews did the work badly of calking the ships, and when they -were ordered to do it over again they deserted in a body. The Pinzons -and a few other high-hearted men were inspired by the dauntless courage -of the Admiral; and by almost superhuman efforts, through wearisome -nights and days, the three vessels were put in readiness and a hundred -and twenty men all told, including a royal notary, a physician, and a -surgeon, were secured by the first of August. - -In all the anxieties of those terrible preceding months Diego and Don -Felipe had apparently led the same secluded and studious life which -they had begun in the autumn, for they had resumed their studies under -Fray Piņa; but they lived in a tumult of soul which nothing but strong -wills and a stern discipline could have controlled. Each morning they -saw persons coming to the monastery to confer with the Admiral, to -protest, to complain, to deceive him, and to defy him. Each evening -they saw him weary, but not discouraged; saddened, but unshaken of -soul. The two youths, from the door of the tower room opening upon the -parapet, could see much of what was passing, and it was of a kind to -excite and agitate them. They came to feel even a sort of gratitude -to Fray Piņa for the hours of study so rigidly maintained, in which -they could for a little while forget some of the painful things -surrounding them. A change was perceptible after the Pinzons took the -matter in hand; but there was only a melancholy acquiescence, a dogged -submission, in the faces of those who were forced to go upon the voyage -of deathless glory, so little do men know where honor lies. - -The Admiral had fixed upon Wednesday, the first of August, as the -day to sail; but on that day it fell dead calm, and there was no -prospect of going to sea. On Thursday it remained calm until late in -the afternoon, when a breeze sprung up that grew stronger as night -fell and gave promise of continuance. Then the Admiral sent forth the -order that the ships, which lay outside the bar of Saltes would sail on -Friday morning, half an hour before sunrise. Many of the sailors were -superstitious about sailing on the Friday; but the Admiral's strong -soul was above such petty and groundless fears, and his order was that -every man of the crews should report on board by daybreak. All through -that agitating day Diego did not see the Admiral except when they -supped together in the refectory, where no word was spoken, as usual, -during the meal, except for the reading of the Scriptures. Never had -the Admiral appeared calmer or more unshaken. When the simple meal was -over and all were leaving the refectory, the Admiral called Diego and -said: - -"My son, to-night at nine o'clock come to me in my chamber. There will -I speak with you." - -All through that day Diego had felt as if he were in a dream. He -had not the least doubt of his father's return, but when the moment -of parting came he felt all the sharpness of its pain. Not even Don -Felipe could comfort him then. He spent the time from supper until nine -o'clock sitting on the parapet outside the tower room, his eyes fixed -upon the far-off ocean, illuminated by a great white moon. Don Felipe -sat within the room, his heart full of sympathy for Diego, who said -nothing to him; but when his eye fell upon his friend a little sense of -comfort stole into his heart. It was Don Felipe who came out upon the -parapet and said: - -"Diego, it is close to nine o'clock." - -Diego rose and went down the long corridor to his father's room and -knocked at the door, which the Admiral immediately opened. The room -was in a corner of the monastery, and through its four small windows -the moon made patches of white light upon the stone floor. On a little -pallet by the Admiral's bed the little Fernando slept peacefully. - -Diego sat down on a bench beside his father, his arm around the -Admiral's neck, and he was not ashamed of the tears that dropped upon -his cheeks. - -"What I have to say to you is brief," said the Admiral, "but never to -be forgotten, whether I return or not. First, it is that you shall be a -Christian; that includes everything--honor, probity, all that makes a -man, and especially courage, for God hates a coward. Then I confide to -you your brother. You are to set him an example in every way and to be -tender with him, remembering that he is so young a child. In my absence -he is to remain here under the charge of the Prior, and good Brother -Lawrence to take care of him. The noble lady, Doņa Christina, has -promised to keep informed concerning the child, and if he should be ill -to take care of him. The Prior is to communicate with her as often as -possible concerning the child. The noble lady and the Prior will have a -care for the child; but to you, his brother, I intrust him in the end." - -"I swear to you, my father," answered Diego, "to do as you have -commanded by my brother, and I will try to live so that when we next -meet, whether it be in this world or in the other, I can look you in -the eye, as I do now, and say I have kept my word to you." - -"There speaks my son," replied the Admiral. "Now, concerning to-morrow, -the most important day in my life. I shall confess myself this night to -the Prior, and I desire you to do the same, and hope that Don Felipe -may do likewise. At daybreak, in the Church of St. George, I desire -that you receive Holy Communion with me and with all those who sail -with me. We go not as unbelievers, but as men humbly asking God's help -in crossing His oceans, guided by His stars by night and His sun by -day, and sustained by His protecting hand. Go now and sleep." - -"Give me your blessing, and I will go," replied Diego. - -Then, kneeling by little Fernando's pallet, the Admiral blessed both -his sons, a hand upon the head of each. Diego rose, soothed and -comforted. He felt that he must show the same cool courage as his -father, and the Admiral's words "God hates a coward" remained fixed in -his mind. - -Diego returned to the parapet outside of the tower room, from which he -watched the far-off sea. There was little sleep in the monastery or in -Palos that night. - -The wind still held, and the August night grew chill; but Diego did not -know it. Don Felipe, however, brought his cloak and wrapped it around -him. The moon swung high in the dark-blue sky and made a path of glory -across the sea that reached to heaven. As Diego heard the chime of the -midnight bell of the monastery he saw a dark figure come out of the -iron gate and walk quickly down the white road toward the little town. -It was the Admiral, who spent the night on his knees in the Church of -St. George. - -At daybreak Diego and Don Felipe, with Fray Piņa, the Prior, and all -of the monks of the monastery, including the lay brothers, Brother -Lawrence carrying the little Fernando in his arms, walked in the cool, -sweet dawning to Palos and into the church. Every one of the one -hundred and twenty men of all classes who were to sail upon the great -voyage was in the church, which was also filled with their relatives -and friends, even the church porch being crowded and the narrow street -packed with persons. A deep and solemn silence pervaded. The wives and -families of the officers, especially the Pinzons, showed calmness and -courage in order to sustain the more ignorant and timid. The Prior, -Juan Perez, from the steps of the altar within the church, spoke with -deep and solemn feeling to those who were to sail within an hour. The -Admiral, taking Diego by the hand, advanced at the proper time to the -Communion rail, where he received the Blessed Sacrament, as did all of -his men and many other persons, with the deepest reverence, including -Diego and Don Felipe. When the short religious service was over the men -filed out of the church and, after a last farewell to their families -and friends, marched straight to the shore; the Admiral wished to make -those last painful moments as brief as possible. The vessels were -lying in midstream off the bar of Saltes, and their boats were at the -quay ready to take the crews out. Hundreds of other boats lay in the -stream to accompany them a short distance to sea. - -The Admiral, on reaching the quay where his own boat awaited him, was -surrounded by his captains, Martin Alonzo Pinzon and Vicente Pinzon, -and his three pilots, Sancho Ruiz, Pedro Alonzo Niņo, and Bartolomeo -Roldan. - -Every eye was fixed upon the Admiral. All realized that upon him, -upon his courage, his science, and his judgment, rested the lives and -fortunes of every man with him. Never had the Admiral appeared so -serenely great. Fortified by a deep religious faith, conscious of his -own powers, he faced the unknown with an indomitable courage. None who -beheld him on that day doubted that this man, Columbus, was born a -captain. - -"Here," said he, to his companions and pilots, in a clear voice that -made itself heard afar, "do I give you my order as your Admiral, and it -is to be strictly obeyed. If you should become separated from me and -beyond the reach of signals, lay your course due west, and when you -have sailed seven hundred and fifty leagues from this port make no more -sail after midnight, for there will be land off your quarter. Do you -understand?" - -"And we will obey," shouted the captains and the pilots, led by the -strong voice of Martin Pinzon. - -The boldness of this stern order thrilled and captivated the awed and -sullen throngs, and an involuntary cheer broke from them. The Admiral -smiled and raised his hat in salute. - -He stepped into his boat, followed by Diego and the little Fernando, -and led the procession down the bright river to the vessels tugging at -their anchors off the bar. As the Admiral's boat reached the side of -the Santa Maria the Admiral stood up and, taking the little Fernando in -his arms, kissed and blessed him. Then he clasped Diego in his arms, -kissing and blessing him likewise, without agitation on either side. -Diego felt as if the wine of courage were pouring into his veins. He -was so quiet, so smiling, so at ease, that he seemed worthy to be the -son of his father. The little Fernando wept when the Admiral, from the -Santa Maria's poop, waved his hand back at the child; but Diego, taking -the boy in his arms, said cheerfully: - -"Do not weep, Fernando. Our father will return, bringing you wonderful -things never seen before in Spain, and he will at once ask if you have -been good and brave. If you weep you will be neither good nor brave." - -The little boy was soothed by Diego's calmness, and waved his small -hand cheerfully back at his father. - -The boats returned to the quays, which were crowded with a multitude -of persons, who made way respectfully for the sons of the Admiral. The -ships then hoisted their sails, and with a fair wind slipped out into -the open sea. The sky was glowing, and the earth and sea basked in a -rose-red light shot with gold. As the three little vessels became white -specks upon the horizon, where the blue sea met the bluer sky, the -great sun suddenly burst forth in splendor; the vessels disappeared in -the golden light which flooded the world with glory. - - - - -VII - -THE JOYOUS HEARTS OF YOUTH - - -"Diego, Diego, wake up! Suppose you should be caught napping like this; -you would have a hard time with the master of the pages, I can tell -you!" - -Diego opened his eyes, sprang to his feet, assumed a military attitude, -and was all awake in a moment. It was Don Felipe who spoke, and -they were in a splendid corridor of the palace at Barcelona. It was -magnificently carpeted from the looms of Granada; and long, narrow -windows let in a flood of sunshine upon splendid pictures on the walls, -which were decorated with trophies of arms, the great curved simitars -of the Moors with jeweled handles, Moorish shields and breastplates -cunningly wrought with gold, and marvelous daggers and other arms. -White statues gleamed against the dark-red walls, and everywhere were -the beauty and splendor of a royal palace. - -As Don Felipe spoke the great carved doors at the farther end of the -corridor were thrown wide, and Queen Isabella, with a glittering suite -of ladies and gentlemen in attendance, was seen about to enter. At -the threshold, however, the Queen paused. The great Cardinal, Pedro -Gonzalez de Mendoza, the first subject in Spain, appeared, followed by -his secretary. The Cardinal saluted the Queen with profound respect, -who engaged in conversation with him. Both Diego and Don Felipe -recognized the Cardinal at once, a tall, handsome man of commanding -appearance, wearing a black robe edged with scarlet and a black and -scarlet skull-cap, while around his neck hung a gold chain from which -depended a superb cross of jewels. - -Diego and Don Felipe, standing side by side, their right hands upon -their sword-hilts, their left hands raised at the salute, could yet -talk without being heard by the Queen and her train at the end of the -long corridor. - -"I told you," said Don Felipe, in a whisper, without turning his head, -"that you would find the master of the pages a much more difficult -person than Fray Piņa. Suppose you had been caught asleep while waiting -for the Queen?" - -"I should have been mortified beyond words," whispered Diego, as -motionless as Don Felipe. "But the truth is that, with rising at four -o'clock and having the horse exercise and the sword exercise and then -studying and standing many hours and doing many errands and sitting up -late at night, I am sometimes half dead for want of sleep." - -"It is not an easy business, being at court," was Don Felipe's answer. - -Then, as they saw the Queen advancing, they remained respectfully -silent. The Queen was dressed as usual with quiet splendor, but wearing -few jewels. She wore a robe of crimson cloth, and her beautiful auburn -hair was as usual coifed with pearls. Doņa Christina walked a short -distance behind the Queen. - -As she approached, talking in a low voice with the Cardinal, who walked -by her side, and followed by Doņa Christina and a number of ladies -and gentlemen of the court, the Queen was so absorbed in what she -was saying that she did not observe either Diego or Don Felipe. Her -voice was pitched low, almost a whisper; but both youths heard her say -distinctly to the Cardinal: - -"And so, my Lord Cardinal, the rumor has come from Portugal that the -caravels were seen entering the Tagus on the fourth day of March. It is -unconfirmed, and in some respects improbable. Why should the Admiral -land in Portugal before coming to Spain?" - -"He may have put in by stress of weather or for repairs, madam," the -Cardinal replied, in a low and earnest voice. "Many unforeseen things -might induce the Admiral to make the first port possible if, indeed, he -has returned from that strange voyage." - -The Queen glanced backward and seemed to grow suddenly conscious of the -presence of Diego and Don Felipe. Diego's ruddy face had turned deadly -pale, although he still maintained his rigid military attitude. - -"Come here, Don Diego," said the Queen, stopping, "and you, Don Felipe. -Tell me when does the exercise in the mančge begin for Prince Juan and -the pages?" - -"In half an hour, madam," responded Diego, advancing and bowing low as -the Queen spoke. - -"Then we shall have the pleasure of seeing the exercises in the -mančge," said the Queen, in her usual gracious manner. "Doņa Christina, -will you say to the Princess Katharine and to Doņa Luisita that they -may be present to see the exercises in the mančge?" - -The Queen resumed her earnest conversation with the Cardinal, and the -rest of the suite passed on. When the great doors at the other end of -the corridor had closed after the royal train, Don Felipe said to Diego: - -"You heard the Queen's words, and what the Cardinal replied?" - -"Yes," answered Diego. "It seemed as if my heart stopped beating. Now -it thumps hard enough, I can tell you." - -"But there is no time to count heart-beats," said Don Felipe. "We have -not a moment to spare if we are to be ready in half an hour for the -mančge." - -Without another word both ran the long length of the corridor, through -various winding passages, and up a narrow stairway until they came -to the rooms of Prince Juan, where Diego knocked. Prince Juan, who -was alone, himself opened the door. He inherited his mother's noble -simplicity of character, and, while fully understanding the duties of -his position, he treated his pages, all youths of his own age, like -companions of his own rank. - -"The Queen and her ladies will be present in the mančge," breathlessly -burst out Don Felipe, "and we thought your Highness would wish to know -it." - -"Certainly I should. Many thanks, Felipe," cried Prince Juan. "When the -Queen honors our exercises we must show at our best." - -Prince Juan ran down the stairs, breakneck, followed by Diego and Don -Felipe, through the winding passages, across the wide courtyard, into -a long colonnade that led to the great circular riding-school. It was -an immense space covered with tan-bark, with galleries for spectators. -Adjoining it was a large room surrounded with alcoves, in which the -arms and riding paraphernalia were kept. This room was soon filled -with the pages, twenty youths, all lithe, active, and eager to show -their accomplishments before the Queen. All, including Prince Juan, -disappeared within their alcoves, where there were valets to assist -them in changing their clothes. They kept up, meanwhile, much talk and -laughter, Prince Juan joining as an equal in their merry preparation. -One only, Don Diego de Colon, usually the merriest of them all, was -silent. In a few minutes they trooped out, dressed in leather surcoats -and riding-breeches and boots with huge spurs, and wearing light -helmets. Prince Juan was dressed exactly like the others, except that -on his helmet was engraved a small crown, and on the breast of his -jacket of Cordovan leather was also a small crown embroidered in gold. -The young prince noticed the silence and pallor of Diego, and, going up -to him, put his arm kindly within Diego's, saying: - -"What is the matter, Don Diego? You are as solemn as an owl." - -"There is a report abroad, so I heard her Majesty the Queen say to the -Cardinal de Mendoza, that the ships of my father, the Admiral, had been -seen in the Tagus. That is enough to make one silent, is it not, your -Highness?" - -"Indeed it is," replied Prince Juan. "For my part, I often dream at -night that the Admiral has returned and has discovered a new world for -Spain. Ah, Don Diego, what a great day that will be for Spain!" - -There was no time to say more as the trumpet-call sounded for the -riding-hall, into which the pages now marched. The grooms were bringing -in the chargers, the finest breeds of Andalusia, celebrated for its -horses, their coats like satin, their muscles like steel, their hoofs -black and polished. The horses knew well enough for what they were -brought, and were keen for the sport. Before mounting, Don Tomaso de -Gama, the Daredevil Knight, reckoned the most accomplished horseman -in Spain and master of the riding-school, appeared. He, too, wore -riding-dress and a glittering casque. He gave the order at once to -mount, that they might have a warming-up canter before the Queen and -her ladies arrived. Then began a quick gallop around the circular -space, the horses' hoofs sounding softly on the tan-bark. In a few -minutes the signal was given to retire, and the young horsemen all -filed out through an arched gateway into the great courtyard of the -stables beyond. - -At this moment the Queen, preceded and followed by her ladies and -attended by several gentlemen and escorted by the Cardinal, entered -the ladies' gallery. The Queen sat with Doņa Christina on one side of -her and the Cardinal on the other. Many ladies were sitting on chairs -behind her, and on the step below the Queen's chair the Princess -Katharine and Doņa Luisita sat on silken cushions. Doņa Luisita looked -no longer a child, but a charming young lady. - -Four trumpeters with silver trumpets were stationed at the farther side -of the great circular hall, and at a signal from the Queen played a -fanfare. At that the doors under the archway were flung open, and the -long line of pages entered headed by Prince Juan. As he dashed through -the great archway, sitting square and steady upon a splendid black -horse, the Queen's eyes lighted up with pleasure at the appearance of -this gallant youth. - -When Prince Juan came abreast of the Queen's gallery, he pulled up -quickly, the horse rising for a moment on his haunches and then -standing like a statue, as Prince Juan saluted first the Queen and -then the other ladies present. The same thing was done by each of the -twenty pages, every charger acting with an intelligence almost human. -When the Daredevil Knight, the master of riding, brought up the rear -of the line, his horse, too--a sinewy chestnut charger--stood on his -haunches and then came down gracefully on his knees as if making an -obeisance to the Queen, then rose and stood as still as a bronze horse. -The Queen was charmed with this pretty trick of horsemanship, and, -leaning over, bowed and smiled and waved her hand to the Daredevil -Knight. Then the exercises began, Prince Juan always riding first and -the Daredevil Knight last. They galloped around the ring twice to show -their manner of ordinary riding. Then the grooms brought four rings, -which they hung at the four quarters of the circle; and the pages, with -glittering lances, rode around, taking the rings as they went. Some -took all the rings, while others took only three or sometimes two. -Next a stuffed horse with a manikin mounted on him was rolled in; and -each young horseman, galloping by at full speed, had to knock off the -manikin's head with a single blow of the sword, and again passing it -had to dismount at full speed, taking up the head, and mount again. -This was most exciting, and some of the pages failed to get the head. -Prince Juan, however, succeeded in getting it each time. There were -various other tricks of horsemanship shown which amused and delighted -the Queen and her ladies, especially the Princess Katharine and Doņa -Luisita. In one of the feats, Prince Juan galloping past the gallery, -his horse apparently shied and unseated him. A cry of dismay went up -which changed to a burst of applause when Prince Juan sprang back and -stood up on his horse's back, galloping around the tan-bark in that -fashion, followed by all the other pages. All through Diego and Don -Felipe acquitted themselves with credit. It was usually the pleasantest -hour of the day with them all, this hour in the mančge, and when there -were no spectators it was a time of jokes and merriment. But Diego felt -as if he were in another world. He went through his part well, but -mechanically, and his look was so grave that Doņa Luisita whispered to -the Princess Katharine: - -"What can be the matter with Don Diego to-day? His body may be here, -but his mind is somewhere else." - -When all was over the Queen sent for Don Tomaso and questioned him upon -the proficiency of her son and his companions. The Daredevil Knight, -who was as frank as he was brave, assured the Queen that Prince Juan -was an admirable horseman, but there were several of the pages who -surpassed him. Don Felipe he considered the best horseman of them all. - -"I believe what you tell me," replied Queen Isabella, "for I see that -you tell the truth and are no flatterer and do not tell me that my son -excels all, although I see that he does well." - -The nobility of the Queen was such that all about her were encouraged -to tell the truth, and not to seek to deceive by flattery and falsehood. - -It was nearly six o'clock when the pages left the riding-hall, and in -a half-hour they were washed and dressed in their ordinary clothes -and were seated at supper at the long table in their dining-hall. -Everything was good but plain, as it was the wish of the King and the -Queen to bring Prince Juan up as a soldier rather than a courtier. At -one end of the table sat the great Duke of Medina Coeli, governor of -the pages; and at the other end sat Don Tomaso de Gama, the Daredevil -Knight. The Duke was a rigid governor, and made no difference in his -discipline between Prince Juan and any of the other youths under his -charge. The sovereigns interfered in no way with this discipline, and -Prince Juan had to ask permission from the stern Duke for everything he -wished to do, as much as any of his attendant pages. Nevertheless, the -governor had a kindly heart. He encouraged the pages to talk at their -meals, using this as a means of discovering their natural temper and -disposition. They often spoke with the enthusiastic hopes of boyhood of -the return of the Admiral; their patriotism was aroused in his favor; -and they looked forward with eager confidence to the day when he would -add a magnificent empire to the Kingdom of Spain. This had secured for -Diego perfect good-will among his companions, none of whom had ever -taunted him with his humble origin or had spoken of his father except -with the highest respect. - -On this evening a singular silence prevailed at the pages' supper. The -young men spoke in undertones among themselves, and Diego was conscious -that strange looks were cast upon him. When supper was over and the -pages, with Prince Juan, retired to their study-hall, where they had an -hour of study, Diego found out the cause of the silence and suppressed -excitement. The pages crowded around him; and Prince Juan, acting as -spokesman, said: - -"Two reports have come this day, Diego; one that Captain Martin Alonzo -Pinzon has landed at Bayonne, and the other that your father, the -Admiral, has returned in a caravel which is anchored in the Tagus. I -do not know who was the messenger that brought the letter from Captain -Pinzon, nor the person who brought the news from Portugal." - -"But it is true, my Prince!" shouted Diego, raising his arms in triumph -above his head. "I know it, I feel it! For a fortnight past I have -had the feeling that my father was nearing land. The stories of the -dreadful storms and tempests have not frightened me. Each day my father -has been in my mind, and I dream every night of him. Ah, my Prince, it -is true!" - -Then, seizing Don Felipe in his strong arms, the two youths hugged -each other and rubbed their cheeks together in a rapture of boyish -affection. Their companions around them broke into an involuntary -cheer, led by Prince Juan. They were young and sanguine, and found it -easy to believe in anything which redounded to the glory and honor of -their country. - -Over the noise a ringing voice was heard at the door, that of the -Daredevil Knight. - -"The presence of Don Diego de Colon is required by the governor of the -pages." - -An instant silence fell upon the shouting and cheering youths. They -could see through the open door the soldierly figure of the governor, -who in general permitted no noisy outbreaks; but to-night he said no -word and uttered no rebuke. The door closed immediately after Diego, -and the Duke said to him: - -"Come with me at once, Don Diego, to the presence of her Majesty." - -Diego followed the Duke and Don Tomaso as they rapidly walked through -the halls and corridors of the palace toward the wing occupied by the -Queen and the King. Nothing was said except a brief inquiry made by -the Duke of Don Tomaso as to when King Ferdinand might be expected to -return from a hunting expedition upon which he had that day started. - -"In five days the King will return," was Don Tomaso's reply. - -When they reached the door of the Queen's private apartments it was -opened at once by Doņa Christina. The Queen was alone except for her -favorite lady-in-waiting and Cardinal Mendoza. For the first time in -all the years that Diego had seen the Queen, she showed deep agitation. -Usually of calm demeanor, she was that night extremely restless, -sometimes sitting in her stately chair, again rising and walking about -the small but richly furnished room lighted with silver lamps. As soon -as Diego entered, the Queen spoke to him kindly, saying to the Duke: - -"Tell Don Diego what we have heard." - -Then the Duke spoke. - -"A Portuguese merchant has just arrived, reporting that on the third -of March, the weather off the mouth of the Tagus being very wild and -stormy, a caravel was seen in great distress. The tempest continued -very violent all that day, and the caravel was in great danger of being -dashed to pieces on the rock of Cintra. The people watched it all day, -making many prayers for the mariners in such peril, but unable to be -of any assistance to them. The storm continued the best part of the -night, but subsided, and the next morning broke fair and sunny. The -caravel had survived and was entering the mouth of the Tagus with a -fair wind. It was said to be the Niņa with the Admiral, your father, in -command, and several men of a strange race on board with animals and -objects hitherto unknown. The merchant says that a large Portuguese -ship-of-war, commanded by Don Alonzo d'Acunha, one of the greatest -captains in Portugal, was anchored in the Tagus, and that Don Alonzo -sent a boat to the caravel commanding that her captain report on board -the Portuguese ship to give an account of himself. The caravel's -commander refused to go, sending word in reply that he outranked Don -Alonzo d'Acunha, being under letters patent of the King of Arragon -and the Queen of Castile, Admiral of the Ocean Seas, Viceroy and -Captain-General of all lands to the westward. He therefore desired that -Don Alonzo d'Acunha, as his inferior in rank, should pay him a visit of -ceremony." - -"That was my father!" cried Diego, forgetful of all etiquette, his soul -in a tumult of pride and joy. - -The Queen, who was walking about the room restlessly while the Duke -spoke, instead of rebuking the lad, came up to him and, laying a hand -upon his shoulder, said, smiling proudly: - -"And there your father showed the true and lofty spirit of a Spanish -admiral. Small might be his ship, but great must be his soul. Happy am -I in having an admiral who knows so well how to maintain the honor of -his flag." - -The Queen sat down, her face aglow, her eyes sparkling; and, turning -to Doņa Christina, she put her hand in that of her lady-in-waiting and -said: - -"We are but women; but we have hearts like men." - -Diego stood throbbing and palpitating and longing to hear more. The -Duke continued quickly: - -"The merchant left Portugal soon after this happened. There are, -however, some discrepancies in his story. He says that the caravel was -the Niņa, while the Admiral sailed in the Santa Maria. The merchant -also says that the caravel's commander was to proceed to Lisbon instead -of coming direct to a Spanish port. Again, at almost the same moment -the Portuguese merchant appeared, a messenger came bearing a letter -from Captain Martin Alonzo Pinzon, at the port of Bayonne, saying that -land was found to the westward; but that he was separated from the -Admiral many weeks ago and knows not if he still survives. All might -be explained except the persistence with which the Portuguese merchant -insists that the commander of the caravel was undoubtedly going to -Lisbon, and that he saw, before leaving, the preparations to travel -thence by land." - -Then the Cardinal said: - -"If the King of Portugal commanded the Admiral to come to Lisbon, he -could scarcely refuse. And, in that event, how poignant must be the -regret of the King of Portugal, who abandoned the glorious project -offered him by the Admiral and left it to your Majesty and King -Ferdinand to reap the glory of it." - -"Ah!" cried the Queen. "Once more have you, my Lord Cardinal, spoken -words of wisdom. One thing seems certain, two of the ships have -returned. How unfortunate it is the King is not here! However, if more -definite news comes, I will send messengers for the King. You may go -now, Don Diego. I will send a messenger to La Rabida telling the Prior, -Juan Perez, of what we have heard." - -Then Diego's soul became possessed with courage. He went up to the -Queen's chair and, kneeling on one knee, said: - -"Will your Majesty pardon me for what I am about to ask? May I go with -that messenger to La Rabida? My father gave his word that unless driven -elsewhere by stress of weather he would make his first landing in Spain -at the port of Palos. I saw him depart, my Queen, and a voice like the -voice of God spoke in my heart, saying, 'He will return with immortal -glory.' His first thought next his sovereigns will be for his sons, -for me and my little brother. If my father lands at Palos and I am not -there, it will give him a pang, for my father loves his children with -all his heart. May I go, my Queen? Oh, let me go, let me go, my Queen!" - -Diego, in his eagerness, had laid his hand upon the Queen's robe. -Her eyes, ever kind, grew more kindly; but while maintaining her own -authority well she never forgot the authority of others. She turned to -the Duke and said, smiling: - -"My Lord Duke, can you spare this young man from his duties and studies -for a little while. It is an occasion which so far has never arisen but -this once in the life of a royal page." - -"If your Majesty requests it," replied the Duke, "leave shall be given -to Don Diego, and I agree with your Majesty that the occasion is so -great that Don Diego may well be excused." - -Diego, overjoyed, kissed the Queen's hand and thanked the Duke. The -Queen nodded by way of dismissal. It was then obviously time for Diego -to retire; but he stood irresolutely glancing toward the door, but -apparently unwilling to leave. He looked imploringly at Doņa Christina, -who, smiling, went toward him. The next moment the Duke smiled and the -Queen laughed outright as they heard Diego say to Doņa Christina, in a -loud whisper: - -"Oh, how much would Don Felipe like to see the caravel come in!" - -"I am sure he would," responded Don Felipe's mother, amused at Diego's -straight-forward simplicity. - -Then Diego, looking around and seeing only smiling faces, went and -knelt before the Queen. - -"Your Majesty," he said, "together Don Felipe and I saw the caravel -depart. Don Felipe believed in my father as much as I do, and if he -had not we should not have been like brothers, but we should have -fought like tigers. Don Felipe was ever good to me from the beginning. -He was a grandee of Spain, and I was the son of a poor Genoese -navigator; but Don Felipe never let me feel the difference between us. -He has ever been the best of friends and comrades to me, and now for me -to see the caravel come in and Don Felipe not to--" - -Diego sighed heavily, while the Queen and all present could not forbear -smiling. - -"Could you, my Lord Duke, grant the request of this young man?" asked -the Queen. - -The Duke hesitated a moment, and Diego thought he would be refused. He -rose, the picture of dejection, and, hanging his head, said mournfully: - -"Poor, poor Felipe!" - -The Queen at that laughed once more. Diego, turning to Doņa Christina, -said sadly: - -"Madam, I would ask you to plead for Don Felipe with the Duke; but if -the Duke will not grant the Queen's request I am afraid he will not -listen to any one else." - -"But I shall obey the Queen's wishes," said the Duke. "I will give Don -Felipe leave also; but you are to start upon your return two days after -the caravel arrives." - -A thrill ran through Diego, his eyes shone, his mouth opened wide with -delight; and Queen Isabella, who understood youth well, nodded to him -again as a sign of dismissal. Diego retained his senses enough to make -an obeisance to the Queen and low bows to the Cardinal, the Duke, and -Doņa Christina. Then, slipping out of the door, he ran like a deer back -to the hall of the pages. As he entered it Prince Juan sprang forward -and, clasping him around the neck, shouted: - -"Tell us all, all, all!" - -The other pages, with Don Felipe, clustered around; and Diego, with -Prince Juan's arm about his neck, poured forth the story told by the -Portuguese merchant, and also the news that the Pinta had arrived at -Bayonne. - -"And the Duke has given me leave, and Don Felipe, too, to go to Palos -immediately to see the caravel come in. I knew that it would be so -hard for him to stay here when I went to Palos and saw all the people -crowding the quays and shores and the caravel come sailing in with my -father on the poop." - -"And why," cried Prince Juan, shaking Diego, "cannot I see that -glorious sight as well as you and Don Felipe?" - -"Because your Highness is a royal prince," answered Diego. "Your -Highness cannot run about the country as we do. We are not heirs to -thrones, we are not so important, and so we have more liberty." - -The door opened, and Father de Deza, tutor to Prince Juan and master of -studies, entered. Instantly all sat down and took their books, Prince -Juan with the others, but the minds of all were elsewhere speculating -upon the glorious discovery, the gain of new worlds for Spain. - -It was the way of the Duke to act quickly, and the next day by noon -Diego and Don Felipe were starting off with a party consisting of Don -Tomaso de Gama, Alonzo de Quintanilla, the Queen's accountant, and a -dozen men-at-arms. De Quintanilla was to make official records of the -return of the ship, to take charge of important papers, and carried a -letter from Queen Isabella to the Admiral. - -As the cavalcade trotted out of the courtyard of the palace, Prince -Juan, watching from a window and surrounded by all the pages, wore a -melancholy countenance; he longed to be of the travelers. From another -window on a level with the heads of Diego and Don Felipe watched Doņa -Christina and Doņa Luisita. The last picture impressed upon Diego's -mind, as he rode out of the courtyard in the cavalcade, was Doņa -Luisita's soft and beautiful eyes gazing after him. But his absence -was not likely to be longer than eight or ten days, and never did a -young man set out on a journey which meant more of hope and happiness -than did Diego. The return of his father not only meant the sight of -the best and tenderest of fathers returning from a long and hazardous -voyage, but it meant a triumph for the Admiral so great that Diego -was dazzled as he contemplated it. How insignificant appeared the -greatest title by that of the Admiral of the Ocean Seas, Viceroy and -Captain-General of all Lands to the Westward! It meant unending fame -for the Admiral and splendor for all his descendants. Diego remained -silent as they passed through the narrow streets of the town of -Barcelona, skirted the harbor, bright in the spring sun, and the blue -Mediterranean beyond. Soon they were in the open country. It was the -ninth day of March, and the vegetation in the sunny climate of southern -Spain was already well advanced. When they struck the highway through -the forests there was a faint, delicate green upon the trees, and the -sweet and pungent odor of the coming leaves perfumed the air. In the -fields the peasants tilled the rich earth and laughed and sang as they -toiled. - -Don Tomaso was the leader likely to be most popular with youths of the -age of Diego and Don Felipe. He rode ahead, trolling in his rich voice -the canzonets and popular ballads of the day--all relating to love and -war. His famous chestnut horse seemed proud of being bestridden by so -superb a horseman, and whinnied with delight and caracoled as they -traveled rapidly along the highway. At evening the Daredevil Knight -scorned inns and castles, saying: - -"Let us sleep like soldiers in our cloaks, and not seek soft beds like -ladies and carpet knights." - -Diego and Don Felipe were willing enough for this, and their supper -around the campfire seemed to them the most delicious meal they had -ever eaten. The Daredevil Knight, whose flow of spirits and energy -seemed inexhaustible, told them stories of his adventures in camps and -in the tilt-yard and in tournaments in France as well as in Spain. -When they at last settled to sleep, wrapped in their cloaks and -blankets, Diego put a stick of wood under his head by way of being more -comfortable. The Daredevil Knight, seeing this, rose and kicked the log -away, crying indignantly: - -"You are too fond of luxury, Don Diego, if you cannot sleep without a -pillow under your head; you are not fit for a soldier." - -Diego remained meekly silent; and Don Felipe, who was reaching out -for another stick of wood to use for the same purpose, withdrew his -hand and appeared to be sleeping soundly. Neither slept much, however; -their veins throbbed with excitement; and, as they watched the quiet -stars overhead, the thought of the story told by those stars to the -Admiral on the trackless ocean thrilled them both. They were late in -falling asleep, and slept so soundly that they were only awakened by -Don Tomaso's kicks and reproaches for being such sluggards. The sun was -just rising, their morning meal was prepared, their horses groomed, and -everything ready for their departure. Mindful of his father's habits of -singular neatness, Diego boldly said: - -"Before we start I must wash in yonder brook." - -"I washed half an hour ago," replied the Daredevil Knight. "If we had -depended on you and Don Felipe an enemy might have come and surprised -us all and carried you both off without waking you, I suppose. Oh, very -enterprising knights will you and Don Felipe make!" - -Neither Diego nor Don Felipe minded Don Tomaso's jokes; but they -privately arranged to be up in advance of him next morning. That day -was a repetition of the rapid and joyous travel of the day before. They -were passing through the richest parts of Spain, with many castles -and splendid residences in sight, and they encountered noblemen and -gentlemen upon the road who urged Don Tomaso to stop at least for -dinner or supper in their houses. But to each one Don Tomaso gave -courteously the same reply: - -"I travel on urgent business for her Majesty the Queen, and I cannot -stop except for needed rest and refreshment." - -He made no mention of the names of either Diego or Don Felipe, not -wishing any one to suspect his errand in advance. - -That night they slept again in the open on the banks of the -Guadalquivir, which narrowed suddenly at that point. Next morning, by -break of day Diego and Don Felipe were awake and, rising noiselessly, -were careful not to disturb any of the other sleepers; and, going to -the banks of the river, a short distance off, had a bath so cold it -made them shiver, but soon brought a warm glow to their healthy young -bodies. When they returned to their companions all were up and awake -except Don Tomaso, to the great joy of Diego and Don Felipe. The -Daredevil Knight lay snoozing peacefully. They even ate their morning -meal without awaking him, and at last, when Alonzo de Quintanilla -called to Don Tomaso, Diego and Don Felipe were sitting on their -horses as if ready to start. Don Tomaso sprang up in great confusion -and made a hurried toilet and a still more hurried breakfast. When they -finally started off in the glorious spring sunrise, Don Tomaso said, -laughing, to Diego and Don Felipe: - -"You have once caught me napping; I predict that I will catch each of -you a thousand times." - -That day they drew near the coast, and on the next, about four o'clock, -when the afternoon sun was at its richest, they caught the far-off -gleam of the blue Atlantic. - - - - -VIII - -SUNRISE OFF THE BAR OF SALTES - - -The sight of the monastery and the thought of seeing his little -brother and the good Prior and Fray Piņa filled the heart of Diego with -joy. He had an imaginative mind, and he lived over in thought and spoke -to Don Felipe of the extraordinary change that had taken place in his -fortunes since the day, nearly eight years before, when his father, a -poor and unhonored and unsuccessful applicant at the courts of kings, -jeered at and disbelieved, and Diego, himself a little ragged and -barefooted boy, had stopped at La Rabida to ask for a dole of bread. -Now, he was returning as Don Diego, a page-in-waiting to the heir to -the thrones of Arragon and Castile; his father returning as Admiral -of the Ocean Seas and Viceroy and Captain-General of all lands to the -westward, a title far transcending that of any grandee of Spain and -second only to the title of royalty, the arrival of this great man -breathlessly awaited not only by kings and queens, but by the whole -Spanish people. No more amazing picture of the vicissitudes of fortune -had ever been presented to the human mind. - -The party pushed on rapidly to the monastery and drew up before the -courtyard within half an hour. There, all was placid; no hint of the -return of the Admiral's caravel or that of Captain Martin Alonzo Pinzon -had reached the neighborhood of Palos. Diego, looking about the silent -old stone building, the orchard, and the fish-pond basking in the -afternoon glow, and the monks at their business of work or prayer, felt -that a thunderbolt was to fall among them. - -The Prior, Juan Perez, came out at once when he heard the clattering -of the horses' hoofs. One glance at Diego's radiant face and De -Quintanilla's look of triumph aroused a strong hope in the Prior's -heart. The Daredevil Knight flung himself off his horse and, -courteously greeting the Prior, drew him aside and told in a whisper -the news they had heard, and that they had come to await the arrival -of the caravel at Palos, which might be expected at any moment. -Juan Perez, a man of deep and sincere piety as well as of strong -understanding, fell on his knees in the courtyard and gave loud and -fervent thanks to God for the news that had been brought. When he arose -he sent for Fray Piņa, who came quickly; and to him the great event was -confided. Diego and Don Felipe were glad to see their old instructor -once more, and actually had the grace to thank him for his strictness -and sternness. They had learned some courtly ways from being at court. - -Alonzo de Quintanilla, a prudent man, seizing Juan Perez by the arm, -said: - -"But no word of this must get abroad in Palos; it would excite the -people too much. I bear letters to the families of the three Pinzon -brothers telling them of the safe arrival of Captain Martin Alonzo -Pinzon at Bayonne; but that is to be kept secret for the present. -I shall not go to the houses of the Pinzons to give their families -the joyful news until nightfall, so that I may not be recognized and -thereby the whole coast be aroused and excited." - -"Then," said Juan Perez, "you will have time to go with me and the -brothers to the chapel, where we shall give thanks to God for the -success of this great enterprise." - -Diego asked that the little Fernando be sent for, and soon the boy -was seen running along, his little hand within Brother Lawrence's big -paw. Diego took the child in his arms, and kissed him with a heart -overflowing with tenderness. He felt then more like a father to little -Fernando than an elder brother. The Admiral had never ceased to impress -upon Diego his sense of responsibility toward his younger brother, and -Diego, whose heart was naturally tender, glowed with affection for the -child. Fernando's first question was: - -"Diego, when will our father come back?" - -"Very soon," whispered Diego, "and he will bring you, Fernando, -beautiful play-things and strange little animals for pets unlike any -you have ever seen before." - -The Prior directed Brother Lawrence to ring the great courtyard bell -that all the brothers might assemble in the chapel. When the solemn -call of the bell was heard the monks, in their coarse robes and -sandals, left their work and marched silently into the little stone -chapel where Don Tomaso and Diego, with little Fernando, and Don Felipe -and De Quintanilla and the men-at-arms were already assembled. The -Prior, speaking from the altar steps, said simply that he had heard -good news of great import to Spain, and he desired all to unite in -thanks to God for what had been vouchsafed them. Diego joined with a -sense of deep gratitude in these thanksgivings; and little Fernando, -his hands clasped, whispered in Diego's ear: - -"I prayed every night and morning that our father would return, and now -he is coming, so I shall thank God just as you do." - -The quiet monastery was thrilled with subdued excitement; but nothing -passed beyond its stone walls. - -De Quintanilla waited until the darkness fell before leaving on foot to -visit the families of the Pinzons. - -Diego and Don Felipe were given the same little tower room in which -they had last slept almost a year and a half before. They were no -longer pupils of Fray Piņa; but they had learned to regard his stern -justice with respect. - -"He was very hard with us," said Don Felipe; "but not so hard as the -master of the pages." - -"No, he was not," said Diego, laughing. - -The last night they had spent together at the monastery Diego had slept -scarcely at all, and the long night hours had passed in watching the -moonlit sea upon which his father was to set forth at sunrise. This -night, too, he spent huddled in his cloak on the parapet. Don Felipe, -also wrapped in a long and heavy mantle--for the spring night was -sharp--sat with him. The beautiful afternoon had been succeeded by a -lowering night in which low-lying black clouds scurried across a pale -night sky, veiling the moon and the stars. As the dawn approached, -however, the sky cleared beautifully. Diego, going within the room, -waked the little Fernando, and with his own hands, willing but awkward, -washed and dressed the little boy, saying: - -"Fernando, we must go to the seashore now and watch for our father's -vessel." - -Something within Diego seemed driving him to the seashore. As soon as -the little boy was dressed Diego said to Don Felipe: - -"Come with me, Felipe, and do not leave me during this day, for I feel -that great glory for my father and great happiness for my brother and -me are impending, and I want to have you near me." - -The two youths, Diego holding the little Fernando by the hand, passed -out of the monastery gates just as the pearl and amethyst of the dawn -was turning to rose and gold. They walked rapidly, too rapidly for the -little boy, whom Diego took in his arms and carried. The town of Palos -was awaking, and workmen and sailors were appearing upon the streets, -and women were opening their houses. As Diego passed a house a woman -recognized him and, pointing to him, cried out angrily: - -"There goes the son of Colon, the Genoese who feared neither God nor -the devil, and sailed away into the unknown seas taking with him my -husband and my brother." - -As she spoke she burst into loud weeping. The passers-by, startled -by her passionate sobbing, stopped and gathered about her. Not one -consolatory or encouraging word was uttered, and lowering and menacing -looks were cast on Diego. An old man cried out, fiercely: - -"Yes! Colon the foreigner, Colon the Genoese adventurer, came to this -town of Palos, and to Moguer and to Huelva, and by force took away more -than a hundred men from us to be lost in an unknown ocean. My son--my -only son--was taken. Never shall I see him again!" - -Others joined in the imprecations upon the Admiral. Diego, putting down -little Fernando on the ground, stood and with crossed arms boldly faced -the excited and angry people in the street. - -"Yes!" he shouted, in a ringing voice. "The devil is not feared by my -father, because my father is an upright man and a Christian; nor does -he fear the sea, because he is the boldest and most expert seaman that -ever sailed the ocean floors. He fears God alone. He will return, and -that soon, with the greatest honor and glory the world has ever seen; -and you, men of Palos, who might have gone with him and did not, will -regret it all your lives; and the women and the children of Palos -and Moguer and Huelva will live to boast that it was these towns -chiefly that supplied those who sailed with Christobal Colon, Admiral -of the Ocean Seas and Viceroy and Captain-General of all lands to the -westward. Do you remember that when my father sailed, he gave the order -that when the ships had sailed seven hundred and fifty leagues to the -westward no sail should be made after midnight, knowing that land would -then be off their quarter? They were the words of a captain who knew -how to lay his course and what he should find at the end of it. Look -you, I and my brother would not change places to-day with the sons of -the greatest man in Spain, for it will soon be seen that we are the -sons of the greatest and boldest man in the world!" - -As Diego proceeded, his voice grew firmer. A deep enthusiasm possessed -his soul; his words, rapid and vehement, cut the air like swords. The -people, astounded at such language from a beardless youth, remained -silent. After a deep pause Diego added: - -"Watch then, you men and women of Palos, the bar of Saltes this day; -and when you see my father's ship standing up the river, go down on -your knees and ask pardon for all you have said against my father." - -Then Don Felipe shouted in a loud voice: - -"You who revile and execrate the name of Christobal Colon to-day, -to-morrow will hail him as the greatest man in the world. For my part -I, Don Felipe Langara y Gama, grandee of Spain of the first rank, -reckon it an honor to call the son of Christobal Colon my friend." - -With that Don Felipe threw his arm around Diego's neck, and the two -marched defiantly down the street, little Fernando walking in front of -them. Diego hugged Don Felipe openly, and rubbed his cheek against that -of his friend. The people of Palos, used to the distinction of rank, -were impressed by Don Felipe's words, and gazed curiously but silently -at the two youths. - -When they reached the waterside Diego said, with a strange look in his -eyes, to Don Felipe: - -"I have often thought as I lay in my bed at night, or as I attended the -Prince in the palace, or sat at meat with other pages, or worked at my -books, 'At this moment my father is watching for sight of land. If it -be daylight his eyes are fixed upon the horizon, watching for the dark -line of the land to appear. If it be night-time he is standing on the -poop watching, watching, watching for a light on shore.' And so I shall -watch all day for the sight of my father's ship, and when night comes I -will stay upon the quay still watching for him." - -As Diego spoke the sky, which had been rosy red, grew blue and -brilliant as the sun suddenly burst out in great magnificence; the -world seemed bathed in the golden glory. Diego had not once taken his -eyes from the blue billows of the Atlantic rushing in over the bar of -Saltes. And then--and then, he saw a speck upon the horizon, a vessel -carrying all hard sail and standing straight for the bar. Diego's heart -almost leaped out of his body. He seized Don Felipe and shouted: - -"Is that a caravel I see?" - -Then the little Fernando began to jump about and dance, shouting: - -"That is my father's ship!" - -Diego stood as if turned to stone, his eyes fixed upon the advancing -vessel. It could not be distinguished from any other vessel of its -class; but when it reached the bar of Saltes it came about, for the -water was low on the bar. And far down the river Diego saw, as did Don -Felipe and little Fernando, the great Gonfalon, the crimson and yellow -standard of Spain, flung to the breeze, which blew it out bravely so -that all could see the sign of glory. Then, over the crystal water, -came a single loud gun, the signal for a pilot to come aboard. - -It was as if the breaking out of the great standard and the boom of -the solitary gun waked the whole of Andalusia. Instantly the entire -population of Palos, of Moguer, of Huelva, and the country-side seemed -rushing to the seashore and watching in the glorious sunrise the banner -of Spain flying from the caravel. It was all so rapid that Diego was -stunned by it, the excited crowds of people, the sudden presence -of Juan Perez and De Quintanilla, the surging multitudes cheering, -weeping, laughing, the women shrieking with joy and falling into each -other's arms, the men mad with excitement, every pilot of Palos -running for his boat to have the honor of bringing the caravel up the -river. Men and women whose names Diego did not know embraced him, and -would have shoved him into a boat to go to meet his father; but Diego, -although his soul was in a tumult, retained his outward calmness. He -would meet his father on Spanish soil and would see that glorious -landing. The boats, some under sail and others with rowers, sped down -the river and swarmed about the caravel; but none was allowed to -board her except the pilot, Sebastian Rodriguez, one of the Admiral's -earliest and most steadfast friends. To Rodriguez was given the honor -of bringing the caravel over the bar. The cheers and cries of the -people echoed down the river, and the wind brought back the shouts from -the boats surrounding the immortal ship. The tide came in slowly, and -it was not until high noon that Rodriguez was able to take the vessel -over the bar. It was a wait of six hours in the clear March sunshine; -but to the assembled multitudes it seemed a mere fragment of time. -Every hour added to the cheering and excited crowds that thronged -the shore. The church bells over the whole district rang joyously, -salutes were fired, and bands of musicians played and sang religious -and patriotic hymns. Diego, holding his little brother by the hand, -and with Don Felipe next him, watched the caravel as it came slowly up -the river in the midst of a universal joy and applause that echoed to -the deep-blue sky above them. On the poop, under the royal standard, -stood the Admiral splendidly dressed in crimson, his attitude calm and -unmoved, but full of that sublime dignity which had ever marked him. -The boat of the pilot Rodriguez, which was towing astern, was brought -alongside and the Admiral, with Rodriguez and the Queen's notary, came -over the side and were pulled to the shore. - -The crowd fell back, leaving the sons of Columbus to meet him first. -A profound and solemn silence fell upon them as the Admiral, when his -foot touched Spanish earth, kneeled down and kissed the ground and gave -thanks to God. The vast multitude followed his example, Diego and the -little Fernando being the first to kneel. Then, rising, the Admiral -took his sons in his arms and kissed and blessed them. Next he embraced -the Prior, Juan Perez, and De Quintanilla. Both were strong men; but -they wept freely. The Admiral did not forget Don Felipe. - -The men from the Niņa had poured ashore, and were greeted with -tears and cries and wild embraces as men returning from the dead. A -procession was rapidly formed, headed by the mayor and the officials -of the town of Palos and the ecclesiastics, to escort Columbus and his -men to the Church of St. George, where a solemn Te Deum was to be sung. -The procession was preceded by a beautiful youth in a red cassock and -a white surplice bearing a great glittering cross. He was followed -by the ecclesiastics in their robes and by the officials. Then came -the Admiral holding with his right hand Diego and with his left the -little Fernando, and escorted by Alonzo de Quintanilla, the Queen's -representative, on one side, and Juan Perez on the other. Behind them -stretched thousands of persons, only a few of whom could get into the -little church. The multitudes crowding about it fell on their knees -and joined in the singing of the solemn hymn of thanks. A supernatural -joy filled every heart; in that of the Admiral the humble thanksgiving -of a Christian took precedence of the stupendous triumph of the -greatest discovery the world had ever known. - -A scant forty-eight hours was allowed Diego before beginning the return -journey to Barcelona. It was the shortest two days Diego had ever -known. Apart from the deep and penetrating joy of seeing his father and -the splendid glow of pride which naturally filled Diego's heart, he, -like Don Felipe, was consumed with curiosity concerning the strange -new lands to the west, the men of a race never before seen in Europe, -whom the Admiral had brought back, the specimens of birds, plants, -minerals, and animals hitherto unknown. But there was little time for -that. The whole of Spain seemed roused in a single day, and the Admiral -was overwhelmed with throngs of great people coming and sending to -him and the enthusiasm of vast numbers of people half crazed with joy -and pride in the man whom they had opposed and thwarted and whose -sublime purpose they had tried in every way to defeat. The great and -magnanimous soul of the Admiral could easily ignore the past; he made -no reproaches and bore his stupendous honors with the same dignity he -had borne contumely, neglect, and treachery. - -At the end of the second day couriers traveling at full speed by night -and by day, and with frequent relays of horses, brought the Admiral -a letter from the sovereigns. It was addressed to "Don Christobal de -Colon, our Admiral of the Ocean Seas, Viceroy and Captain-General -of all Lands to the Westward." In it, after expressions of fervent -gratitude the King and the Queen desired the Admiral to take time to -refresh himself before attending the sovereigns, who would await at -Barcelona his convenience. - -On the second night after the arrival of the Admiral, he had his first -long conversation with Diego, who was leaving at daybreak with Don -Tomaso and Don Felipe. The Admiral questioned Diego closely as to his -life at court. Diego was able to answer satisfactorily. His conduct had -not been perfect, but it was not stained by a single act of baseness. -At saying good night, the Admiral said: - -"Remember, do not on your return appear puffed up with pride and make -your companions smile by references to your father, and otherwise -comport yourself with pride, which is folly." - -"But, my father," answered Diego, "do you think that I am not, after -all, human, and that I am not filled with pride at the thought of being -your son? I will try not to show it too much; but I have ever told all -my companions, and said it before Prince Juan, that my father, the -Genoese navigator, would one day be acclaimed not only the greatest man -in Spain, but the greatest man in all the world. I think I have been -very modest in claiming so little." - -Diego spoke with such fire and earnestness, and with so much of boyish -simplicity, that even the grave Admiral was forced to smile at the -boy's idea of modesty. - -"Take pattern," he said, "by Don Felipe. That youth has always had -everything that the highest rank, the greatest fortune, could confer, -yet see how little boastful he is." - -"But Don Felipe's father was not to be named in the same breath with my -father," replied Diego, sturdily, and wagging his head. - -"Very well," said the Admiral, still smiling, "if you grow too boastful -and self-conscious, I think I can depend upon your young companions to -bring you to your proper senses." - -"Yes," replied Diego, after a pause, and looking with a clear, frank -gaze into the eyes of the Admiral. "And another thing will make me -guard my behavior and control my tongue, which will be this: that my -father has done so much, not only for Spain, but for the whole world, -that the discovery is so vast, it means so much to mankind, that for -me, the son of the discoverer, to be boastful would be mean beyond -comparison. I have learned much, my father, in the time that I have -lived at court. I have heard the conversation of the great Queen with -mighty men like the Cardinal Pedro Gonzalez de Mendoza and the Duke -of Medina Coeli, and with statesmen and great generals and admirals -and learned men. I have been under the care of the Duke de Medina -Coeli, a man reckoned fit to train the heir to the throne, and with -the nineteen other royal pages, all selected for their character and -intelligence. The Queen does not value rank exclusively, and means that -the companions of Prince Juan shall all be worthy of his friendship. -When you sailed away, my father, I was a boy; now I am a man, I think -as a man and feel as a man, and I hope I shall be able to act as a man. -I cannot help feeling in my heart that I am the son of the greatest -man in the world; but I know that I, myself, have done nothing; I have -only reaped the benefit of what you have done, beginning, even before -I was born, those eighteen years of eternal struggle, of heartbreaking -disappointments. Do you think that in this triumphant hour I have -forgotten the days so far away now when I was a little ragged, barefoot -boy holding your hand and toiling along the country roads as well as I -could, and when I was tired and footsore being carried in your arms? -You were often tired and footsore, too, were you not? And so in my mind -I have a pride in you such as no son ever felt before in a father, and -a deep joy, and it only makes me feel my own nothingness, The only way -I can ever prove myself worthy of being your son is by good conduct, -and in that I will ever do my best." - -The Admiral listened with amazement as Diego proceeded. Here indeed was -the transition in the mind and heart of a boy to the dignity of a man. -Diego was no longer a mere lad to be guided and instructed. Much, it is -true, was still for him to learn as men of intelligence learn from the -beginning to the end of life; but his character was now fixed. He could -stand alone, confident of his own integrity, looking boldly at the -world around him, able to retrieve his own mistakes and to extricate -himself from the perplexities of life and to protect himself amid its -dangers. Something of this the Admiral said to him, clasping Diego to -his breast. The father and the son, looking into each other's eyes, so -much alike, understood each other perfectly. - -"I have never left any place so unwillingly in my life as I shall leave -here to-morrow," said Diego; "but I will not say one word of complaint, -and I shall be ready to mount before any of those who return with me." - -"That shows that you have become indeed a man," replied the Admiral. -"It is the mark of manhood to do promptly and uncomplainingly the -necessary and painful things of life. Boys and weaklings complain and -protest and disobey; men obey silently and immediately if they are fit -to be called men." - -Diego was as good as his word, and at daylight on the March morning he -was on horseback before any of the party, even the Daredevil Knight. -Some secondary thoughts came to console him. He had seen those strange -beings, those wonderful productions, those birds and animals of the -New World, and could tell Prince Juan and the pages of honor all about -them. This natural feeling was shared by Don Felipe, who whispered to -him, as they stood in the courtyard ready to depart: - -"I have drawn pictures of the Indians to show Prince Juan, and also -pictures of all the strange animals of which I could get sight." - -Diego was charmed at this. Don Felipe drew well, while Diego was but -an indifferent hand at it; and it had not occurred to him to make any -pictures. He had, however, some little plants from the New World, which -were meant for Doņa Luisita's garden at the castle of Langara. - - - - -IX - -GLORIA - - -The party started off joyously; Don Tomaso was always joyous, but -even the sober Alonzo de Quintanilla was full of gaiety. It was found -impossible to prevent the people knowing that one of the two young men -with Don Tomaso's party was the son of the immortal man with whose -fame the world was ringing. In every town through which they passed -multitudes collected, wild with curiosity and enthusiasm, and eager -to see not only the son of the Admiral, but the men who had seen and -talked with those who had returned from the marvelous voyage. Along the -highways crowds assembled, made up of all classes of persons, from the -great nobles down to the humblest muleteer or peasant; all were filled -with an overwhelming sense of what the great discovery meant, not only -to Spain, but to the whole world. So large were these concourses that -travel became exceedingly slow; and Don Tomaso wished it to be as -rapid as possible. He managed, however, to make up for the delays by -traveling at night and resting only a few brief hours. To Diego and Don -Felipe and all it seemed possible to do without sleep. - -As the party neared the splendid city of Barcelona the crowds and -enthusiasm seemed, if possible, to increase. Foreseeing what their -entrance into Barcelona by daylight might be, Don Tomaso determined -to steal into the city by night. Accordingly, on that last night they -prepared as usual to bivouac at sunset, that they might get rid of the -surging people for a little while. About nine o'clock the party quietly -rose and slipped away upon the dark and silent highroad. The night was -gloomy and the darkness impenetrable, but that best suited the purposes -of the travelers. The road was straight and level; and, giving their -horses the rein, they rode steadily until they reached the outlying -gardens and villas of Barcelona. Soon they stood before the main gate -of the city. Don Tomaso, riding up to the postern-gate, rapped gently -with the hilt of his sword. The warder in the tower asked his name and -business. - -"I am," replied Don Tomaso, "Don Tomaso de Gama, and I bear a letter -for their Majesties the King and the Queen. Open the small gate; we -will dismount to enter." - -The warder came hastily down and, removing the bolts, chains, and -bars from the small postern-gate, the party dismounted, and, leading -their horses, entered the silent city. The warder, like all the people -of Spain, was eager to know something of the wonderful rumors that -agitated Barcelona. - -"Is it true, sir," he asked of Don Tomaso, who, once inside the walls, -was preparing to mount, "that the Genoese captain has returned after -finding a new world?" - -"As true as my sword, which is of the best steel made in Toledo, and -never misses fire," answered Don Tomaso, flinging himself upon his -horse and galloping off. - -The echo of iron hoofs upon the stones of the street waked the whole -city. The minds of men were at a tension, and every sound startled -them. When the horsemen reached the palace, lights were still burning -in the Queen's apartments, although it was past midnight. The sound of -arriving horsemen aroused the whole palace. The gate was immediately -opened, and Don Tomaso and his party, dismounting, entered. In the -corridors they were met by all the officers of the palace, none of -them fully dressed, some putting on their clothes and shoes, others -barefooted and wrapped in blankets. None dared to stop them, because -Don Tomaso was making direct for the Queen's part of the palace. When -they reached the Queen's anteroom, guarded by halberdiers, the door -opened and Doņa Christina appeared. In place of her usual splendid and -correct costume she wore a short black silk petticoat, while a large -shawl wrapped around her concealed other deficiencies of her toilet. -She was too much agitated to do more than to give a hasty greeting to -Don Felipe and Diego, and in her excitement called Diego, Felipe, and -Felipe, Diego. - -"Her Majesty has sent for the King," she said to Don Tomaso, "and -desires that you will come in immediately. You bear a letter, I -suppose, from the Admiral?" - -All then entered the Queen's room, while Doņa Christina disappeared for -a moment. She came back saying: - -"The Queen desires to see you, Don Tomaso, and Seņor de Quintanilla in -private. Don Diego and Don Felipe may retire to bed." - -Diego and Don Felipe looked at each other in silent chagrin; but knew -better than to protest. - -They had hoped to be present at the interview of Don Tomaso and Alonzo -de Quintanilla with the sovereigns, and were disappointed at being sent -to bed, as it were. Nevertheless, their return was not without triumph. -As they walked down the long corridor, now full of persons, for the -palace was thoroughly aroused, they were stopped at every moment by -eager questioners. Diego until then had been merely an object of -curiosity, and even of prejudice on the part of some. Many persons of -rank treated him haughtily and disapproved the conferring of the title -of "Don" upon the son of an obscure Italian and putting him upon an -equality with the greatest nobles of Spain. Now, they regarded him with -extraordinary interest and respect. This youth, closely resembling -his father, would one day inherit all the titles and dignities of the -greatest man in the world at that time. Diego subtly realized this, -and, instead of dazzling and unsettling him, gave him a better poise -and a more sensible view of honors and distinctions. Midway of the -crowd in the corridor they met the Duke de Medina Coeli, governor of -the pages. Although stern in discipline, he was strictly just, and had -never made the smallest distinction between Diego and the other pages, -and was always careful to give him the title of "Don." As Diego and Don -Felipe stopped and respectfully saluted him, the Duke spoke kindly to -Diego, congratulating him upon the glorious achievement of his father -and hoping that Diego would prove worthy of him. - -"I thank you, sir," responded Diego, with a low bow, "and I shall try -by my conduct not to discredit my honored father." - -Don Felipe, who was really more courageous with the Duke than Diego, -whispered a request into his ear. The Duke smiled, and answered: - -"You may go to Prince Juan's room if you wish. No doubt he is awake -like every one else in the palace. If he chooses to go with you to the -dormitory of the pages to see what you have to show, I shall make no -objection." - -The Duke passed on, and Diego and Don Felipe made straight for the -apartments of Prince Juan. The Prince was under military discipline, -and had no more privileges in regard to leaving his room than had any -of the pages. Diego knocked at the Prince's door, and it was opened, -not by an attendant, but by Prince Juan himself. He caught Diego in his -arms and hugged him, boy fashion, and then hugged Don Felipe. - -"I have scarcely slept since the great news came!" cried Prince Juan. -"Never did any country receive so great a gift as your father, Don -Diego, has made my country. Tell me all, all, all, that you have seen -and heard." - -"The governor bade me say that if your Highness wished to go into the -pages' dormitory he would permit it, and there we can show the pictures -and tell the story as we have heard it," said Don Felipe. - -Prince Juan had in him that fine quality of wishing to share his -pleasures with others. The thought of being surrounded by his friends -and young companions while the story was told delighted him. He, with -Diego and Don Felipe, rushed pell-mell into the long dormitory, simple -as a barrack, where the pages slept on their hard, narrow beds. But -they were not sleeping. They were gathered in groups at the narrow -windows trying to make out from the commotion in the courtyard what -had happened. When the door opened the dormitory was quite dark, but -Prince Juan, seizing with his own hands a lamp that hung from the wall -outside, carried it into the large, bare room. The three were greeted -with shouts of delight, for when alone with Prince Juan, he was treated -as a friend and comrade rather than a prince. Prince Juan, putting -the lamp on the table, and with the twenty pages around it, began to -examine the pictures that Don Felipe had drawn and painted, and to -listen breathlessly to the story of what they had seen. When the gray -dawn crept in at the windows they were still gathered around the table, -although the lamp had long since burnt itself out. Then, however, they -scampered back to their beds, and Prince Juan ran to his apartment, for -in a little while it would be time for the governor of the pages to -glance in Prince Juan's room and inspect the dormitory. - -Although it was still March, and the Admiral was not expected to arrive -at Barcelona until the middle of April, preparations for his reception -were already begun. As the magnitude of the discovery of a new world -grew more apparent the people seemed to be more and more dazzled by -the great event. It not only meant an incalculable increase of power, -territory, and wealth for Spain, but it was of great import to science -and learning of all sorts. Geography had to be reconstructed, and -astronomy would make a tremendous advance. The strange phenomenon of -the variation of the compass excited all Europe, and the discovery of -the trade-winds by the Admiral was of enormous benefit to commerce. -It was indeed the revelation of a new and stupendous world to the Old -World. - -There were two persons, however, who, without forgetting the vast -material and scientific value of the discovery, fixed their minds upon -a nobler ideal, the taking to the New World the Christian religion and -civilization. These two were the Admiral himself and the great Queen -Isabella. Daily letters were exchanged between these two lofty and -kindred spirits, who could rise above the consideration of earthly -grandeur, and who cherished splendid dreams of the reclamation and -civilization of the unknown lands. - -When it became known that the Admiral was to be received at Barcelona -by their Majesties about the middle of April, all Spain, Italy, and -France were aroused, for the event had so stirred men's minds that -it was communicated with unheard-of rapidity; even far-off England -and Germany were thrilled to the centre. The King and the Queen, to -do honor to the Admiral, determined to receive him in full sight of -the people instead of in the palace. A huge temporary saloon open to -the air was built in the great Plaza opposite the Cathedral. It was -carpeted with magnificent Moorish carpets and blazed with cloth of -gold and gorgeous tapestries brought from the Spanish palaces. At the -end a magnificent throne was erected with three chairs upon it, two -throne chairs and one for the Admiral, who was to receive an honor -never before granted to any but reigning sovereigns, to sit upon the -throne with the King and the Queen. A grand Te Deum was to be sung, -and all the greatest singers in Spain flocked to Barcelona that they -might take part in the music. The streets became so crowded that -it was difficult to make progress, and the country round about was -converted into a camp by a tented army of travelers who could get no -accommodations in the city. - -Through it all Diego felt as if he were in a splendid dream. His heart -swelled with joy; his prayers were all thanksgivings; but his mind -remained steady and his conduct modest. To have shown a haughty and -vainglorious spirit he felt would degrade him more than anything else -in the world. His own sound sense and his father's counsels prevented -him from being unbalanced by the flatterers who surrounded him. Those -who had jeered at him as being an upstart and a foreigner were now the -ones who paid him court, as if he were a man grown, who could not -meet him without linking their arms in his, and who embarrassed him by -the urgency of their invitations to banquets and feasts and jousts at -arms and in the tilt-yard. Diego in his heart scornfully contrasted -them with those of his friends like Don Felipe and the other pages who -had treated him always with friendliness; with the Daredevil Knight, -who had made no difference between the son of the Genoese captain and -Don Felipe, heir to the honors of the house of Langara y Gama; of Doņa -Christina, who had shown him unvarying sweetness; and Doņa Luisita, -whose soft eyes had always smiled on him from the night he had first -seen her, in her white gown and veil, standing in the archway of the -castle of Langara, the light from the silvery lamp falling upon her -slender white figure. But above all was the great Queen unchanged, -because she had ever been the soul of gentleness and kindness to the -motherless Diego. - -It was a time of brilliant happiness for all, but to the son of the -great Admiral it was a time of joy deeper than he had ever dreamed. - -Four days before the arrival of the Admiral, who was making his way -amid acclamations from Cordova to Barcelona, Juan Perez, the Prior -of La Rabida, arrived with Fray Piņa and Brother Lawrence, bringing -the little Fernando. It was the wish of the Admiral that both of his -sons and his tried and true friends should be present in his hour of -unprecedented triumph. Lodgings were prepared in the palace for the -party from La Rabida. The palace was already crowded with members of -the royal family and their attendants. The pages had to find quarters -where best they could, their dormitory being given up to the great -nobles in attendance on royalty. Diego and Don Felipe were glad of -a little room to themselves, with a pallet on the floor for little -Fernando, whom Brother Lawrence still faithfully attended. - -"It is no use to find a sleeping place for me," said Brother Lawrence -to Diego, "for no one can sleep until the Admiral comes. I ever -believed in your father, and when I saw the Prior with his head bending -down over the maps for hours and days with the Admiral, I said to -myself, 'That Genoese captain will find something yet.'" - -As Brother Lawrence could neither read nor write, his views on -geography were not particularly valuable; but his faithfulness and -devotion to Diego in his childhood, and to little Fernando now, made -him a prized though humble friend. Fray Piņa was perfectly unchanged, -being the same calm, polished and somewhat stern young man; but Diego -and Don Felipe had learned to understand and admire his justice and -even his sternness, for he was no sterner with others than with himself. - -"I should not be surprised," said Diego to Don Felipe, on the night -of the fourteenth of April, as they lay in their beds watching the -stars shining through the window, the little Fernando sleeping on the -floor, and Brother Lawrence snoring loudly on a bench outside the -door--"I should not be surprised if Fray Piņa were to send us word the -first thing in the morning that he is prepared to give us a lesson in -astronomy to-morrow instead of watching the great procession." - -"It would be exactly like him," replied Don Felipe, laughing; "but for -once I would not obey him." - -Half the night the two youths watched the night sky, dreading that -clouds and storms might mar the most glorious day that had ever dawned -for Spain. But the stars shone from a clear sky, and the April morning -broke as beautiful as that August morning when the Santa Maria, the -Pinta, and the Niņa slipped away into the sunlit ocean, or on that -glorious March day when the Niņa passed the bar of Saltes, the great -standard of Spain floating in triumph from her peak. - -Scarcely an eye closed that night in Barcelona. Not only was every -street, window, and balcony filled, but the roofs were black with -persons passionately anxious to see the great pageant. The sun shone -with unclouded splendor, and soft airs from the blue and glittering -Mediterranean gently moved the flags and banners that were clustered -thick over city and harbor. A great collection of vessels from every -adjacent port and country made the spacious harbor of Barcelona a -forest of shipping and extended in long lines on both sides of the -coast. - -The entrance of the Admiral was to take place at ten o'clock in the -morning. At that hour all was arranged in the great Plaza of the -city. The King and the Queen, wearing their royal robes and mantles, -and with crowns upon their heads, were seated on the throne in their -great gilded chairs. Behind the King's chair stood Prince Juan; and -behind the Queen were grouped the Princess Katharine and the other -royal children. Of the ladies-in-waiting of the Queen, Doņa Christina -held the place of honor, and among the young ladies of the highest -rank was seated Doņa Luisita. She was dressed in white and silver, -and was in clear view of Diego, who, with little Fernando, was given -a seat next the steps of the throne. The robes, jewels, and plumes of -the ladies made a splendid glow of color. The cardinals, headed by -the great Cardinal Pedro Gonzalez de Mendoza, the firm friend of the -Admiral, made a blaze of glory in their scarlet robes, while all the -bishops and archbishops of Spain in purple robes and white capes, their -glittering mitres and crosiers shining in the April sun, with their -train-bearers and attendants, were seated next the cardinals. Among -the ecclesiastics there were two plain, black-gowned figures, those of -Juan Perez, Prior of La Rabida, and Father de Deza, tutor to Prince -Juan, the two friends of whom the Admiral in life and in his will after -his death spoke with gratitude which has immortalized them. Others who -had stood by the Admiral, like Alonzo de Quintanilla and Luis de St. -Angel, were given places of honor. The nobles, wearing their robes of -state, the knights, resplendent in flashing armor, added magnificence -to the scene. A solemn hush was upon the great company. All excitement -and jubilation subsided as the deep and tremendous meaning of the day -made itself felt. - -All was in readiness by half-past nine o'clock; but long before that -came from afar off a deep murmur like the distant roar of breakers -on the seashore as the Admiral approached the gates of the city. The -murmur grew, never loud, but deep, because it came from the hearts -of the people. It seemed to rise from the earth and the sea and to -extend to the limits of the horizon. Presently, in the glowing April -morning, the head of the advancing procession was seen as it entered -the spacious Plaza. Then it parted to the right and the left, and the -figure of the Admiral, mounted on a stately black horse, was seen -advancing, while immediately behind him rode a color-bearer carrying -the great Gonfalon of Spain that Columbus himself carried ashore and -planted upon the soil of the New World. At sight of him, suddenly -the silence was broken with a clashing of joy bells, the salvos of -artillery, the solemn thunder of cathedral chimes, and the shrill -acclaims of trumpets and clarions. The tongues of the people were -unloosed, and a storm of applause that began in the Plaza of Barcelona -and reached for leagues beyond on land and sea rose to Heaven. This -lasted until the Admiral reached the foot of the broad, red-carpeted -stairs that led to the great platform. There he dismounted and ascended -the stairs. - -Never had this majestic man appeared so majestic. His tall and -stately figure, his hair already white, his carriage full of grace -and dignity, would have made him a marked man among other men under -any circumstances; but, above all, his eyes, gravely triumphant, -introspective, of unshakable steadiness, proclaimed him as a master -of men, born a captain, and designed for command. Well might it be -believed that this man stood ready to sail into the perilous and -uncharted seas, to meet unknown dangers and horrors, to face and subdue -mutineers who would have thrown him into the ocean and dared not, -though they were many and he was but one, who kept his course due west, -when even the hearts of his captains and his pilots fainted within -them, remaining unshaken when the North Star seemed to tremble in its -orbit. Brave and skilful mariners had there been before, but he was the -bravest and the most skilful man who had ever sailed blue water. - -These thoughts surged through the hearts of all who saw the immortal -Admiral as he mounted the steps of the great platform, where was -assembled the authority, the learning, the piety, the chivalry, and the -beauty of Spain to do him honor--honor to him who for eighteen years -had borne, with sublime courage and infinite patience, disappointment, -contumely, treachery, and ignominy. Now, at his approach, all rose, and -every head was uncovered. The loftiest height of glory was his; and yet -he remained undazzled, with a just pride before men, but with humility -before God, for Columbus was, first of all, a Christian. - -This man Columbus, a foreigner and penniless, had, by his stupendous -genius and matchless courage, made Spain in one hour the greatest -and most powerful nation in the world. The boundless territory and -the incalculable riches with which Columbus had endowed the country -brought with them new duties, new problems, vast responsibilities, -and novel relations with all the countries of the known world. The -more this amazing discovery of Columbus was analyzed the greater -and deeper it appeared. Not only Spain, but the future of the human -race, was powerfully and inevitably affected by the revelation of a -new and mysterious world. These thoughts produced not only a sublime -exaltation, but a solemn and sobering effect upon the vast multitudes -assembled in Barcelona on that unforgettable day. Especially was this -true of the rulers of Spain. The expulsion of the Moorish invaders from -Spanish soil had been justly regarded as a splendid national triumph -and a great step forward in Christian civilization. To this was added -a triumph greater than any known to ancient Rome, beside which all -the acquisition of territory, all conquests of the world appeared -trivial. It was this sublime thought that paled the cheeks of the great -Queen Isabella, who, with eyes downcast upon her clasped hands, moved -her lips continually in silent prayer. King Ferdinand, soldier and -statesman, but cold and crafty, saw the vast achievement of Columbus -from a nobler point of view than ever before. Prince Juan, true son of -his mother, was, like her, pale and concentrated. It was more than the -brilliant sunrise of Spanish glory; it was the greatest earthly event -the world had ever known. - -In the midst of a breathless silence Columbus advanced slowly and with -dignity. When he reached the foot of the throne he stopped, modestly -waiting for an invitation from his sovereigns to proceed further. The -Queen, in her eagerness, moved forward and, stooping, held out her -hand. Columbus ascended the throne and kneeled before the sovereigns. -The Queen, her hand still extended, raised him, saying: - -"Welcome, Don Christobal Colon, our Admiral of the Ocean Seas, and -Viceroy and Captain-General of all Lands to the Westward. We give you -our thanks. So does all Spain." - -Columbus bowed low, and King Ferdinand repeated the words of the Queen. - -Then, at a signal, the Te Deum burst forth, singers and instruments -in a glorious outburst of music, the great organ from the open doors -of the cathedral swelling out in melodious thunder. The King and the -Queen and Columbus fell upon their knees, as did all present, and the -multitudes and throngs in the streets and the watchers and listeners -on land and sea. All remained kneeling while the majestic hymn of -thanksgiving was sung. When a solemn silence succeeded, Queen Isabella, -in a clear voice, gave thanks to God for the great discovery and asked -the blessing of the Almighty upon the new lands to the westward. A -deep and heartfelt amen surged from the lips and hearts of tens of -thousands of persons. The Queen and the King, and all present, then -rose from their knees and seated themselves, Columbus taking the seat -of honor prepared for him by the side of Queen Isabella. The King and -the Queen, after thanking him formally, desired him to give an account -of his voyage, which he modestly recounted. When this was over, the -procession passed before the sovereigns of those who had been upon the -voyage, the Indians that had been brought back, the strange birds and -animals and plants, Columbus briefly explaining them. - -It was long past noon before the great ceremonies were finished, and -the glittering assemblage rose to attend the magnificent banquet to -be given in honor of Columbus at the royal palace. As Diego walked -along, holding the hand of his little brother, his heart was almost -oppressed with the glory he had seen. He felt as if he had been -lifted into another and higher world for a time, and he yearned for -the simple and familiar things of life. When he passed Don Felipe in -the orderly assemblage, he looked toward his friend imploringly. Don -Felipe slipped his arm within that of Diego. Then Diego, glancing up, -saw the beautiful dark eyes of Doņa Luisita fixed upon him with soft -brilliance. The tempest in his heart was calmed, his soul was soothed. -After all that he had known of distresses and of triumphs, of miseries -and of splendors, of poverty and of riches, of ignominy and of glory in -his short life, he had never lacked for love or friendship. Could they -remain his, life would be a glorious conflict, a splendid struggle to -the last, ending with the hope of love eternal. - -THE END - - - - -TRANSCRIBER'S NOTE: - -Minor changes have been made to regularize hyphenation and to correct -obvious typesetters' errors; variant spellings have been retained. - -Words and phrases that were typeset in the original book have been -shown with an underscore (_) before and after. - - - - - -End of Project Gutenberg's The Son of Columbus, by Molly Elliot Seawell - -*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE SON OF COLUMBUS *** - -***** This file should be named 63173-8.txt or 63173-8.zip ***** -This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: - http://www.gutenberg.org/6/3/1/7/63173/ - -Produced by D A Alexander and the Online Distributed -Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive -specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this -eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook -for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, -performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given -away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks -not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the -trademark license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country outside the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you'll have to check the laws of the country where you - are located before using this ebook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The -Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org - - - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the -mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its -volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous -locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt -Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to -date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and -official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -For additional contact information: - - Dr. Gregory B. Newby - Chief Executive and Director - gbnewby@pglaf.org - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. - diff --git a/old/63173-8.zip b/old/63173-8.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 5f09e91..0000000 --- a/old/63173-8.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/63173-h.zip b/old/63173-h.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index affab0f..0000000 --- a/old/63173-h.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/63173-h/63173-h.htm b/old/63173-h/63173-h.htm deleted file mode 100644 index 7529ef0..0000000 --- a/old/63173-h/63173-h.htm +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7492 +0,0 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" - "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> -<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en"> - <head> - <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=iso-8859-1" /> - <meta http-equiv="Content-Style-Type" content="text/css" /> - <title> - The Project Gutenberg eBook of Son of Columbus, by Molly Elliot Seawell. - </title> - <link rel="coverpage" href="images/cover.jpg" /> - <style type="text/css"> - -body { - margin-left: 10%; - margin-right: 10%; - font-size: 110%; -} - - h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6 { - text-align: center; /* all headings centered */ - clear: both; -} - -p { - margin-top: .51em; - text-align: justify; - margin-bottom: .49em; - text-indent: 2em; -} - -.ph1 {text-align: center; - margin-top: .51em; - margin-bottom: .49em; - font-size: xx-large; - font-weight: bold; - text-indent: 0;} - -.ph2 {text-align: center; - margin-top: .51em; - margin-bottom: .49em; - font-size: x-large; - font-weight: bold; - text-indent: 0;} - -.ph3 {text-align: center; - margin-top: .70em; - margin-bottom: .49em; - font-size: large; - font-weight: bold; - text-indent: 0;} - -.ph4 {text-align: center; - margin-top: .70em; - margin-bottom: .49em; - font-size: medium; - font-weight: bold; - text-indent: 0;} - -.ph5 {text-align: center; - margin-top: .70em; - margin-bottom: .49em; - font-size: small; - font-weight: bold;} - -hr { - width: 33%; - margin-top: 2em; - margin-bottom: 2em; - margin-left: auto; - margin-right: auto; - clear: both; -} - -.box {border: solid black;} -.no-indent {text-indent: 0;} - -hr.small {width: 25%;} -hr.chap {width: 65%} - -table { - margin-left: auto; - margin-right: auto; -} - - .tdl {text-align: left;} - .tdbr {text-align: right;} - .tdc {text-align: center;} - -.pagenum { /* uncomment the next line for invisible page numbers */ - /* visibility: hidden; */ - position: absolute; - left: 92%; - font-size: smaller; - text-align: right; - text-indent: 0; -} /* page numbers */ - -.reduce {font-size: 90%;} - -.blockquot { - margin-left: 10%; - margin-right: 10%; -} - -.dropcap {float:left; - font-size: 40px; - line-height: 22.5px; - padding-top: 2px; - padding-bottom: .25px;} - -.center {text-align: center;} - -.center2 {text-align: center; - padding-left: 15em;} - -.right {text-align: right;} - -.smcap {font-variant: small-caps;} - -.caption {font-size: 90%; - margin-bottom: 2em;} - -/* Images */ -.figcenter { - margin: auto; - text-align: center; -} -.figcenter2 { - margin-top: 3em; - margin-bottom: 3em; - text-align: center; -} - -/* Poetry */ -.poem { - margin-left:10%; - margin-right:10%; - text-align: left;} - -.poem span.i0 {display: block; margin-left: 0em; padding-left: 3em; text-indent: -3em;} - -/* Transcriber's notes */ -.transnote {background-color: #E6E6FA; - color: black; - font-size:smaller; - max-width: 40em; - padding:0.5em; - margin: auto; - font-family:sans-serif, serif; } - -@media handheld /* Place this at the end of the CSS */ -{ body - - { margin: 0; - padding: 0; - width: 95%;} - - .chapter {page-break-before: always;} - - h2.no-break {page-break-before: avoid; - padding-top: 0;} - - h3.no-break {page-break-before: avoid; - padding-top: 0;} - - .hide {display: none;} - -} - </style> - </head> -<body> - - -<pre> - -The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Son of Columbus, by Molly Elliot Seawell - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most -other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of -the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you'll have -to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook. - -Title: The Son of Columbus - -Author: Molly Elliot Seawell - -Release Date: September 10, 2020 [EBook #63173] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 - -*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE SON OF COLUMBUS *** - - - - -Produced by D A Alexander and the Online Distributed -Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net - - - - - - -</pre> - - -<div class="figcenter hide" style="width:450px;"> -<img src="images/i_cover.jpg" width="450" height="706" alt="Cover" title="" /> -</div> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h1>THE SON OF<br /> -COLUMBUS</h1> - -<p class="ph4">BY</p> - -<p class="ph3">MOLLY ELLIOT SEAWELL</p> - -<p class="ph5">AUTHOR OF<br /> -“THE LIVELY ADVENTURES OF GAVIN HAMILTON”<br /> -“THE ROCK OF THE LION”<br /> -“A VIRGINIA CAVALIER” ETC.</p> - -<p class="ph4">ILLUSTRATED</p> - -<div class="figcenter2"> -<img src="images/i_title.jpg" width="150" height="139" alt="logo" title="" /> -</div> - -<p class="ph3">HARPER <i>&</i> BROTHERS PUBLISHERS<br /> -NEW YORK AND LONDON<br /> -MCMXII</p></div> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<p class="center reduce no-indent"> -COPYRIGHT, 1912, BY HARPER & BROTHERS</p> - -<hr class="small" /> - -<p class="center reduce no-indent">PRINTED IN THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA<br /> -PUBLISHED SEPTEMBER, 1912<br /> -</p></div> -<hr class="chap" /> - - -<div class="chapter"> - -<div class="figcenter"> -<a id="i_frontispiece"><img class="box" src="images/i_frontispiece.jpg" width="400" height="614" alt="frontispiece" title="" /></a> -</div> - -<p class="caption center2">[See page <a href="#Page_205">205</a></p> - -<p class="caption center no-indent">THEN, RISING, THE ADMIRAL TOOK HIS SON IN HIS ARMS</p></div> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<div class="center"> - -<p class="ph2 no-break">CONTENTS</p> -<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="3" summary="CONTENTS"> -<tr><td class="tdbr reduce">CHAP.</td> -<td> </td> -<td class="tdc reduce">PAGE</td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdl">I.</td> -<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Looking Seaward</span></td> -<td class="tdbr"><a href="#Page_1">1</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdl">II.</td> -<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">The Dawning of the Light</span></td> -<td class="tdbr"><a href="#Page_24">24</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdl">III.</td> -<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">The Castle of Langara</span></td> -<td class="tdbr"><a href="#Page_49">49</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdl">IV.</td> -<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">The Last Sigh of the Moor</span></td> -<td class="tdbr"><a href="#Page_72">72</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdl">V.</td> -<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">The Splendor of the Dawn</span></td> -<td class="tdbr"><a href="#Page_102">102</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdl">VI.</td> -<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">The Harbor Bar is Passed</span></td> -<td class="tdbr"><a href="#Page_134">134</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdl">VII.</td> -<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">The Joyous Hearts of Youth</span></td> -<td class="tdbr"><a href="#Page_160">160</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdl">VIII.</td> -<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Sunrise off the Bar of Saltes</span></td> -<td class="tdbr"><a href="#Page_191">191</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdl">IX.</td> -<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Gloria</span></td> -<td class="tdbr"><a href="#Page_214">214</a></td></tr> -</table></div></div> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<p class="ph2 no-break">ILLUSTRATIONS</p> -<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="3" summary="Illustrations"> - -<tr><td class="tdl reduce">THEN, RISING, THE ADMIRAL TOOK HIS SON IN HIS ARMS</td> -<td> </td> -<td class="tdbr reduce"><a href="#i_frontispiece"><i>Frontispiece</i></a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdl reduce">FRAY PIŅA GLANCED WITHIN THE ROOM AND THOUGHT<br /> -THEY WERE MAKING ACQUAINTANCE VERY FAST</td> -<td class="tdc reduce"><i>Facing p.</i></td> -<td class="tdbr reduce"><a href="#i_004">4</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdl reduce">GARCILOSA SUDDENLY GAVE HIS ANTAGONIST A THRUST<br /> -UPON THE SWORD-ARM</td> -<td class="tdc reduce">“</td> -<td class="tdbr reduce"><a href="#i_094">94</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdl reduce">THE SIGNING OF THE DOCUMENTS OF AGREEMENT</td> -<td class="tdc reduce">“</td> -<td class="tdbr reduce"><a href="#i_126">126</a></td></tr> -</table></div> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<p class="ph2 no-break">AUTHOR’S NOTE</p> - -<p class="no-indent"><span class="dropcap">V</span>ERY few liberties have been taken with -history, and these few are merely of detail. -The signing of the final pact with the -Spanish sovereigns by Columbus really took -place on the plains of Santa Fé, outside of -Granada, but it is represented, for dramatic -effect, as taking place in the Alhambra. Also, -the celebrated order of Columbus directing -his captains, after sailing seven hundred and -fifty leagues due west, to make no more sail -after midnight was given at the Canaries -instead of at Palos. Irving’s <i>Life of Columbus</i>, -the best yet written, has been strictly -followed in dates.</p> - -<p class="right"> -M. E. S.</p></div> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_1" id="Page_1">[Pg 1]</a></span></p> - -<p class="ph1 no-break">THE<br /> -SON OF COLUMBUS</p> - -<h2 class="no-break">I<br /> -<small><small>LOOKING SEAWARD</small></small></h2></div> - -<p class="no-indent"><span class="dropcap">O</span>N a bright October noon in 1491 two lads -sat in a small tower room in the monastery -of La Rabida, talking together with that -profound interest which two human beings -feel, who have recently met and whose lives -will be closely united for some time to come. -One of them was Don Felipe de Langara y -Gama, already, at sixteen, the head of one of -the greatest ducal families in Castile. The -other was Diego, the eldest son of the Genoese -navigator and map-maker, by name, Christopher -Columbus, or, as the Spaniards called -him, Christobal Colon.</p> - -<p>The lads were fine types of two extremes of -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_2" id="Page_2">[Pg 2]</a></span>station. Diego was a model of sturdy strength -for his age. He inherited the piercing blue -eyes of the Genoese navigator—those commanding -eyes, once seen, were unforgettable. -His fair skin was freckled by living much in -the open, and his wide, frank mouth expressed -resolution as well as a charming gaiety of -heart. Diego, however, could be serious -enough when occasion required. He had -known more in his short life of the rubs of -fortune, of hope deferred, of splendid dreams -and heartbreaking disappointments, of courts, -of camps, of penury, of luxury, than many -men know in the course of a long span of -years.</p> - -<p>Don Felipe, born in a palace and knowing -that at sixteen he would inherit the wealth -and splendid honors of his dead father, the -Duke de Langara y Gama, was yet all simplicity -and good sense. His slight figure was -more muscular than it appeared, and the softness -of his black eyes belied the firmness of -his character.</p> - -<p>Both lads alike were dressed with extreme -plainness, the grandee of Spain wearing no -better clothes than the son of the Genoese -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_3" id="Page_3">[Pg 3]</a></span>captain. They were so absorbed in each -other that they had no eyes for the glowing -scene visible through the iron-studded door, -open wide upon the parapet. Below them lay -the green gardens and orchards of the monastery. -Beyond, stretched the town and the -port of Palos, where the masts and hulls of the -caravels and other vessels of the time were outlined -against the deep sea and blue sky. Some -of these vessels were unloading, and others were -taking on their cargoes, the sailors singing cheerfully -as they worked. Farther off still, the -“white horses” of the blue Atlantic dashed -wildly over the bar of Saltes, the sun glittering -upon the crested waves. Over the whole of the -Andalusian coast and the rolling hills beyond -was that atmosphere of peace and plenty which -made Andalusia to be called the Granary, the -Wine Cellar, the Gold Purse, and the Garden -of Spain.</p> - -<p>The two lads were quite oblivious of all -this, and even of the nearness of their instructor, -Fray Piņa, the young ecclesiastic who -had charge of them, and who was at that moment -leaning over the parapet outside the -open door. Fray Piņa glanced within the -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_4" id="Page_4">[Pg 4]</a></span>room; he could not hear what Diego and Don -Felipe were saying, but it was evident from -their attitudes—both leaning eagerly across the -rough table, strewn with writing implements -and the manuscript books of the period—that -they were deeply interested in each other.</p> - -<p>“They are making acquaintance very fast,” -thought Fray Piņa to himself. “It is best -to leave them alone. Don Felipe needs the -companionship of just such a boy as Diego, -and Diego needs the companionship of just -such a boy as Don Felipe.”</p> - -<p>It was this very point which the boys were -discussing.</p> - -<p>“And so,” Don Felipe was saying, “my -mother, Doņa Christina, who is obliged to be -much at court, because she is a lady-in-waiting -to Queen Isabella, said the court was not a -good place in which a youth should be wholly -brought up, especially a faithless youth like -me. Nor does my mother think it well to -have my sister, Doņa Luisita, at court yet, as -she is but fourteen; so Luisita remains with -her governess at the castle of Langara when my -mother attends the Queen. And my mother -asked Fray Piņa to take charge of me for a -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_5" id="Page_5">[Pg 5]</a></span>year, with another youth of my age, and -without rank; and we should be schooled together, -and dress plainly, and be disciplined.”</p> - -<div class="figcenter"> -<img class="box" id="i_004" src="images/i_004.jpg" width="400" height="621" alt="Fray Piņa Glanced within the Room and Thought They were Making Aquaintance Very Fast" title="" /> -</div> - -<p class="caption no-indent center">FRAY PIŅA GLANCED WITHIN THE ROOM AND THOUGHT<br /> THEY WERE -MAKING ACQUAINTANCE VERY FAST</p> - -<p>“I think Fray Piņa is the man for discipline,” -replied Diego, laughing. “And I -suppose your lady mother knew that Fray -Piņa would treat us exactly alike—you, a -grandee of Spain, and I, the son of the Genoese -navigator, Christobal Colon, as the Spaniards -call my father. But look you, Don Felipe, I -am the son of the greatest man who ever trod -Spanish earth, and some day the world will -know my father to be that man.”</p> - -<p>As Diego said this he straightened up and -looked Don Felipe in the eye; he expected his -statement to be questioned. Don Felipe, -however, surprised him by saying, quietly:</p> - -<p>“So Fray Piņa told Doņa Christina, my -mother.”</p> - -<p>A flush of gratified pride shone in Diego’s -frank face.</p> - -<p>“My father will still be the bravest navigator -that ever lived, even if he never returns -from his voyage,” continued Diego, proudly. -“All the other navigators in the world have -been satisfied to creep along the shores, never -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_6" id="Page_6">[Pg 6]</a></span>going out of sight of land. My father means -to steer straight into the uncharted seas, sailing -due west. He will have but two nautical -instruments, a compass and an astrolabe, but -he will have the stars by night and the sun by -day, and God’s hand to help him—for my -father is a man who fears God and nothing else. -He will steer due west, and will come to a -great continent with vast ranges of mountains, -superb rivers, larger and longer than any we -know, huge bodies of water, mines of gold and -silver and minerals of all sorts, strange birds, -animals, and peoples—everything far more -splendid than this old Europe. All the seafaring -men believe in my father—far more than -the learned men do—because the sailors know -that my father understands more about the -seas than any living man. Already, although -my father is not an admiral, the captains and -the pilots and the sailors at Palos call him the -Admiral. Every mariner in the port of Palos -bows low to my father.”</p> - -<p>“But he will be an admiral before he sails,” -said Don Felipe, catching Diego’s enthusiasm.</p> - -<p>“Yes,” answered Diego, “he demands that -he shall become the Admiral of the Ocean Seas, -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_7" id="Page_7">[Pg 7]</a></span>Viceroy and Captain-General over all the lands -he discovers. And also my father asks, if he -goes on this great errand for Spain, that I -shall be taken to the court with you and become -a page-in-waiting to Prince Juan, the -heir to the thrones of Arragon and Castile. -Is that much to ask? Well, my father will -do ten thousand times more for Spain.”</p> - -<p>“Perhaps,” said Don Felipe, after a pause, -“that is why we are to be schooled together -and then go to court together. Are you -frightened at the thought of the court?”</p> - -<p>“No,” answered Diego, sturdily.</p> - -<p>“I never heard,” said Don Felipe, “of a -foreigner and the son of a man without rank -being page to a royal prince.”</p> - -<p>“It is the first time,” said Diego, calmly, -“and it will not often be repeated. If the -other pages, sons of the greatest nobles of -Castile and Arragon, dare to say anything to -me about it I have my answer ready. I will -say, ’I am the son of a man who never said -or did a base thing in his life, who is courteous -to a beggar, and not abashed in the presence -of kings and queens—for I have seen my -father in the presence of King Ferdinand and -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_8" id="Page_8">[Pg 8]</a></span>Queen Isabella—who honors God, and who -is the very boldest man that ever sailed blue -water.”</p> - -<p>“That is right,” said Don Felipe, “but I can -tell you, Diego, there are a great many things -at court that are not pleasant. You think -Fray Piņa is strict. He is not half as strict -as the master of the pages at court. For when -anything goes wrong Fray Piņa will listen to -an excuse, but the master of the pages listens -to no excuses. The pages of honor are required -to be on duty long hours and are not -permitted to read or do anything except to -watch their royal masters and mistresses. -They must rise early and stay up late. They -can have no games or amusements except -those which are permitted the royal princes. -I warrant, Diego, there will be many times -when you will long for the fields and orchards -of La Rabida, the fishing in the summer, and -being able to play with any boy you may like, -and to read a pleasant book when so inclined.”</p> - -<p>“That may be true,” replied Diego, stoutly, -“but we shall have the horse exercise and the -sword exercise; we shall see much of soldiers, -and we shall enjoy living like men instead of -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_9" id="Page_9">[Pg 9]</a></span>like boys. But, after all,” he cried, laughing, -“I am not yet at court. The King and Queen -are still considering whether they shall help -my father. Only of one thing I am certain—that -my father will one day be a great discoverer.”</p> - -<p>“I know it, too,” said Don Felipe, with -boyish confidence. “The very first time I -beheld your father I felt as I never did toward -any man before. I watched him, and listened -to him, thinking to myself, ’When I am an old -man the boys will ask me, “Tell me when did -you first see the great Admiral?”’ And I want -you to tell me how you first came to this -place.”</p> - -<p>“I remember it all well enough, although I -was but a little lad of seven—just as old as my -little brother Fernando is now. I even remember -things before that—the life I led with -my father, going from place to place on foot, -sleeping at the humblest inns and in the huts of -peasants, nobody willing to listen to my father. -Then my father made for the sea, there to take -ship for England, and when we reached the -monastery gate I was half dead, I was so -hungry and tired. My father rang the bell -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_10" id="Page_10">[Pg 10]</a></span>and asked a little milk for me. It was -brought me by Brother Lawrence, the lay -brother here; he was a young man then. -Oh, you will like Brother Lawrence—he is -here still. While I was drinking the milk, -the Prior, Juan Perez, passed through the -courtyard where we sat and stopped and -spoke to my father. I tell you this, Don -Felipe, no matter whether people believed in -my father or not in those days, they always -treated him with personal respect. The Prior -got in conversation with my father, and in -a little while told Brother Lawrence to take -care of me. Oh, what a happy day that was! -All day Brother Lawrence took care of me, -playing ball in the orchard and teaching me -to fish in the fish-pond, and at night he put -me to bed on a little pallet in a room where -my father was to sleep. All day the Prior -had been with my father, and I recollect that -I was waked by my father coming into the -room, and the Prior followed him. It was -as if he could not leave my father. Then I -went off to sleep, and in the middle of the -night I again waked, and my father and the -Prior were still bending over the maps and -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_11" id="Page_11">[Pg 11]</a></span>talking. I remember, however, I was such -a little boy, that I thought we should have -to leave that happy place at daybreak and -take the road once more in weariness. But -in the morning my father asked me:</p> - -<p>“’Diego, do you like this place?’</p> - -<p>“And I said yes, and I was so sorry we were -going away, and he said:</p> - -<p>“’We shall remain here some days, my little -Diego.‘</p> - -<p>“That made me so happy! We stayed here -fourteen days. I played all day long in the -orchard and by the fish-pond with Brother -Lawrence. And then there were other boys, -the two Pinzons, Martin and Alonzo, and -the son of the physician Dr. Garcia, and the -sons of the pilot Fernando Rodriguez.”</p> - -<p>Diego suddenly stopped talking. He had -the instinctive good sense not to talk too -much about himself.</p> - -<p>“Go on,” cried Don Felipe, “I want to -know every word about your father, everything -that happened, so when I am an old -man I shall be able to tell people about the -great Admiral.”</p> - -<p>Diego’s eyes shone, and he kept on.</p> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_12" id="Page_12">[Pg 12]</a></span></p> -<p>“All the seafaring men in Palos, especially -the great ship-owners the Pinzons and the -pilot Rodriguez, were called to the monastery -by the Prior, and they all listened to my -father and wondered and admired, and told -the Prior my father was right and by sailing -to the westward he would discover land. -So, then, the Prior wrote a letter to the great -Queen Isabella, whom he knew, and sent it -to her by Rodriguez the pilot. Rodriguez -came back saying the Queen commanded my -father to come to her at Cordova. He went -to Cordova, and took me along. I was -sorry to leave Brother Lawrence and the boys -I played with every day. I do not recollect -much about Cordova, I was such a little -lad. I thought I should see the great Queen -Isabella with her crown on and King Ferdinand -with his scepter, and how surprised -I was when I saw only a gentle lady, very -simply dressed, sitting with the King in a -small room. They were, however, on a dais, -and I sat down on the steps. Presently I -fell asleep, and when I waked up my head -was on the Queen’s knee, and she was looking -down at me with smiling eyes. I do not -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_13" id="Page_13">[Pg 13]</a></span>remember my own mother; but when I -looked into the eyes of Queen Isabella I knew -what a mother’s eyes were like. She was -ever kind to me later, in all the many times -that my father wearily went to court and -followed the King and Queen about, even -when encamped with their soldiers.”</p> - -<p>“When will your father return?” asked -Don Felipe.</p> - -<p>“I do not know; but it will be soon, I -think.”</p> - -<p>As Diego spoke there was a sound of clattering -hoofs on the stones of the courtyard.</p> - -<p>“That is my father!” said Diego.</p> - -<p>At that moment Fray Piņa turned from the -parapet and entered the room. Instantly -both lads bent over their books as if they had -no thought but study. Fray Piņa smiled -slightly; they had not looked at a book since -their tutor had been out of the room.</p> - -<p>Fray Piņa took up a treatise on mathematics -and began to question the two boys. -Neither of them did very well, their thoughts -being with the Admiral in the courtyard and -the news he might bring from Granada, where -the siege of the Moorish city was in progress, -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_14" id="Page_14">[Pg 14]</a></span>and the success he might have had with the -Spanish sovereigns. But Fray Piņa went on -relentlessly. Diego felt as if he could scarcely -remain in his seat; and Don Felipe’s eyes -wandered everywhere, his wits going with -his eyes. At last a knock was heard at the -door, and the ruddy, good-natured, boyish -face of Brother Lawrence, the young lay -brother who worked in the garden and milked -the cows and attended to the mules, appeared -at the door.</p> - -<p>“His Excellency Christobal Colon,” he -said, giving Columbus the name the Spaniards -called him, “has arrived, and begs Fray Piņa -to excuse Diego for an hour.”</p> - -<p>“You are excused,” said Fray Piņa; and -the next moment was heard the sound of -Diego’s footsteps as he rushed down the -stone stairs, two at a time, and dashed into -the sunny courtyard.</p> - -<p>Standing in the courtyard talking with the -Prior, Juan Perez, was Columbus. From -him had Diego inherited the tall, slim, but -muscular figure. The hair of the great Admiral -was quite white; his complexion was -weather-beaten; his eyes were the eyes of a -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_15" id="Page_15">[Pg 15]</a></span>man born a captain. All masters of men -have the indomitable eye—the eye whose -glance conveys the command of a master -before the lips can speak the word. In -Columbus the power to command was writ -large all over him—not only to command -others, but to command himself.</p> - -<p>Suddenly the little Fernando, seven years -old, led by Brother Lawrence, came into the -courtyard and ran forward, and at the same -moment Diego appeared. Instantly the Admiral’s -stern face softened. He took the little -boy in his arms, kissing and blessing him, -and then clasped Diego to his breast.</p> - -<p>Diego caught his father in a strong embrace, -and rubbed his smooth, boyish cheek against -the Admiral’s bronzed face.</p> - -<p>The Admiral, as he was already popularly -called, returned warmly the boy’s caress, -and then, holding him off at arm’s length, -said to him:</p> - -<p>“How have you behaved since last I saw -you?”</p> - -<p>“Not very well,” answered Diego, candidly, -looking into his father’s eyes. “It is so hard -to study in sunny weather, and Don Felipe -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_16" id="Page_16">[Pg 16]</a></span>and I went fishing and overstayed our time -twice.”</p> - -<p>The Admiral said nothing; and the Prior, -a grave, handsome man, but not unkindly in -his aspect, looked hard at Diego.</p> - -<p>“Then,” said Diego, after a pause, and -forcing himself to speak, “the first day Don -Felipe came I found the Prior’s mule at large, -and Don Felipe and I got Fray Piņa’s mule -out of the stable and ran races until we were -caught and stopped.”</p> - -<p>“And punished,” added the Prior, quietly. -“But there has been no lying or deceit or -anything base in the conduct of your son, -Christobal Colon.”</p> - -<p>“Then,” answered the Admiral, “the rest -is easily forgiven. Return now to your -studies, and when I have finished my conversation -with the Prior, and when Fray Piņa -will give you leave, then will I speak with -you at length.”</p> - -<p>The Admiral was more indulgent to the -little Fernando, who remained, clinging to -his father’s hand.</p> - -<p>Diego returned to the tower room quickly. -He might have lagged, but he knew that the -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_17" id="Page_17">[Pg 17]</a></span>Admiral’s silent watchfulness followed him. -When he sat down again at the table he made -an honest effort to concentrate his mind on -what Fray Piņa was saying, and managed to -do so until the mathematical lesson was over. -Then was it time to go to the refectory for -dinner. The refectory was a large, bare -room except for a long table at which the -monks dined. At the farther end sat the -Prior with the Admiral, as the guest of honor, -on his right. No conversation was allowed, -and after grace was said one of the monks -at a reading-desk read aloud from the Scriptures -while the simple meal went on. Diego -heard not one word of what was being read. -He could only fix his eyes upon his father, -across whose gray head a beam of sunlight -shone like an aureole. The Admiral, however, -put strict attention to the reading. It -was as if his extraordinary mind, like everything -about him, were under the control of -his will and, as a revolving light, could be -turned at pleasure upon any subject.</p> - -<p>When dinner was over, the two youths -expected, as usual, to be given an hour’s -recreation in the sunny orchard in which was -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_18" id="Page_18">[Pg 18]</a></span>a fish-pond, that was Diego’s delight. But -he was bitterly disappointed when Fray Piņa -said to him:</p> - -<p>“It was this day a week ago that you and -Don Felipe raced the mules. Let us go up -to the study now and spend that wasted -hour in mathematics.”</p> - -<p>Diego and Don Felipe exchanged rueful -glances, but said nothing. Fray Piņa had a -deadly ingenuity in paying off for all their -pranks, and had no doubt waited for this -day when the orchard and the fish-pond and -the blue sky called to the lads, “Come and -be happy.” Instead, however, of talking -and fishing and frolicking, as they usually -did at that hour, the two lads spent the time -being put through their paces by Fray Piņa. -By the time they had answered one question -another was propounded, and the blackboard -in the tower room was covered with figures. -It was a sort of mental exercise for Fray -Piņa himself, and when the hour was over -Diego and Don Felipe were thoroughly -tired out with hard work and incessant figuring.</p> - -<p>Fray Piņa himself looked weary, and his -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_19" id="Page_19">[Pg 19]</a></span>black hair lay damp upon his forehead under -his skull-cap.</p> - -<p>“You have both done well,” he said, “and -showed more proficiency than I expected. -You may now have two hours’ recreation -instead of one. The Prior’s mule and mine -are both in the stable, but I apprehend they -are both safe.”</p> - -<p>Diego and Don Felipe hung their heads -at this, but were glad to rush into the fresh, -bright air once more.</p> - -<p>In the kitchen garden, next the orchard, -they found Brother Lawrence, of whom both -were fond. One of their favorite amusements -was to engage in wrestling bouts with -Brother Lawrence. Diego was strong for his -age, and Don Felipe was a skilful wrestler; but -they were no match for the brawny lay brother, -who, with his cassock tucked up, laid the two -youths out on the grass at his pleasure.</p> - -<p>At last came the message for which Diego -had been longing, to go to his father in the -Admiral’s room. Diego first ran to the little -room which he occupied with Don Felipe, -and washed off the stains he had encountered -with the green earth, and put on a collar of -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_20" id="Page_20">[Pg 20]</a></span>clean linen—the Admiral was irreproachably -neat and always rebuked sternly the least -untidiness on the part of Diego. In a few -minutes Diego found himself in the guest-chamber -with a window looking seaward. -The Admiral was gazing out toward the -Atlantic with an expression of concentration. -His eyesight was extraordinarily strong and -clear, and at fifty-three he could see farther -than Diego’s young eyes. He turned as -Diego entered and clasped the boy in his -arms. Grave as was the great Admiral, no -man had more in him of tenderness. The -Admiral seated himself in a great chair, and -Diego, drawing up a stool, put his arm about -his father’s neck and prepared to listen.</p> - -<p>“The time has come, Diego,” said the Admiral, -“when King Ferdinand and Queen -Isabella will redeem their promise. They -told me that when the end of the war to -drive the Moors from Spain was in sight, they -would then provide me with ships for my -enterprise. The Moors are now in their -death struggle in the city of Granada, their -last stronghold. The city is encompassed on -every side; every gate is commanded and no -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_21" id="Page_21">[Pg 21]</a></span>provisions can enter. Nor can the Moors -make any sortie beyond the Vega, because -the armies of Castile and Arragon are encamped -about them, and the town of Santa -Fé stands guard over the main gate of Granada, -called the Gate of Justice. The Moors cannot -hold out longer than the first of the year, -and I think it well to be upon the spot to remind -the King and the Queen of their promise. -I have seen and talked with Doņa Christina -de Langara y Gama, the mother of Don Felipe. -She is a woman of wisdom and good heart, -and she thinks it will be well to have Don -Felipe and you go to Santa Fé. It will be -a lesson in learning and valor to you both -and will give you the opportunity of seeing -great events and greater persons. If my request -is granted, that you be made a page -of honor to Prince Juan, I would wish that -you should see something first of the persons -to whom you may be attached. I have great -confidence in Doņa Christina, who has promised -to take an interest in you while I am -on my voyage. It is arranged that Fray -Piņa and Don Felipe shall spend some weeks -at the castle of Langara, and Doņa Christina -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_22" id="Page_22">[Pg 22]</a></span>has asked that you remain there while I go on -to Santa Fé. I shall go to Santa Fé alone, -not knowing what my plans are until I have -an audience with the King and the Queen. -Doņa Christina is now at Langara, but after -some days she will proceed to Santa Fé to -attend the Queen.”</p> - -<p>Diego could scarcely believe his ears for -joy. In an instant he realized the splendid -prospect: he was to go to Granada, to witness -the end of the siege, to see the King and -the Queen, soldiers and statesmen—it seemed -like a glorious dream to a spirited and imaginative -boy. His face glowed so that his -father smiled.</p> - -<p>“Does Don Felipe know?” gasped Diego.</p> - -<p>“I do not know,” answered the Admiral, -smiling; “but I do know that you long to -tell him. I had many other things to say to -you; but I have not the heart to keep you. -Go—”</p> - -<p>Before the Admiral could finish his sentence -Diego had darted out of the room. He caught -sight, as he passed a window, of Don Felipe -sitting on a bench near the fish-pond reading -a book in the waning afternoon light. The -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_23" id="Page_23">[Pg 23]</a></span>first thing Don Felipe knew Diego had dashed -upon him, snatched the book from his hand, -and was saying, joyfully:</p> - -<p>“Don Felipe! Don Felipe! We are to go -to Granada to see the end of the siege! We -may see fighting—think of it, Don Felipe! -We shall see soldiers, Don Felipe! And make -a fine journey! And my father says your -mother, Doņa Christina, has asked that we -may stay some weeks at the castle of Langara, -Don Felipe!”</p> - -<p>The Admiral, passing the same window -through which Diego had seen Don Felipe, -glanced out and saw the two lads dancing -wildly, their arms about each other, Don -Felipe’s cap, with the insignia of his rank, on -Diego’s head, and Diego’s cap, with no design -at all, on Don Felipe’s head. The sight -brought a smile to the Admiral’s face.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_24" id="Page_24">[Pg 24]</a></span></p> - -<h2 class="no-break">II<br /> -<small><small>THE DAWNING OF THE LIGHT</small></small></h2></div> - -<p class="no-indent"><span class="dropcap">S</span>OON it was time for supper, and all -assembled once more in the great, bare -refectory. Diego and Don Felipe felt as if -they were in a dream, so dazzled were they -by the prospect before them. They had -known what the Admiral had demanded, and -with the sanguine nature of youth they -thought that all the Admiral asked would be -conceded, and already reckoned the great -voyage to have been accomplished. But to -go to Granada, to see the close of the stupendous -struggle, to be present in the hour of -victory, was more than they had dreamed. -Nevertheless, though lost in rosy visions, they -did not forget to eat their simple supper. -When it was over and they went out into the -courtyard, the Admiral passed them, holding -by the hand the little Fernando.</p> - -<p>“Go now,” said the Admiral to the child, -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_25" id="Page_25">[Pg 25]</a></span>“and find Brother Lawrence, that he may put -you to bed, where you must sleep soundly -until the birds call you in the morning.”</p> - -<p>The child, used to prompt obedience, went -away; and then the Admiral said to the two -youths:</p> - -<p>“Come, Don Felipe and Diego, and walk -with me to the seashore, and I will tell you -some of the wonderful things of the sea.”</p> - -<p>Don Felipe’s heart throbbed with pleasure. -He felt a strange sense of being honored when -he was treated as a son by the Admiral.</p> - -<p>It was then about six o’clock on a warm -October evening. Not yet was the sun gone, -and the western sky was all opal and gold -and crimson. The rosy light reddened the -far-off sea, and the white billows gleamed -with an opaline light.</p> - -<p>The Admiral walked between the two lads -along the sandy road to the little town of -Palos. Softly the bells of the little church -of St. George were ringing, their mellow music -mingling with the distant echo of waves beating -the bar off the harbor. As the sound of -bells reached them the Admiral remained -silent; Diego knew that his father was making -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_26" id="Page_26">[Pg 26]</a></span>a silent prayer, a thing he often did. Presently -he spoke:</p> - -<p>“I love to hear the melody of church bells -mingling with the sound of the sea, for the -sea has a majestic voice like the voice of -God.”</p> - -<p>Then the Admiral began telling them some -of the marvels of the sea, speaking in plain -and sailor-like language. Soon they entered -the one long street of the town of Palos. The -day’s labor was over for all, except the crews -of some Neapolitan vessels loading in haste -in order to catch the tide that would take -them over the bar, the sailors working cheerfully, -singing as they toiled. The women -were standing at their doorways, their children -about them, while the workmen were -returning from their labors. Many were seafaring -men who had made many voyages. -They all turned and looked curiously after -the Admiral, every one saluting him with -respect. When his back was turned some -smiled; and some predicted evil, saying:</p> - -<p>“That man will take away with him some -of the best mariners of Palos, and they will -never be seen again.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_27" id="Page_27">[Pg 27]</a></span></p> -<p>Others said:</p> - -<p>“We shall try to go upon that bold voyage.”</p> - -<p>The Admiral returned all salutations with -dignity and courtesy. Then, with the two -lads, he entered the Church of St. George, -which was already dark. Before the altar -burned the undying sanctuary lamp. An old -priest was leaving the altar, followed by a -small fisher-boy not much bigger than the -little Fernando and wearing a white surplice -over a scarlet cassock. When they were -gone the Admiral and Diego and Don Felipe -were in the church alone.</p> - -<p>The Admiral knelt, as did the two youths, -the Admiral kneeling so long that Diego and -Don Felipe began to look with yearning toward -the open door of the church, through -which the cheerful sounds of evening floated. -The voice of the night watchman calling the -hour was heard as he marched up and down -the street carrying a lantern on a pole. Sounds -of music and dancing rang from the courtyard -of a little tavern near by, where a pack-train -of mules had just arrived and the muleteers -were making merry. The two youths were -not often allowed out of the monastery at -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_28" id="Page_28">[Pg 28]</a></span>that hour, and they longed with the longing -of boyhood to see the life and the gaiety -of the town. A half-hour passed, and Diego -and Felipe had remained admirably quiet; -but now the limit of boyish endurance was -reached. Don Felipe began to cough, and -Diego knocked over a footstool which made -a fearful clatter in the stillness of the darkened -church. The Admiral rose and walked -out, followed by Diego and Don Felipe. -Never had the little seaport looked gayer or -more picturesque. From many balconies and -casements came the sounds of singing, and a -handsome cavalier in a velvet mantle was -coming down the street strumming his guitar -and rehearsing the song he intended to sing -under the window of his lady-love.</p> - -<p>On the quay some sailors were dancing to -their own singing. All these sights and sounds -were delightful to Diego and Don Felipe; and -the Admiral, who had not forgotten that he -was once a boy himself, indulged them in -watching these pleasant sights.</p> - -<p>A number of fishwives, their skirts tucked -up about their hips, stood watching the dancing -sailors and laughing. Diego, moved by a -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_29" id="Page_29">[Pg 29]</a></span>sudden impulse, ran up to a fat old fishwife, -and seizing her by the hand rushed into the -middle of the dancers and began the fandango. -At that even the grave Admiral laughed.</p> - -<p>Don Felipe made no move to join the -dancers; but another fishwife, much stouter -than the friend of Diego, suddenly made a -dash for him, crying:</p> - -<p>“Come along, you pretty boy, and dance -with me like a gentleman!”</p> - -<p>Don Felipe, with perfect grace and politeness, -gave the fishwife his hand as though -she were a court lady, and danced the fandango -well and gracefully.</p> - -<p>The Admiral, leaning against a stone wall, -watched the merry scene. He was too wise -to check the effervescent spirits of the two -lads, and waited with as much patience -for them to finish their frolic as they had -waited for him to finish his prayers in the -church. After half an hour, however, when -the church bells chimed seven o’clock, the -Admiral turned and walked away from the -town toward the shore, where there were -only a few fishermen’s huts. By the time -he was clear of the quays he heard footsteps -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_30" id="Page_30">[Pg 30]</a></span>behind him, and Diego and Don Felipe were -running at top speed to join him.</p> - -<p>“I hope,” said the Admiral, turning pleasantly -to the two youths, “that you enjoyed -your dancing. When I was your age I did -the same thing; I grew sober at an early age, -but I do not like too much sobriety in early -youth.”</p> - -<p>“But, my father,” said Diego, taking his -father affectionately by the arm, “you gave -up dancing very early; but did you give up -the love of fighting quite so soon? I have -heard something about the time you tried -to provoke a fight with the Florentine fleet -and dashed among them shouting, ‘Viva San -Giorgione!’ the battle-cry of the Genoese.”</p> - -<p>“It was a rash and foolish thing,” replied -the Admiral; “but I did many rash and foolish -things in my youth. Genoa seemed then on the -verge of war with Florence, and I was in command -of a decked vessel in the Genoese fleet, -under the command of my uncle Giovanni. -We were going up the Mediterranean with a -fair wind when we discovered the Florentine -fleet of nine vessels coming down toward us on -the same tack. My vessel, the San Giorgione, -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_31" id="Page_31">[Pg 31]</a></span>was a fast sailer both on and off the wind -and answered the helm beautifully. It came -into my head that it would be a good thing -for the cause of my country if we could destroy -the Florentine fleet then and there; -but we could not attack them without provocation. -Like a rash young man, I thought it -would be well to give the Florentines provocation -enough to attack us; so, knowing -well the capacity of my vessel, I steered directly -under the quarter of the Florentine -flag-ship. The Florentine admiral was standing -on the poop as we brushed past; when we -came abreast of him I shouted, ‘Viva San -Giorgione!’ as if the battle were on, and expected -an answering cry from the Florentines. -But, mark you, the admiral was a steady -man, not to be provoked by a wild young -captain such as I was then. He raised his -cap to me and shouted back, smiling, ‘Viva -San Giorgione!’ with the greatest politeness. -It was the last thing I expected, and disconcerted -me much. I have often admired -the coolness and restraint of the Florentine -admiral who would not allow himself to be -moved by a piece of boyish insolence. After -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_32" id="Page_32">[Pg 32]</a></span>all, there was no outbreak of war between -the two governments; but there might have -been if the Florentine admiral had not been -so wise and master of himself.”</p> - -<p>Don Felipe had never seen Diego and his -father together before, and Diego’s affectionate -familiarity with the Admiral impressed -Don Felipe deeply. His first feeling toward -the Admiral had been one of awe, for there -was a dignity and majesty in his bearing that -struck all who saw him. But also there -was a gentle unbending and sympathy with -youth. Don Felipe soon felt no more afraid -of the Admiral than did Diego, and when -the Admiral stopped and gazed out toward -the ocean, leaning an arm upon the shoulder -of each of the youths, Don Felipe felt his -heart swell with gratification and affection.</p> - -<p>Don Felipe asked the Admiral many questions, -to which he responded and told them -things of the deepest interest.</p> - -<p>The monastery of La Rabida closed its -gates at half-past eight o’clock, and a few -minutes before the closing the Admiral and -Diego and Don Felipe walked under the gray -archway. The two lads went immediately -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_33" id="Page_33">[Pg 33]</a></span>to the small, bare room which they shared -together, and each was soon in his hard little -bed. But neither could sleep. Both were -excited by the thought of their coming -journey; and Don Felipe was eager to see his -mother, Doņa Christina, and his young -sister, Doņa Luisita.</p> - -<p>“Is the castle of Langara very grand?” -asked Diego, in a whisper.</p> - -<p>“Not very,” answered Don Felipe, who -was too sensible to boast of the splendors to -which he was accustomed. “But I love to -be there, because the life is very quiet and -pleasant. My sister Luisita and I spent -all our childhood there. I long to see my -sister—the sweetest sister in the world. She -is not kept so close with her governess as -most girls, and we are much together when I -am at home. Oh, you will like Luisita!”</p> - -<p>Diego said nothing. Don Felipe was his -comrade; but he realized that Don Felipe’s -sister was a young lady of high rank, and he -felt a natural delicacy in speaking of her.</p> - -<p>“Fray Piņa is to go with us,” Diego whispered, -after a while, in a slightly complaining -whisper.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_34" id="Page_34">[Pg 34]</a></span></p> -<p>“Then we shall have to work at our books,” -promptly whispered back Don Felipe. “All -that I fear is that the siege of Granada may -be over before we get there.”</p> - -<p>Next morning preparations were begun for -the journey to the castle of Langara, in the -Sierra Nevada Mountains, and later, to Granada. -On the following morning, in the cool, -sweet October dawn, the cavalcade set forth. -First rode the Admiral and Fray Piņa, with -the good Prior, Juan Perez, who was to ride -one stage of the journey with them. All -were mounted on the steady and sure-footed -mules which were ordinarily used for traveling. -Diego and Don Felipe were also on -mule-back.</p> - -<p>Soon the sea was left behind, and the party -began to mount the foothills. They traveled -steadily, and did not draw rein, except to -breathe the mules, until nearly eleven o’clock. -Then, in a glade a little way off from the highroad, -they stopped for rest and their midday -meal. When it was over, their elders talked -gravely together before the Prior returned to -La Rabida.</p> - -<p>Diego and Don Felipe were left to them<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_35" id="Page_35">[Pg 35]</a></span>selves. -They had no notion of resting -quietly, and wandered about the forest, their -arms entwined, putting into words their -splendid dreams of adventure, which they -were careful not to let their elders overhear. -Don Felipe was talking of the prospect of -once more seeing his mother, Doņa Christina, -and his sister, Doņa Luisita.</p> - -<p>“How glad Luisita will be to see me again!” -he cried, a dozen times. “You see, Luisita -leads a very retired life; she has not so many -things to interest her as I have, and, although -I love her just as much as she loves me, I -think she is lonelier without me than I am -without her.”</p> - -<p>“I wonder,” said Diego, “if we will find -at the castle your cousin, Don Tomaso de -Gama, the daredevil knight of whom you -have so often told me? I should like to meet -him, you may depend upon it.”</p> - -<p>“I hope we shall,” cried Don Felipe. “He -is the finest knight in the world, and so gay -and handsome—oh, everybody likes Don -Tomaso!”</p> - -<p>Presently they were called to make their -respects to the Prior, who was returning to -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_36" id="Page_36">[Pg 36]</a></span>La Rabida; this they did with much politeness. -They loved the good Prior; but they -were glad they were not going back with him.</p> - -<p>At three o’clock they resumed their journey. -They traveled all the afternoon, the -road ever rising. At nightfall they stopped -at a humble inn, only frequented by the -poorest class of travelers; but there was -nothing better in the neighborhood. Diego -thought the supper the worst he had ever -tasted, the small, close rooms dark and dirty, -and he felt inclined to speak of these discomforts. -Everything at La Rabida was plain, -but clean and wholesome. But he noticed -that the Admiral and Fray Piņa made no -complaint, and Don Felipe, accustomed to -the splendors of a court and a castle, said no -word showing dissatisfaction; and Diego was -shamed into keeping silence.</p> - -<p>Next morning they resumed their journey. -It was but three days to Granada; but the -castle of Langara lay a long distance to the -northward, and it was a good four days’ -journey to reach it. The weather remained -beautifully clear, although the autumn -air grew sharp as they climbed farther -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_37" id="Page_37">[Pg 37]</a></span>into the mountains. Diego and Don Felipe -enjoyed every step they traveled, and when -they reached another bad inn, the second -night, were secretly delighted that there was -no room for them, so they had to sleep, -rolled in their cloaks and blankets, on a little -balcony open to the sky, with the quiet stars -shining down upon them.</p> - -<p>The third night the two lads again slept -out, this time in the courtyard of an inn. It -was expected that they would reach the -castle of Langara by six o’clock on the fourth -evening. They were now well into the Sierra -Nevada Mountains and were climbing a -rocky road which led to a plateau upon -which the castle stood. The trees were -quite leafless, and they could see at intervals -the great gray mass of the castle, which -seemed much nearer than it was by road, as -the highway ran around the base of the -plateau and was ever on the rise.</p> - -<p>The daylight was not quite gone, and a -crescent moon hung in the heavens, while a -rosy glow flooded the western sky, and a band -of gold on the horizon marked the departure -of the royal sun.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_38" id="Page_38">[Pg 38]</a></span></p> -<p>As the travelers rode steadily on they -heard upon the stony path ahead the clatter -of a horse’s iron-shod hoofs coming at a hard -gallop, and in a few minutes a cavalier came -into view and rode straight for the Admiral.</p> - -<p>“It is my cousin, Don Tomaso de Gama, -called by some the Daredevil Knight,” whispered -Don Felipe to Diego.</p> - -<p>The appearance of Don Tomaso was most -attractive to young eyes. He was extremely -handsome, with a sparkle in his eyes; his -horsemanship was superb, and his manner, in -speaking to the Admiral, graceful, though -somewhat more debonair than was usual with -those who addressed him.</p> - -<p>Don Tomaso, pulling up his horse, a powerful -chestnut, bowed politely to the Admiral, -and said:</p> - -<p>“I believe I am addressing Admiral Christobal -Colon. I come from the noble lady Doņa -Christina, who sends me in advance to say -that she is expecting with much eagerness -you and your party, and that the castle and -all that is in it are at your disposal. Oh! -Hulloa! Yonder is little Felipe! How are -you, lad?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_39" id="Page_39">[Pg 39]</a></span></p> -<p>The Admiral bowed and smiled, while Don -Felipe was secretly anxious for fear Don -Tomaso had not treated the Admiral with -the deference to which he was accustomed.</p> - -<p>Having been introduced to the rest of the -party, Don Tomaso rode beside the Admiral -and entered into conversation with him. -All, including Diego and Don Felipe, noticed -a marked change that came over Don Tomaso -as he conversed with the Admiral. The -somewhat saucy manner of the Daredevil -Knight grew every moment more respectful -and he finally brought a smile to the Admiral’s -grave face by frankly saying:</p> - -<p>“I do not wonder that you can treat with -kings and princes as an equal. You are -the first man I ever met of whom I was -really afraid—but I grew afraid of you before -you had spoken three times to me!”</p> - -<p>The party now entered a narrow road, leading -by many windings to the castle gates. -It was very dark and overhung with rocks -and trees and capable of being defended. -When they came out upon an open place in -front of the fortress-like castle and faced the -drawbridge, which was down, Don Tomaso -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_40" id="Page_40">[Pg 40]</a></span>took from his doublet a silver trumpet and -gave three ringing blasts upon it. A warder -on the tower of the main gateway replied -with a single loud trumpet-call.</p> - -<p>Lights were moving in the castle, and upon -the highest point of the parapet there were -figures faintly seen in the fast-falling darkness.</p> - -<p>“I see my mother and Luisita on the parapet!” -cried Don Felipe, seizing Diego’s arm.</p> - -<p>Once inside the gateway the party dismounted, -their tired mules were led away, -and they crossed on foot a splendid courtyard -with majestic piles of buildings all -around it. Diego had never seen anything -so fine in his life.</p> - -<p>They entered the castle by a low and heavy -archway with swinging lanterns overhead, -while servants carried torches on the tips of -long pikes.</p> - -<p>There, standing under the central lantern, -stood the Duchess de Langara y Gama. Diego’s -first impression of her was of a mingling of -dignity with kindness, grace with stateliness. -She was still beautiful, although no longer -young, and the resemblance of Don Felipe to -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_41" id="Page_41">[Pg 41]</a></span>her was marked. Her dress was of dark-blue -velvet, and her hair was adorned with -jewels. Next her stood Doņa Luisita, a -charming young girl of fourteen, the image -of Don Felipe, with soft dark eyes and a -skin like ivory. Over her rich black hair -was a thin white veil that fell to the edge -of her white gown. As Doņa Luisita stood -under the mellow light of lanterns and -torches, her white gown and flowing veil -showing against the dark background, her -hands clasped as she gazed toward Don -Felipe, she seemed to Diego like an angel, -all whiteness and purity. Don Felipe, standing -next to Diego, held his arms out wide -to his sister. The two could scarcely keep -apart while their elders made ceremonious -greetings.</p> - -<p>“Welcome,” said Doņa Christina to the Admiral, -adding the picturesque Spanish phrase: -“My house and all that is in it are yours.”</p> - -<p>The Admiral bowed profoundly and kissed -Doņa Christina’s hand and that of Doņa -Luisita, who was introduced to him. Then -Don Felipe advanced and was folded in the -arms of his mother and sister. The rest of -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_42" id="Page_42">[Pg 42]</a></span>the party were introduced, Don Felipe saying, -as the Admiral presented Diego:</p> - -<p>“This is my good friend and comrade, -Diego.”</p> - -<p>Nothing could exceed the kindness of Doņa -Christina’s manner to Diego; and Doņa -Luisita made him a low bow in return for -his.</p> - -<p>Doņa Christina, turning to the Admiral, -said:</p> - -<p>“My son is now the head of the house, and -must take his father’s place. He is inexperienced; -but, like me, he feels honored by -your presence under our roof. I know very -well the high esteem in which the Queen -holds you and wishes all to hold you.”</p> - -<p>The Admiral expressed his thanks, and -then, Doņa Christina leading the way, they -ascended a wide stone stair, and still another -stair, where the apartments for the Admiral -and Fray Piņa were prepared.</p> - -<p>“You are to sleep in the same room with -me,” whispered Don Felipe in Diego’s ear. -“I asked my mother to arrange it so.”</p> - -<p>After saying that supper would be served -as soon as the travelers were refreshed, Doņa -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_43" id="Page_43">[Pg 43]</a></span>Christina went to her own part of the castle. -Doņa Luisita had mysteriously disappeared. -Don Felipe threaded his way through many -halls and corridors, all very splendid, past -sumptuous chambers, until he came to a large -room with many small windows. It was -comfortably furnished, but without luxury.</p> - -<p>“This was my room always,” said Don -Felipe. “There is a room next it where I -studied, and my sister often studied there -with me. Below are my mother’s apartments -and my sister’s. It is surprising how -fast my sister is becoming a woman.”</p> - -<p>Diego said nothing of Doņa Luisita, rather -to Don Felipe’s surprise.</p> - -<p>As soon as the lads were washed and dressed, -after their long day’s travel, they were summoned -to supper. It was served in a splendid -hall, hung with armor and with tapestries. -The table was long, for the household was -large. At the head of the table sat Doņa -Christina, with the Admiral on her right and -Doņa Luisita on her left. Next Doņa Luisita -sat her governess, whose name, Seņora Julia -Enriquez, Don Felipe whispered to Diego. -She was very grave in manner and appear<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_44" id="Page_44">[Pg 44]</a></span>ance, -but not unhandsome. Don Felipe, -taking the seat of his dead father, was at -the foot of the table, and Fray Piņa was -placed on his right.</p> - -<p>The supper was sumptuous and ceremonious. -Doņa Christina was all kindness to the -Admiral, and her good sense and dignity were -displayed in her conversation.</p> - -<p>When supper was over Doņa Christina retired -to her apartment; and Don Felipe, after -seeing that all his guests were comfortable in -their rooms, went to his own, where he found -Diego.</p> - -<p>“I think,” said Diego, gravely, “that -Seņora Julia is the sternest and severest lady -I ever saw. She must be worse than Fray -Piņa.”</p> - -<p>Don Felipe laughed aloud at this.</p> - -<p>“Seņora Julia takes it out in looking stern. -She is the mildest creature on earth. My -mother says the only fault to be found -with her is that she is too easy, and, -especially, has ever let me torment her, -poor lady, and has returned it with kindness. -I will say, though, that I should not -have been so tormenting to her if I had -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_45" id="Page_45">[Pg 45]</a></span>not loved her and did not know that she -has loved me from a child. If she had told -my mother of some of my pranks—well, it -would have gone hard with me! Now I am -going to my mother, who has sent for me. Go -you with me to the library, where you will -find many books and manuscripts—for I -know that you love books almost as well as -adventure.”</p> - -<p>Don Felipe then took Diego to a library, -large for those days. It was lighted with -lamps hung from the ceiling.</p> - -<p>“Here,” said Don Felipe, handing Diego -a small manuscript volume of verse, “are the -works of your Italian poet, Petrarca. I -know you know Italian better than Spanish.”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” replied Diego, seizing the little -book. “Just as you know Spanish better -than Italian—because it is your native -tongue.”</p> - -<p>Don Felipe went off, leaving Diego in the -dim library. Diego looked about him in -delight. Never had he seen so many books -together in his life.</p> - -<p>He began to read the volume of poems -and grew so absorbed that he did not hear -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_46" id="Page_46">[Pg 46]</a></span>Don Felipe open the door, and only knew of -his presence when Don Felipe, slapping him -on the shoulder, cried:</p> - -<p>“Come out of the clouds, Diego! My -mother wishes to speak with you. She has -something to tell us both.”</p> - -<p>Diego went willingly enough. In a small, -high-ceiled room close by was Doņa Christina -with Doņa Luisita and Seņora Julia.</p> - -<p>“I hope you will be happy while you are -here,” said Doņa Christina to Diego. “I -have talked with the Admiral, your father, -and he tells me that he must depart to-morrow -to seek the King and the Queen at Santa Fé. -After considering it, as I shall not be obliged -to attend the Queen for a month, the Admiral -and I have agreed that it is better for you -and Don Felipe to remain here with me during -that month. Then we can travel to -Santa Fé together.”</p> - -<p>The first sensation of Diego and Don -Felipe was one of disappointment; their -dream was to see the fall of the city of Granada. -Doņa Christina, however, unconsciously -reconciled them to this delay by adding:</p> - -<p>“All the information we have from Gra<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_47" id="Page_47">[Pg 47]</a></span>nada -shows that the city can scarcely be -finally reduced before December, and during -that long time both of you will be better -off here than at Santa Fé.”</p> - -<p>It was not so bad after all—that was the -unspoken thought in the minds of Diego and -Don Felipe, and the meaning of the exchange -of glances.</p> - -<p>Doņa Christina talked to Diego, telling -him many interesting things concerning the -castle, and was pleased with his admiration -of the library. Then she rose, saying:</p> - -<p>“I have many matters to attend to even at this -hour, and I will leave you with Seņora Julia.”</p> - -<p>As soon as Doņa Christina left the room -Seņora Julia sustained the reputation Don -Felipe had given her. Don Felipe inquired -concerning a certain old gentleman in the -neighborhood who was supposed to admire -Seņora Julia very much. The poor lady was -deeply embarrassed, and Doņa Luisita came -to the rescue by saying:</p> - -<p>“Do not mind my brother, dear Seņora -Julia. He only says such things because -they make you blush. Do not pay the least -attention to him.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_48" id="Page_48">[Pg 48]</a></span></p> - -<p>In spite of her ferocious appearance, Seņora -Julia proved no restraint on the three young -people, who laughed and talked merrily together, -Seņora Julia joining with them. Diego -had never before been thrown with a girl of -Doņa Luisita’s rank, and he was surprised -and charmed at her gentle and unassuming -manner. She was full of curiosity about the -great voyage the Admiral wished to take, -and was well informed on the geography of -the world as it was then known. Several -times Seņora Julia said it was time for her -to take Doņa Luisita to her apartment; but -every time Don Felipe, with much impudence -but great affection, held her by force and -would not let her rise from her chair. At -last Seņora Julia said, in consternation:</p> - -<p>“This is the hour that Doņa Christina always -comes to this room to say good night -to Doņa Luisita.”</p> - -<p>This was enough. Don Felipe and Diego -scampered off as fast as they could run to -their own room.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_49" id="Page_49">[Pg 49]</a></span></p> - -<h2 class="no-break">III<br /> -<small><small>THE CASTLE OF LANGARA</small></small></h2></div> - -<p class="no-indent"><span class="dropcap">T</span>HE Admiral was to start early in the -morning, and Diego and Don Felipe -earnestly hoped that Fray Piņa would accompany -him. But to their secret chagrin they -found that Fray Piņa was to remain at the -castle with them. They knew very well the -meaning of this—hard study during many -hours of the day, while the woods and mountains -called to them to be explored, while the -fish in the streams remained unmolested. -There would be little hunting or fishing, and -not much time to spend over the books of -poetry and romance in the library. In addition, -Don Tomaso de Gama was to travel -with the Admiral to Santa Fé, from whence -he had only been absent a short time. Both -youths bitterly regretted his departure, and -that they would not have the delight of -listening to his tales of adventure, his merry -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_50" id="Page_50">[Pg 50]</a></span>songs, nor enjoy his gallant and dashing -manners and company.</p> - -<p>By daybreak Diego and Don Felipe were -up and dressed. Already, below in the courtyard, -they could hear the tramping of the -travelers’ mules. Diego went to the Admiral’s -room, and with him descended to the -courtyard. Early as it was, Doņa Christina -was present to say farewell to her guests. -The Admiral thanked her with his usual grave -courtesy for her hospitality and, especially, -her kindness in asking Diego to remain and -share Don Felipe’s studies with Fray Piņa. -Don Tomaso, his foot in his stirrup, cried:</p> - -<p>“What a happy time you will have, Diego -and Don Felipe—no distractions from study—history, -geography, astronomy, and mathematics -in the morning, and mathematics, -astronomy, geography, and history in the -afternoon! Now, at Santa Fé, I shall have -a very hard time—watching the besieged city -of Granada, making sorties against the gates, -living in a tent, jousting with other knights -by way of pastime, riding in the tilt-yard—all -the hardships and the pleasures of a soldier’s -life.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_51" id="Page_51">[Pg 51]</a></span></p> - -<p>Don Tomaso, laughing at the long faces -of Diego and Don Felipe, flung himself joyously -on his horse. The Admiral kissed and -blessed both of the youths, and said, by way -of consolation:</p> - -<p>“All will not be over at Granada in one -short month.”</p> - -<p>Then the cavalcade rode off. Diego and -Don Felipe were in terror for fear Fray -Piņa would call them to their studies at once; -but even the stern instructor had a little -mercy on them for two days, in which they -were quite free.</p> - -<p>The two lads started out on foot in the clear -October sunrise to climb the near-by mountains, -to ford the streams, to enjoy themselves -in that expenditure of energy which is -the glorious patrimony of youth. Don Felipe -had to show all of his haunts to Diego, and -together the two boys climbed and walked -and slid down steep places and waded mountain -streams, with the utmost enjoyment to -themselves. Both knew something about -plants, thanks to Fray Piņa, and they were -surprised and delighted to find some beautiful -pink orchids having their second bloom<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_52" id="Page_52">[Pg 52]</a></span>ing -of the year. Diego gathered them, roots -and all, carefully, with much earth, saying:</p> - -<p>“These will I take to Doņa Christina.”</p> - -<p>“And I will take some to my sister, for her -garden. You should see Luisita’s garden. -She loves it well.”</p> - -<p>They did not return to the castle until -near sunset, and were tired, hungry, and dirty, -but very happy. Don Felipe led the way to -the back of the castle, where, sheltered from -the north by high stone walls, was a warm -spot, in which a formal little Italian garden -was laid out. Here was Doņa Christina with -Doņa Luisita and Seņora Julia. Luisita ran -forward to greet them and at once noticed -the plants Diego was so carefully carrying.</p> - -<p>“I never saw that flower bloom in the -autumn!” she cried.</p> - -<p>Diego had the readiness to offer her some -at once, saying:</p> - -<p>“The rest are for the noble lady, Doņa -Christina.”</p> - -<p>Then he won for himself the undying -esteem of Seņora Julia by presenting her with -one of the plants.</p> - -<p>Doņa Christina, who was very observant, -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_53" id="Page_53">[Pg 53]</a></span>thought well of Diego for remembering the -old governess, and as the three young people -were busily planting the flowers, she said to -Seņora Julia:</p> - -<p>“The youth Diego is well mannered. He -knows how to behave to his elders.”</p> - -<p>“Truly he is,” replied Seņora Julia. “No -youth can be called well mannered who does -not observe politeness to the old and the -obscure.”</p> - -<p>Soon it was time for supper; and Diego and -Don Felipe, washed and dressed and combed, -were ready for it. The meal was not splendid -and ceremonious as the night before, -only the family being present, except Diego -and Fray Piņa; but Diego thought it one -of the pleasantest hours he had ever passed. -Family life was unknown to him; the recollection -of his mother, of his early childhood -in Lisbon, of the modest home in which the -great Admiral toiled to support his wife and -child, and to assist from his narrow means -his venerable father, and to help in the education -of his younger brothers, was, to Diego, -like a faint and far-off dream. He had known -many phases and vicissitudes of life in his -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_54" id="Page_54">[Pg 54]</a></span>short span of years, and had not been unhappy -on the whole. But this sweet domestic -life, the society of ladies at meals, the gentle -restraint of their presence, was wholly new -and delightful to him. The conversation -was chiefly in the hands of Doņa Christina, -Seņora Julia, Fray Piņa, and the chaplain, -with two or three other persons, officers of -the great household maintained by the family -of de Langara y Gama. Occasionally Doņa -Christina referred courteously to Diego or -Don Felipe; but they were for the most part -quiet listeners to the intelligent conversation -of their elders, Doņa Luisita too, being attentive -to all that was said.</p> - -<p>After supper Diego and Don Felipe had a -delicious hour in the library, Diego reading -with Don Felipe his newly found treasure, -the poems of Petrarca. Don Felipe was glad -to improve his Italian by this reading, but -laughed at Diego for being so passionately -fond of the sonnets.</p> - -<p>Then came an hour most delightful of all -to Diego, motherless and homeless as he had -long been. Don Felipe and he were summoned -to the room of Doņa Christina. There, -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_55" id="Page_55">[Pg 55]</a></span>every night, it was Doņa Christina’s practice -to spend an hour with her children, and Diego -was included with the utmost kindness in -this little family circle. Doņa Christina’s -kind heart was touched at the thought of -Diego’s lack of home life and home affection; -Fray Piņa had given her an excellent impression -of the boy, and with the generosity -of a warm heart Doņa Christina wished to -make Diego happy and good, as she desired -to make her own children. She therefore -treated him as a son, and Diego responded -with the depth of gratitude and affection of -a strong nature.</p> - -<p>Doņa Christina encouraged the lads to -talk freely of their hopes and plans, Doņa -Luisita listening intently. Diego did not -lose Doņa Christina’s respect by his high -anticipations, his firm confidence that his -father was about to make the greatest discoveries -the world has ever known.</p> - -<p>“I have but one thing of which to be -proud,” said Diego, frankly, to Doņa Christina; -“that is my father. I am not of great -family like Don Felipe. I am the son of a -poor man. I am not old enough to have -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_56" id="Page_56">[Pg 56]</a></span>done anything on my own account. But -when I think of my father—his courage, his -perseverance during nearly eighteen years, of -his knowledge—for Fray Piņa says my father -is the ablest mathematician in Spain—of the -way my father commands the respect of all, -from the great Queen Isabella down to -Brother Lawrence, the servant—my heart -swells so with pride my breast can hardly -hold it.”</p> - -<p>“That is the right kind of pride,” quietly -responded Doņa Christina. “I know what -the great Queen thinks of the Admiral, your -honored father. I was proud to have a man -of so much learning, courage, and virtue -under my roof.”</p> - -<p>Then began for Diego a time of new and -unusual happiness, for it was more than mere -pleasure. He was very sanguine, as the -young must be, of the success of his father -at court. King Ferdinand and Queen Isabella -had promised that as soon as the fearful -struggle with the Moors was over they -would redeem the promise they had made -and provide the Admiral with the vessels and -men he had asked for his voyage—a force so -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_57" id="Page_57">[Pg 57]</a></span>pitifully small for an enterprise so great that -it staggered the imagination. And already -it was known that the city of Granada was -unable to hold out longer than the first of -the year. Diego and Don Felipe gloried in -the prospect of seeing the great military -pageants that would mark the fall of the -Moorish power in Spain; and Diego was -enough of a Spaniard to feel a patriotic pride -in the thought of driving the foreign invaders -from the soil of Spain. So they had -splendid dreams of what they would see at -Santa Fé, the city built in a day, as it were, -across the narrow valley from Granada and -commanding its main gates, and where the -armies of Castile and Arragon were encamped. -Meanwhile was a month of joy which was -not seriously impaired by the fact that the -two lads spent their mornings in hard study -under the iron rule of Fray Piņa. After -twelve o’clock they were free to explore the -mountains, to hunt, to follow the streams—all -the healthy pleasures of an outdoor life. -Their respect for Fray Piņa was increased by -the vast knowledge he had of plants and animals, -of sports and of the history of the region. -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_58" id="Page_58">[Pg 58]</a></span>Sometimes they rode, sometimes they walked, -always they enjoyed themselves. In the -evening, when they returned, after they had -made themselves presentable, they had the -pleasant family supper in the great hall. -Afterward they went to the library and read -for a while, and then Doņa Christina would -have them in her private room, where, with -Doņa Luisita and Seņora Julia, Fray Piņa and -the chaplain, they had a delightful hour of -conversation and reading. Often Doņa Christina -would ask Fray Piņa to read to them some -interesting book. Fray Piņa was well informed -on astronomy, and on clear nights -would give Diego and Don Felipe lessons in -the science of the stars. Doņa Luisita was -also a pupil in these lessons. Doņa Christina -and the chaplain became so interested -that they too would join the group, of whom -Doņa Luisita and Seņora Julia were a part, -on the highest point of the main tower -of the castle. There, in the sharp autumn -nights, they would assemble, warmly wrapped -in heavy riding cloaks, and listen to the mellow -voice of Fray Piņa explaining the mysteries -of the palpitating stars and the serene -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_59" id="Page_59">[Pg 59]</a></span>planets that made the dark-blue sky radiant. -Often in after life and among different scenes -the memory came back to Diego of those -hours spent on the tower by night, when -earth seemed far away and Doņa Luisita’s -eyes, so softly bright, shone like stars.</p> - -<p>When, at last, late in November, the day -of departure from the castle of Langara came -and Diego and Don Felipe were to take the -road to Granada, Diego was amazed to find -that he was sorry to leave. Doņa Christina -was going with them to begin her tour of -duty as lady-in-waiting to Queen Isabella. -Doņa Luisita was to remain at the castle for -the present in care of Seņora Julia and the -chaplain. On the last of their pleasant -evenings Doņa Luisita was very sad; and -when they took their last lesson in astronomy, -and were all together for the last time, tears -dropped from Doņa Luisita’s dark eyes. All -tried to comfort her, because it was not pleasant -to be left behind.</p> - -<p>“Never mind, Doņa Luisita,” said Diego, -“we will not forget you, Don Felipe and I, -and, if Doņa Christina will let us, we will -put a little line at the foot of her letters—and -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_60" id="Page_60">[Pg 60]</a></span>I will try and make you some pictures of -Granada, although I cannot draw and paint -as well as Don Felipe."</p> - -<p>Don Felipe, too, made many promises; and -Doņa Luisita submitted patiently, for Doņa -Christina, being a wise woman, was accustomed -to exact prompt and uncomplaining -obedience from both Doņa Luisita and Don -Felipe.</p> - -<p>On the cold, dark morning they rode away -Doņa Luisita showed a brave spirit and kept -back her tears with smiles. Doņa Christina -and two of her waiting women were to travel -on the sure-footed mules, as ladies did in -those times. Besides Fray Piņa and Diego -and Don Felipe, there went for protection, -six men armed with harquebuses and mounted, -and the chief steward and his assistant. These -last rode ahead to secure accommodations -for the party, as they would be four nights -upon the road.</p> - -<p>When the moment of farewell came in the -gray of the early morning, Diego felt strangely -sad. Doņa Luisita was clasped first in her -mother’s arms and then in Don Felipe’s. -Diego made bold to kiss her hand.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_61" id="Page_61">[Pg 61]</a></span></p> - -<p>As the party clattered across the drawbridge, -which was hauled up after them, and -watched the lowering of the flag on the keep, -signifying that the head of the house was -absent, Diego turned and gave a last look -at the spot in which he had been so happy.</p> - -<p>“You look as if you did not want to see the -fall of Granada,” said Don Felipe. “After all, -we shall have many more pleasant days together -at Langara.”</p> - -<p>“I hope so,” replied Diego, from the bottom -of his heart.</p> - -<p>Diego carried in the breast of his leathern -jacket a treasure which had been given him -by Doņa Christina as a souvenir of his happy -hours in the library of the castle. This was -the little manuscript volume of Petrarca, -which Diego had read for the first time with -so much delight at Langara.</p> - -<p>The party traveled on slowly but steadily. -After a while the dark morning brightened -and the sun shone gloriously.</p> - -<p>It is a privilege of youth to rally quickly -from sadness. So it was that after a while -Diego’s heart was light again, and he began -to enjoy already, in anticipation, a return -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_62" id="Page_62">[Pg 62]</a></span>some day to the castle. Don Felipe’s good -spirits were contagious. The two youths -were full of health, and of eager and ardent -soul, each with a good horse under him, and -traveling toward a scene of splendid adventures. -Diego surprised himself by bursting -into a song, with a refrain:</p> - -<div class="poem"> -<span class="i0">Merrily, merrily we go, my steed and I,<br /></span> -<span class="i0">Soon will we return,<br /></span> -<span class="i0">We will return, we will return!<br /></span> -</div> - -<p>At every stage of their journey they were -met with news of the impending triumph of -the Spanish arms. The country was ablaze -with patriotism. For nearly eight hundred -years the Moors had occupied Spanish territory, -had built great cities and fortresses, -and had maintained a great court at Granada, -in the magnificent palace of the Alhambra, -grander than that of the Spanish -sovereigns themselves. The Moors were aliens -and of another race; they had a different -civilization, Oriental in character and totally -unlike the Christian civilization. Never, during -all these eight hundred years, had there -been peace in Spain; nor would there ever be -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_63" id="Page_63">[Pg 63]</a></span>peace until the foreign invaders were driven -out. Gradually they had been hemmed in, -their large cities taken, their fortresses forced -to surrender, until now, under Boabdil, a weak -and effeminate king, Granada alone remained -to them. This had been invested on every -side, no provisions had been carried to the -city and garrison for many months, and it -was only a question of a few weeks when it -must surrender. The Spanish sovereigns did -not intend to carry the city by assault, not -wishing to injure the women and children -or to endanger the city by fire, but to reduce -it by steady and incessant attacks. That -hour was near at hand.</p> - -<p>The Castilian army had borne its share in -the campaign and siege, and its Queen, Isabella -of Castile, who had administered the -civil government of Arragon as well as Castile -while King Ferdinand was in the field, was to -join him at Granada.</p> - -<p>The party from the castle of Langara reached -the neighborhood of Santa Fé early in the -morning of the day Queen Isabella was to -arrive, and thus were to witness the meeting -between the Queen of Castile and the King -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_64" id="Page_64">[Pg 64]</a></span>of Arragon; for, although they were husband -and wife, they were independent sovereigns, -and met first as such.</p> - -<p>Early in the bright November morning, -upon the last stage of their journey, the party -from the castle was met by the Admiral -coming from Santa Fé to greet them. They -met in the narrow pass of Pinos, about six -miles from Santa Fé. Already the highway -was crowded with the advance-guard of Queen -Isabella’s party, together with the great concourse -which always flocks toward the scene -of coming exciting events. The Admiral was -accompanied by Don Tomaso de Gama and -Alonzo de Quintanilla, an accountant to -Queen Isabella, and who was the steady friend -of the Admiral. As soon as they met Doņa -Christina they all dismounted and respectfully -greeted her. Then the Admiral embraced -Diego; and when greetings with all -were exchanged they set forward briskly. -Doņa Christina wished to reach Santa Fé -and put on the splendid attire of a court lady, -in which to greet her Queen. Don Tomaso, -too, must return quickly, as well as Alonzo -de Quintanilla. The Admiral decided to -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_65" id="Page_65">[Pg 65]</a></span>return with them, so that Diego and Don -Felipe, with Fray Piņa alone, standing on a -rocky height directly overlooking the road, -witnessed the splendid pageant of the meeting -of the sovereigns. The multitude of persons -was very great and of all sorts, from -peasants to great nobles with their long trains -of attendants. None suspected that the fair-haired -and blue-eyed youth standing by the -grave young ecclesiastic was the son of the -man most talked of in Spain at that moment, -for the whole country was awake and alive -to the projects of the Admiral, who was -derided by some, denounced by others, strongly -supported by a few, and eagerly discussed -by all. Nor was it known that the slim, -handsome, black-eyed lad was one of the first -grandees of Spain, inheritor of a great dukedom -with all its wealth, honors, and responsibilities.</p> - -<p>On every hand the sights and sounds were -enchanting to Diego and Don Felipe. Before -them rose the splendid walled city of Granada, -the Moorish flag with its silver crescent -floating from the highest point of the citadel. -The gilded domes and minarets of the doomed -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_66" id="Page_66">[Pg 66]</a></span>city glittered in the noonday light. On one -side the ground fell away abruptly into a -long, narrow gorge, through which the little -river Xeni flowed, bridged in many places. -On the opposite heights the improvised city -of Santa Fé stretched away, grimly watchful -of the Moorish stronghold. Beyond that still -were the long lines of the encamped armies -of Castile and Arragon. All the troops were -under arms to greet the Queen. In a large -open space between the armies was a splendid -pavilion, of painted linen outside and luxuriously -equipped inside, which King Ferdinand -had caused to be prepared for his Queen. -Over it hung the Gonfalon, the gorgeous -banner of the two kingdoms, bearing on one -side the Castilian coat-of-arms and on the -other that of Arragon. From this camp first -came a vast cavalcade of royal princes, -nobles, knights, and soldiers, halberdiers and -harquebusiers to meet the Queen and her -party. Among them rode a number of ladies, -of whom Doņa Christina was one.</p> - -<p>As the procession wound its way over the -plain toward the narrow road that led from -the plateau into the lower country, music -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_67" id="Page_67">[Pg 67]</a></span>rang out, flags and banners fluttered gaily, -and the armored knights seemed clad in -gold, as the sunlight gleamed upon their -coats of chain mail. First came a band of -musicians playing the national hymns, followed -by the trumpeters with their silver -trumpets. Then came the heralds in their -gorgeously embroidered coats, followed by a -group of the chief officers of state and the -highest nobles in Spain, all superbly mounted. -Next came the ecclesiastics, headed by the -great Cardinal Pedro Gonzalez de Mendoza, -afterward the firm friend of the Admiral. -In an open space, surrounded by the princes -of his house, rode King Ferdinand, a man of -splendid appearance, a soldier as well as a -statesman. He rode a magnificent charger -and was all smiles, bowing to the applause -of the thousands of spectators. After him -rode Prince Juan, who, to Diego and Don -Felipe, was so far the most interesting person -who had yet appeared. He was about -their own age, extremely handsome, with -an expression the most winning, a true -son of his mother, the great Queen Isabella. -Diego thought it would not be hard -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_68" id="Page_68">[Pg 68]</a></span>to serve so gallant and so gentle a young -man.</p> - -<p>Behind them came a guard of honor, consisting -of the foremost knights in Spain. -Toward the end rode three young knights -abreast who deeply interested Diego. The -first was his friend, Don Tomaso de Gama, -looking every inch a knight. On one side -rode a dark young man, not handsome, but -with a soldier’s eye. This was Gonzalez de -Cordova, afterward the celebrated general -who won deathless glory in Italy. On the -other side rode the most beautiful knight -Diego had ever seen. He looked the embodiment -of beauty, such as the Greek sculptors -gave to their young gods. It was Ponce de -Leon, later on to discover Porto Rico and -Florida in his search for the fabled Bimini—the -fountain of perpetual youth. It was -Don Felipe who gave Diego the names of -these and many others in the gorgeous -cavalcade.</p> - -<p>When the procession reached the edge of -the plateau it halted, the music was hushed, -and a deep silence of expectancy followed. -Presently, from the narrow gorge beneath, -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_69" id="Page_69">[Pg 69]</a></span>floated the sweet sound of the silver trumpets, -which was the signal of the Queen’s approach. -Instantly from the brazen throats of the -King’s trumpets came a joyous response. -Soon the head of the Queen’s procession came -into view. It was as splendid, though not -so large, as that of the King. The Queen, -after the fashion of the time, was mounted -on a mule, splendidly caparisoned. Queen -Isabella wore a superb riding costume of -black velvet with a hat and feathers, and -across her breast and on her slender arms -was a delicate gold chain armor, showing -that this great and noble Queen, this tender -wife and devoted mother, was also a warrior -and a sovereign. On her right, similarly -mounted, was the Princess Katharine, afterward -the noble and unfortunate wife of the -eighth Henry of England.</p> - -<p>When Queen Isabella reached the plateau -King Ferdinand spurred his charger forward, -but stopped when about twenty yards off and -dismounted, approaching his wife with deep -respect. Although devotedly attached to each -other, King Ferdinand and Queen Isabella -were yet independent sovereigns, and the -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_70" id="Page_70">[Pg 70]</a></span>great Queen was the last person in the world -to abate any of the honors and dignity due -to her country and herself as its Queen.</p> - -<p>Prince Juan and every one else dismounted.</p> - -<p>The King, first taking off his plumed helmet -and sweeping the ground with it, bowed -low to his wife. Queen Isabella, who had -also dismounted, removing her hat from her -head, revealed her beautiful chestnut hair, -coifed with jewels, and returned the King’s -bow ceremoniously. Then walking toward -each other, they met, and the King kissed -the Queen formally on the cheek, as one -sovereign kisses another on meeting. When -that was over, however, the King and Queen -embraced and kissed heartily as husband and -wife. Prince Juan, after ceremoniously saluting -his mother, was also kissed and embraced. -The young Princess Katharine was -then clasped in the arms of her father and -her brother.</p> - -<p>Then, again remounting, the two processions -united and took their way toward Santa Fé. -The loud acclaims increased as the joint armies -of Castile and Arragon beheld the Queen -whom they both adored; and, long after the -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_71" id="Page_71">[Pg 71]</a></span>procession had become a mere moving speck -in the distance, the far-off sound of cheers -and of swords drawn and driven back to their -scabbards still floated across the little plain.</p> - -<p>The sight of Ferdinand in all his splendor -impressed Diego deeply; but when his -young eyes fell upon Queen Isabella a feeling -of reverence stole into his heart which could -only be compared with what he felt for his -father. Here was a woman, a Queen, a -saint, a gentlewoman, the soul of courtesy, -the model of integrity, proud where she should -be proud, meek where she should be meek, -nobly ambitious for her country, the mother -of her people, ready to lead her soldiers in -battle like a king, and then kneeling by them -and binding up their wounds as would a -mother—Diego’s mind was lofty enough to -render full tribute to this Queen, one of the -most glorious women who ever lived.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_72" id="Page_72">[Pg 72]</a></span></p> - -<h2 class="no-break">IV<br /> -<small><small>THE LAST SIGH OF THE MOOR</small></small></h2></div> - -<p class="no-indent"><span class="dropcap">T</span>HE short November afternoon was melting -into twilight when Diego and Don -Felipe, with Fray Piņa, took their way on -horseback across the plateau to the town of -Santa Fé. The plain was still thronged with -persons going homeward after the great -spectacle of the day, and with those who -dwelt in Santa Fé or were encamped outside.</p> - -<p>The Admiral had engaged lodgings for the -party in a tall, old house, one of those in the -original small town where he himself lodged. -It was in a crooked and retired street, but -Diego and Don Felipe were delighted to find -that one window of the room which they -shared together, under the roof, looked toward -the plain upon which were encamped the -armies of Castile and Arragon, while another -gave a view of the deep and narrow valley -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_73" id="Page_73">[Pg 73]</a></span>that lay between Santa Fé and the beleaguered -city of Granada. Directly before them lay -the “Gate of Justice,” one of the main gates -of the city, and from its towers they could -hear, in the clear November air, the shrill -cry of the muezzin, the Moslem call to prayer. -“Prayer is better than sleep—than sleep—than -sleep.”</p> - -<p>After the traveler’s supper, at which were -present the Admiral and his friend, Alonzo -de Quintanilla, Diego and Don Felipe were -willing enough to go to their room. They -felt as if they were living under a spell of -enchantment. The splendid personages they -had seen, the great events of which they were -to be spectators, the pomp and glory of war, -impressed their young imaginations powerfully. -Although tired with their long day -of travel and excitement, they could not -sleep. So an hour passed. They rose at -last, and, as they were gazing out of the window -toward the camp, at ten o’clock they -noticed in the middle of the camp, lying a -mile away, a great mass of flame shoot skyward. -Instantly the camp was roused, and -there was a great commotion in the town. -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_74" id="Page_74">[Pg 74]</a></span>De Quintanilla ran out of the house and, -mounting his horse, still standing at the door, -galloped away toward the camp. The fire, -though violent, soon burned itself out, and -in an hour De Quintanilla returned with the -news that the beautiful tents erected by the -King for Queen Isabella, the Princess Katharine, -and their suites, had mysteriously caught -fire while the Queen was at prayer in the tent -arranged as a chapel. She had made an almost -miraculous escape, and by her courage -and presence of mind not a life had been lost, -although the splendid row of tents, hung with -rich brocades and gorgeously furnished, were -only a heap of ashes.</p> - -<p>“The Queen,” said De Quintanilla, to the -listening group, “showed as ever the spirit -of ten men-at-arms, being composed and even -smiling, and saying that the humblest tent -in the army is enough to shelter her, for she -is a soldier like the rest of the army.”</p> - -<p>The next morning Diego and Don Felipe -were not surprised when Fray Piņa began at -once the same routine that had been followed -at La Rabida and at the castle of Langara. -It was irksome to them and tantalizing to be -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_75" id="Page_75">[Pg 75]</a></span>held down to books and studies in their narrow -little room, while living in the midst of -a great camp with all its charms and fascinations -for brave and imaginative boys. But -they knew too much to appeal against it, -for Fray Piņa’s stern rule was upheld by the -Admiral and by Doņa Christina. Still they -enjoyed their new life and felt as if they were -living every minute of it.</p> - -<p>The arrival of Queen Isabella had put new -vigor into everything. The armies were impatient -to take the city of Granada by storm; -but King Ferdinand, a capable soldier, would -not consider this. From spies and the Moorish -prisoners occasionally captured, both the -King and the Queen knew that there was utter -demoralization within the walls of Granada. -The weak and effeminate spirit of the Moorish -King, Boabdil, would not listen to the -counsels of those who were willing to die with -honor in an attempt to break out of the city. -His eldest son, a boy of seven, had been captured -by the Spaniards when an effort was -made secretly to transport the child to the -coast. This had broken the heart of Boabdil. -He had no idea of civilized warfare, and would -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_76" id="Page_76">[Pg 76]</a></span>not believe the messages sent him that the -boy was well cared for, and Queen Isabella -charged herself with his welfare. The word -“Kismet”—“It is fate,” paralyzed King -Boabdil. He waited where his ancestors -had fought boldly and had taken desperate -chances with unshaken courage.</p> - -<p>Although there was still hard fighting to -be done, the presence of the Queen and her -ladies led to many splendid entertainments, -jousts, and tilts. Neither Diego nor Don -Felipe, nor any of their party, saw anything -of these brilliant gaieties. The Admiral -lived in retirement, except when he went to -attend men in power, whose understanding -and approval of his plans he wished to secure -before making his final appeal to the sovereigns -after the city should have fallen. He -soon found that, although King Ferdinand was -not averse to the enterprise, he was quite -willing to let the money for the expedition -come out of the coffers of Castile instead of -Arragon, and that the ships should be named -by Castilians. Alonzo de Quintanilla was a -hard-working accountant who went to his -daily labor early and remained late. In the -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_77" id="Page_77">[Pg 77]</a></span>evening he, and the Admiral, Fray Piņa, -and the two lads, supped together; their -talk was not of festivals, but of the chances -of the great voyage of the Admiral.</p> - -<p>Sometimes, however, the party was increased -by the presence of Luis de St. Angel, -also an accountant of the Queen, and Father -Diego de Deza, tutor to Prince Juan and one -of the most scientific men of the age. To -him, in later life, the Admiral bore tribute in -writing as one of the two men without whom -he could never have got the support of the -Court of Spain in his enterprise. The second -man so immortalized was Juan Perez.</p> - -<p>With the two ecclesiastics and Alonzo de -Quintanilla the Admiral held long conferences, -not only on scientific subjects, but on the best -method of urging his plan upon the King and -the Queen when the time should be ripe.</p> - -<p>It was plain to the quick intelligence of -Diego and Don Felipe that the two ecclesiastics, -both of them able mathematicians and -astronomers, frankly conceded the superiority -in mathematics and astronomy to the Admiral, -and their faith in his ideas was strengthened -continually by the evidences of his ex<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_78" id="Page_78">[Pg 78]</a></span>traordinary -attainments, as well as his great -natural powers and lofty and unsullied character.</p> - -<p>There were two others who sometimes -joined this circle of remarkable men. One -was Don Tomaso, who brought with him the -beautiful knight, Ponce de Leon. In spite -of his surpassing good looks, Ponce de Leon -was an intelligent man, and had, for his own -pleasure, studied navigation. He would talk -much with the Admiral and Fray Piņa, -studying maps and making astronomical calculations, -while the Daredevil Knight, twirling -his mustaches, clanking his sword, and -rattling his great spurs, would charm Diego -and Don Felipe with stories of jousts at arms, -for the favor of the ladies, and splendid balls -at which those same ladies danced with gallant -gentlemen.</p> - -<p>Doņa Christina was in attendance upon -Queen Isabella, who, with the King, lived in -the midst of the camp in tents almost as splendid -as those which had been destroyed by -fire the first night of the Queen’s arrival. It -was arranged that Don Felipe should visit -his mother once a week; and the first visit -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_79" id="Page_79">[Pg 79]</a></span>he paid Doņa Christina he asked permission -to bring Diego, which was granted. This -gave Diego great joy. Not only did he wish -to see the kind and gentle Doņa Christina, -but he longed ardently to see the splendid -encampment, and the great Queen, for -whom he had a reverence and affection -dating back to the days of his first visit to -La Rabida, and to whom he looked as the -one person who would open the way of glory -to his father.</p> - -<p>On the appointed day the two youths, with -Fray Piņa, set out on foot for the camp. -They were both dressed alike, suitably, but -with much simplicity. As the two started off -from the door of their lodgings Diego looked -back, and a sudden pang went to his heart. -His father, who stood watching him, was -shabbily dressed, although with that extraordinary -neatness which always distinguished -him. It suddenly came home to Diego the -patient sacrifices made for him by his father, -and a passionate desire welled up in his heart -that some day he might repay that father, -so noble in every way, and yet with the -tenderness of a woman. But more cheerful -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_80" id="Page_80">[Pg 80]</a></span>thoughts filled Diego’s ardent young mind -as he and Don Felipe, with Fray Piņa, passed -through the great encampment and finally -came to the tents occupied by the Queen -and her ladies. Doņa Christina received -them with the greatest kindness, making -courteous inquiries of the Admiral and expressing -much satisfaction when Fray Piņa -told her of the good conduct of Don Felipe -and Diego.</p> - -<p>“You shall be rewarded,” said Doņa Christina. -“In an hour the Queen sets forth to -review the Castilian troops, and, if Fray Piņa -will permit, you may both see that splendid -sight.”</p> - -<p>The heart of Diego leaped with joy, and he -and Don Felipe exchanged delighted glances.</p> - -<p>It was not Doņa Christina’s duty to attend -the Queen that day. When the blowing of -the silver trumpets in the clear December -noon announced that the Queen was about -to issue from her tent, Fray Piņa and the -two lads went out and stood at a respectful -distance watching the splendid sight. The -Queen’s charger, a superb war horse, was led -out, and a brilliant array of knights and the -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_81" id="Page_81">[Pg 81]</a></span>gorgeous body-guard awaited her. Queen Isabella -issued from her tent escorted by her -ladies. She wore a handsome but simple -riding costume and the same light but beautiful -corselet and arm-pieces of glittering chain -mail. On her delicate, fair head was a small -and resplendent casque with purple plumes. -She was that day the sovereign and the soldier. -As she caught sight of Fray Piņa -she bowed to him courteously and spoke a -word to Doņa Christina, who beckoned to -Fray Piņa and the two youths. Diego could -have shouted for joy when he found himself -approaching the Queen. She spoke first to -Fray Piņa, and then to Don Felipe, saying:</p> - -<p>“I am pleased to hear, Don Felipe, that your -conduct is good and that you have learned -how to obey, which is a necessary thing -for all who wish to live creditably in the -world.”</p> - -<p>Then, turning to Diego, she said, sweetly:</p> - -<p>“And this is Diego, the son of the great -captain whom I esteem highly. I remember -this youth as a little lad when first his father -came to me at Cordova seven years ago.”</p> - -<p>Then the remembrance of Diego falling -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_82" id="Page_82">[Pg 82]</a></span>asleep on the steps of the dais came to the -Queen, and she smiled, saying:</p> - -<p>“You were but a little lad then, and fell -asleep with your head upon my knee. All -youths of your age are dear to me, for in -them I see the hope of Spain.”</p> - -<p>With that the great Queen bowed in dismissal, -and, mounting, showed perfect horsemanship -as she put her horse to the gallop -and rode off, followed by her retinue.</p> - -<p>The two boys, with Fray Piņa, scampered -through the camp and were able to reach a -point where they had a full view of the Castilian -troops drawn up in splendid order upon -the open plain. The Queen’s appearance -was greeted with thundering cheers, with the -clash of lances in the bright air, the joyous -rattling of swords in their scabbards and -salvos of artillery, and the playing of the -national hymn. Queen Isabella rode up and -down the ranks inspecting everything with -a keen eye and sharp judgment, questioning -the officers with the knowledge of a king as -well as of a queen. When the inspection was -over, the troops marched past, saluting their -sovereign; and the Queen, with the great -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_83" id="Page_83">[Pg 83]</a></span>standard of Castile held above her, gracefully -acknowledged every salute. The march-past -over, the Queen then visited the sick quarters -of the camp, going through the hospital -tents, cheering and encouraging the poor -inmates. When this was over and the Queen, -with her retinue, returned to the royal tents, -it was late in the afternoon. Fray Piņa and -the two lads were already in Doņa Christina’s -tent to see the Queen dismount. Doņa -Christina, within the tent, opened the door. -She held by the hand a little black-eyed, dark-skinned, -sad-looking boy about the age of -little Fernando.</p> - -<p>“This,” she said, to Fray Piņa, in Spanish, -which the child did not understand, “is the -son of King Boabdil, held as a hostage. Every -day the Queen has the little boy brought to -her, or visits him privately to show him some -kindness. To-day she will come into this -tent to speak to him.”</p> - -<p>In another minute the Queen entered unceremoniously -from the adjoining tent. The -little boy’s sad face brightened as he saw -her, and, letting go of Doņa Christina’s hand, -he went willingly to the Queen and respect<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_84" id="Page_84">[Pg 84]</a></span>fully -kissed her hand. The Queen, putting -her arm around his shoulder, gave him a -little toy, a horse, carved and painted, and -said to him a few words in the Moorish -tongue. The boy, silent and undemonstrative, -was yet not unfeeling, and his face -showed a faint pleasure.</p> - -<p>The Queen then entered into a short conversation -with Fray Piņa. She was fond of -the society of learned men, and always treated -them with much respect. Fray Piņa, with -quick art, brought in the name of the Admiral, -saying that Father de Deza and himself -profited much by the Admiral’s superior -scientific knowledge.</p> - -<p>“We are but postulants, madam,” he said, -“in mathematics and astronomy when compared -with the Genoese navigator. This -Father de Deza and I often say to each other.”</p> - -<p>The Queen looked fixedly at Fray Piņa, -showing herself impressed by such words -from such men. Then, in a few moments, -she left the tent, accompanied by Doņa Christina, -who still held the little prisoner by the -hand.</p> - -<p>Diego and Don Felipe then walked back -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_85" id="Page_85">[Pg 85]</a></span>through the sharp December afternoon to -their lodgings in the town. The brilliant -military spectacle they had seen made them -long for more of the same kind. They were -at the age when they chafed for action, not -realizing how little prepared they were for -it and that the stern rule under which they -lived was the best school for them. Still, so -strong was the pressure brought to bear upon -them by Fray Piņa and by the Admiral that -they did well at their studies.</p> - -<p>Meanwhile, they were not the only ones -whose patience was painfully tried. The -Admiral had the promise of the King and the -Queen that as soon as the struggle with the -Moors was over they would arrange for the -great voyage. It was only a question of -time now when the city of Granada must -surrender. The arrival of the Queen had -put new force into an attack already vigorous. -The Spaniards gave the Moors no rest -by day or night. First at one gate and then -at another, they made desperate assaults, -overwhelming the Moorish troops and driving -them back with terrible loss into the -city.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_86" id="Page_86">[Pg 86]</a></span></p> - -<p>The Admiral, hoping that his sublime projects -would immediately follow the fall of -Granada, was eager to make his arrangements -that he might begin his voyage early in the -summer. But at the moment when, after -eighteen years of desperate and determined -struggle, the dayspring of hope was at hand, -an unexpected difficulty arose. Fernando de -Talavera, Archbishop of Toledo, who was -destined to be the first Archbishop of Granada, -a man of honesty, but without enthusiasm, -who had heretofore befriended the -Admiral, strongly opposed the honors which -the Admiral claimed in the event of his success. -Diego and Don Felipe knew this, not -from the mouth of the Admiral, who scorned -to make any complaint, but from the conversation -of those around them. Diego saw -his father go forth every day to wait in the -anterooms of the great, who seemed to have -no time to listen to him. The events passing -before them were so brilliant and dazzling -that they put off the more stupendous thing, -the discovery of a new world. Every day, -in the evening, when the Admiral returned, -he showed unbroken patience; but Diego -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_87" id="Page_87">[Pg 87]</a></span>knew that no progress had been made. Once -he heard his father say to Fray Piņa:</p> - -<p>“I will wait here patiently until the fall -of the city. If then no one will listen to me, -I shall leave Spain, and another country shall -have the glory of my discoveries.”</p> - -<p>All through December the cordon was tightened -around the city, the loss inflicted on -the Moors greater, their sorties more desperate -and more disastrous. It was hoped that -by Christmas the standard of the Cross -would float over the great mosque in the -Alhambra; but still the city held out desperately. -On Christmas Day, however, an -adventure happened that thrilled Diego and -Don Felipe and all who saw it. On that day -the fighting had been unusually severe all -around the city of Granada, except on the -plateau of the Gate of Justice, which faced -Santa Fé. At midday, as the Admiral, with -Fray Piņa and Diego and Don Felipe, stood -at an open window watching the fighting, -they saw three carts, apparently loaded with -provisions, steal out of a small ravine close -to the Gate of Justice, and then trot rapidly -to the gate. The carts were evidently seen -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_88" id="Page_88">[Pg 88]</a></span>and their burdens noted, for the postern-gate -was instantly opened. The first cart -entered and became at once wedged in such -a manner that the gate could not be shut. -Suddenly a knight clad in a light and glittering -chain armor and mounted on a superb -black horse dashed up the acclivity, followed -by fifteen other knights, all picked men. The -Admiral and Fray Piņa recognized the leader, -the gallant Hernando Perez del Pulgar, a -cousin of the Prior, Juan Perez, and a man renowned -for his daring even among the fearless -and brilliant knights of Spain. He carried -on his lance-head a fluttering piece of linen; -and, dashing at the narrow opening, his horse -leaped over the cart, and was followed by -another knight, whom Diego and Don Felipe -saw was Don Tomaso de Gama. Fourteen -other knights rode into the gateway and disappeared.</p> - -<p>“What does it mean?” said Diego, turning -to Fray Piņa.</p> - -<p>“It means, I fear,” replied Fray Piņa, “that -those sixteen gallant gentlemen are lost to -Spain; they will never return.”</p> - -<p>“I think they will,” replied the Admiral. -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_89" id="Page_89">[Pg 89]</a></span>“Hernando Perez del Pulgar is a daring man, -but prudent withal. He has not entered the -Moorish city to be trapped along with his -companions; some of them will return.”</p> - -<p>As the Admiral spoke they saw the carts -push slowly through the gateway and become -strongly jammed with each other.</p> - -<p>“See,” said the Admiral, “the gate remains -open. There is a stratagem, you may depend.”</p> - -<p>By that time the word had sped from mouth -to mouth through the town of Santa Fé and -among the encamped soldiers of what was -going on, and, like the Admiral, all saw that -the postern-gate was purposely blocked and -kept open by the supposed food-carts. Thus -all eyes were fixed upon the open gateway, -visible in the bright noon. The King and -the Queen had been informed, and had come -from their tents, surrounded by the court, -to watch the exciting event happening before -their eyes. Ten minutes passed, ten minutes -of agonized tension and breathless anxiety, -and then the black charger of Del Pulgar -appeared before the open gate, and, making -a magnificent leap over the carts, which -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_90" id="Page_90">[Pg 90]</a></span>acted as a wedge in the gate, the knight -appeared shouting the battle-cry of Spain:</p> - -<p>“Santiago for Spain!”</p> - -<p>He still carried his lance; but the fluttering -piece of white linen was no longer there. -He dashed down the declivity, followed by -the fifteen knights, their numbers counted -by tens of thousands of anxious eyes. As -the last of the sixteen men leaped the cart a -great cry went up from the city and camps -of Santa Fé:</p> - -<p>“Santiago, Santiago for Spain!” burst from -the watching multitudes.</p> - -<p>Many of the women were weeping with -excitement and triumph. As the sixteen men -disappeared in the valley Don Felipe found -himself clasping Diego, both of them shouting -in their high, boyish voices:</p> - -<p>“Santiago, Santiago for Spain!”</p> - -<p>At that moment Alonzo de Quintanilla burst -into the room with the great news.</p> - -<p>“The brave knight, Del Pulgar,” he said, -“meaning to do honor to Christ on this -Christmas Day, had a Christian prayer painted -on a piece of linen to nail upon the doors of -the great mosque in Granada. He arranged -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_91" id="Page_91">[Pg 91]</a></span>a stratagem by which a gate of the city should -be open, and then, riding in with his companions, -he galloped up to the door of the -great mosque and nailed upon it with his -dagger the Christian prayer. The Moors -were so taken by surprise that they could -not stop him. Not one of the sixteen knights -received a scratch.”</p> - -<p>The eyes of the Admiral shone bright. He -loved deeds of valor, and the daring of the -young knights pleased him well.</p> - -<p>While the elders of the party were discussing -the splendid dash of Del Pulgar and -the possibilities of the siege, Diego, who was -standing at the open window, silently motioned -to Don Felipe to join him. They saw -a Moorish officer ride out from the Gate of -Justice and walk his horse up and down the -plateau of the Vega. He wore the heavy -turban, under which the Moors had a small -steel skull-cap, and he had on a breastplate -and his arm-pieces of solid armor. He carried -no lance or shield, but only a great -curved sword, such as the Moors used. His -horse was a milk-white Arabian with a long -and flowing mane and tail, dyed purple at -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_92" id="Page_92">[Pg 92]</a></span>the ends. From the horse’s tail floated, tied -with bands of red and yellow, the Spanish -colors, a piece of white linen. A cry of rage -and horror went up from the watching multitudes -of Santa Fé; it was the Christian prayer -that had been nailed to the door of the mosque -by Hernando Perez del Pulgar, and which the -Moorish warrior had torn down and was -dragging at his horse’s heels in full sight of -the Christian city and armies.</p> - -<p>The Admiral and Fray Piņa and Alonzo -de Quintanilla turned to the window and saw -what was happening. Great crowds were -already assembled, and the streets of Santa -Fé and the walls of Granada were black with -people. The Moorish warrior passed slowly -toward the edge of the valley, or rather -ravine, and, reining up his horse, dashed an -iron glove as far as he could throw it toward -Santa Fé. The challenge did not remain -long unanswered. Across the bridge of the -Xeni and up the rocky roadway a Spanish -cavalier was seen urging his horse.</p> - -<p>“That is Manuel Garcilosa,” said Alonzo -de Quintanilla. “I know him well. He is -not of noble birth; but, by Heaven! he will -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_93" id="Page_93">[Pg 93]</a></span>be ennobled if he rescues the Christian prayer -from the Moor.”</p> - -<p>Garcilosa, like the Moor, had neither lance -nor shield, but a sword, which, like most of -the Spanish swords, was a Toledo blade, -made of the finest strength and temper.</p> - -<p>Arrived on the plateau, Garcilosa stopped -to breathe his horse, a noble chestnut. Man -and horse stood motionless, as if cast in -bronze. The Moor advanced warily, his -horse at the trot. Garcilosa, his sword in -rest, seemed waiting for the onslaught. When -the Moorish warrior was within twenty yards -of Garcilosa, he gave his horse the spur, and -the chestnut sprang forward like an arrow released -from the bow. The Moor also put -spurs to his horse to meet the shock, but -Garcilosa was too quick for him. The -Arabian horse swerved a little, answering a -touch of the bridle; but the chestnut, dashing -full at him, man and horse were ridden -down. The white horse had fallen upon -his master; but with the intelligence of -the Arabian he struggled to his feet in an -instant. The Moorish warrior rose, too, as -Garcilosa dismounted. Then followed a des<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_94" id="Page_94">[Pg 94]</a></span>perate -combat on foot. The Moor was the -heavier man; the Spanish gentleman the -more active. They fought in a narrow circle, -the clashing of their swords ringing out in the -clear December air. Blood streamed from -the faces of both, and presently the Moor -was seen to stagger. Garcilosa suddenly gave -his antagonist a thrust upon the sword-arm -which brought him to the ground. Then, running -to the Arabian, which stood perfectly -still, Garcilosa, first tearing away the Christian -prayer and putting it in his breast, took -his Toledo blade and cut off the flowing tail -of the Arabian horse. Cries resounded from -the people on the walls of the city. The -horse was of the breed of the Prophet Mohammed, -and to cut off his tail was reckoned -sacrilege.</p> - -<p>The Moor still lay insensible on the ground; -and Garcilosa, vaulting into the saddle upon -the white horse, gave his own chestnut steed -a thwack with the sword, which sent him -flying back down the road he knew, followed -by his master on the Arabian steed, hard -galloping. Once more shouts and cries of -“Santiago, Santiago for Spain!” rent the air.</p> - -<div class="figcenter"> -<img class="box" id="i_094" src="images/i_094.jpg" width="400" height="621" alt="Garcilosa Suddenly Gave His Antagonist a Thrust Upon the Sword Arm" title="" /> -</div> -<p class="center no-indent caption">GARCILOSA SUDDENLY GAVE HIS ANTAGONIST A THRUST<br /> -UPON THE SWORD-ARM</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_95" id="Page_95">[Pg 95]</a></span></p> - -<p>When Garcilosa rode into Santa Fé he was -met by a messenger from the King and the -Queen. With Del Pulgar he received the -thanks of both and the cheers of the men and -the tears of the women. That day Garcilosa -was ennobled, becoming Don Garcilosa del -Vega, in commemoration of the spot on which -he fought his gallant fight.</p> - -<p>On January 1, 1492, the offer of surrender -was made by King Boabdil. The following -day the Moorish king and all his followers -passed out of Granada and left Spain free -from the foreign invaders after nearly eight -hundred years. The joy and triumph of the -day inspired every heart, even the torturing -soul of the great Admiral, who was forgotten -and overlooked in the universal excitement. -All the highest nobles and grandees of Spain—the -warriors, the statesmen, the scholars, all -that made Spain great—were assembled on -that January day to see the surrender of Boabdil. -Only one man, and he the greatest of -them all, was not provided with a place and -a position. That was the Admiral, Christobal -Colon. Diego, however, sharing as he -did everything with Don Felipe, was enabled -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_96" id="Page_96">[Pg 96]</a></span>by the thoughtfulness of Doņa Christina to -see the inspiring spectacle.</p> - -<p>The surrender of King Boabdil to the Spanish -sovereigns was to take place near a little -stone building, until that time a Mohammedan -mosque. On that day it had been -consecrated as a Christian chapel, the chapel -of San Sebastian.</p> - -<p>Early in the morning the two lads, with -Fray Piņa, walked through the town, which -was wild with jubilation, down the rocky -path to the place assigned for them. Already -vast crowds of persons were assembled. The -Spaniards had taken possession of the city -the day before, and Fernando de Talavera -had been created Archbishop of Granada. -To him was allotted the honor of raising the -standard of Spain over the great mosque, -now to become a Christian cathedral. Some -expressed pity for the unfortunate Moorish -king; but Fray Piņa, a man of lion heart, -had only contempt for him.</p> - -<p>“He has no courage,” said Fray Piņa, to -the two lads, watching the enormous concourse -coming together and the marching -across the plain of the armies of Castile and -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_97" id="Page_97">[Pg 97]</a></span>Arragon. “Instead of showing his people an -example of fortitude in adversity, he mounted -his mule and rode all through the streets of -Granada beating his breast and tearing his -beard and wailing: ‘Woe is me! Woe is me!’ -and inciting the people to shrieks and bewailing. -Do you think our great Queen Isabella -in the place of the Moorish king would have -so acted? No; she would have met disaster -with the same calmness that she meets -triumph. No cry would have come from her -lips, no beating of the breast, no tearing of -the hair. She would have been the same -great queen in defeat as well as in triumph.”</p> - -<p>Every moment in the bright January day -the multitude grew larger and more brilliant. -The sound of martial music filled the air as -the victorious armies assembled and the sun -glittered upon the casques, the shining arms, -and the splendid standards. Presently the -royal procession appeared. The King and the -Queen, with their son, Prince Juan, and their -daughter, the Princess Katharine, all superbly -mounted and surrounded by a magnificent -train of nobles, knights, and ecclesiastics, -rode across the plain toward the little chapel -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_98" id="Page_98">[Pg 98]</a></span>by the side of the rocky road. As Diego and -Don Felipe were watching the glorious sight -they heard Doņa Christina’s voice close by -them. She was leaning out of a closed litter, -with the curtains slightly drawn back. Within -the litter a glimpse could be caught of the -little Moorish boy, the son of King Boabdil.</p> - -<p>Fray Piņa, with Don Felipe and Diego, -obeying a signal from Doņa Christina, advanced -to the litter.</p> - -<p>“The Queen,” whispered Doņa Christina, -“directed that the little boy be brought here, -so at the moment of King Boabdil’s surrender -the poor King may have a moment’s -joy in seeing his child alive and well. Remain -by me until the Queen calls for me.”</p> - -<p>The King and the Queen were now approaching -very near. The face of King Ferdinand -shone with triumph; and Queen Isabella, -although calmness and dignity itself, had a -glorious light in her eyes and a flush in her cheek -deeper than any one had ever seen there -before. Her patriotism as a Castilian, her -pride as a sovereign, her earnestness as a -Christian, were all exalted by the driving -forth from her kingdom of the enemies of the -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_99" id="Page_99">[Pg 99]</a></span>people and of the Christian religion. It was, -indeed, a stupendous event for Spain.</p> - -<p>The sound of music, the cheering, and all excited -conversation quickly ceased, as from the -Gate of Justice of the city on the heights came -forth a cavalcade. A silence like death seemed -to fall upon the world, which was broken by a -sudden, loud crash of masonry. At the request -of King Boabdil, the gate behind him -had been forever closed by the destruction -of the towers of masonry on each side of the -gateway, thus blocking it up forever. Every -heart was thrilled by the sound, preternaturally -loud in the clear January day. The -procession of the conquered wound its slow -way down the hillside, across the bridge, and -up again, until it reached the Spanish sovereigns. -Then Boabdil, a miserable, downcast object, -without dignity or fortitude, -slipped from his horse and would have prostrated -himself upon the ground and kissed -the hand of King Ferdinand; but this the -King magnanimously forbore, himself dismounting -as did the Queen, out of courtesy -to the fallen monarch. At the same time -the Moorish vizier handed to King Ferdinand -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_100" id="Page_100">[Pg 100]</a></span>the keys of the city of Granada. The King -passed them to Queen Isabella, as Granada -was in the territory claimed by Castile. These -the Queen in turn gave to Prince Juan, heir -to the thrones of Castile and Arragon, who -handed them in his turn to the Count de Tendila, -the new Spanish governor of the city of -Granada. At that moment Doņa Christina, -slipping from the litter and holding by -the hand the little Moorish prince, led him -to the Queen and placed his hand in hers. -As King Boabdil made his obeisance to her, -Queen Isabella placed the hand of the child -in that of the father. The little boy gave a -sharp cry of joy, and the poor weeping Boabdil -caught his son to his breast. Then, in -the midst of a death-like silence, every eye -saw rising slowly over the citadel of Granada -the red and yellow standard of Spain, the -Gonfalon, until it floated over the flag of the -Crescent, which came down quickly. A great -shout that seemed to shake the earth, a crashing -of music, a roaring of artillery, broke forth -as if the whole world rejoiced. The King -and the Queen, going into the Christian chapel -of San Sebastian, until that morning a Moor<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_101" id="Page_101">[Pg 101]</a></span>ish mosque, -fell on their knees and gave -thanks to God for the liberation of their -country from the invader and for the triumph -of the Christian religion.</p> - -<p>The event was up to that time the most -glorious in the history of Spain and the most -important. But a day was about to dawn -for Spain more brilliant, more imposing, -more full of triumph than any country on the -globe has ever known, a day never yet surpassed -in all the countries upon which the -sun has risen since.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_102" id="Page_102">[Pg 102]</a></span></p> - -<h2 class="no-break">V<br /> -<small><small>THE SPLENDOR OF THE DAWN</small></small></h2></div> - -<p class="no-indent"><span class="dropcap">T</span>HE Spanish court, the army, and the -whole nation gave itself up to gladness -at the driving from Spanish soil of the Moorish -invaders. The city of Granada had to -be invested, its government established, the -people who remained provided for, and all -of the vast details settled of a new acquisition. -The court remained at Santa Fé, although -often giving audiences and holding -splendid functions in the magnificent palace -of the Alhambra in the city of Granada. -There were great reviews of troops, receptions -of ambassadors, gorgeous religious -ceremonials in the consecration of the -Moorish mosques into Christian churches. -Through it all Diego and Don Felipe -pursued their quiet, studious life under the -stern rule of Fray Piņa. Every day the -Admiral went upon his usual round, visit<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_103" id="Page_103">[Pg 103]</a></span>ing -those persons who were interested in his -scheme and those in power whom he hoped -to interest in it. Father Diego de Deza and -Alonzo de Quintanilla remained his steadfast -friends. At last, one day, a fortnight after -the surrender of Granada, De Quintanilla -brought the joyful news that the King and the -Queen were prepared to redeem their promise -to the Admiral, that when the war with -the Moors had reached a conclusion they -would assist him in his enterprise.</p> - -<p>Diego and Don Felipe were wild with delight. -To them it seemed as if the voyage -were already made and concluded, the Admiral -returning loaded with honors and Diego -made a grandee of Spain. They watched the -Admiral set forth, plainly but suitably dressed, -and with that incomparable air of dignity -and composure that always made him a -marked man. All during the morning Fray -Piņa found his pupils inattentive and more -disposed to reverie than work; but under his -sharp admonition they were compelled to pay -attention.</p> - -<p>It was a little after noon when the sound -of steps was heard upon the stairs, and the -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_104" id="Page_104">[Pg 104]</a></span>Admiral and Alonzo de Quintanilla entered -the room. De Quintanilla appeared deeply -agitated, and for the first time there were -indications of subdued anger on the Admiral’s -part; but his voice, in speaking, was composed.</p> - -<p>“All is over,” he said to Fray Piņa; “I have -appeared for the last time before the great -council. They recognize the value of my -enterprise; but under the leadership of Fernando -de Talavera, the Archbishop of Granada, -an honest man but narrow, they declare -that my claims are extravagant and -should not be allowed. I, in my turn, declared -that if I return I shall give to Spain -far more than what I claim—the title of Admiral -of the Ocean Seas and Viceroy and -Captain-General of all the lands I discover, -and my son Diego to be page-in-waiting to -Prince Juan in my absence and to become a -grandee of Spain if I return successful. If -the spirit of pride be in this, it is a just and -honorable pride. I ask only what I shall -acquire by my own strength. Those things -have been refused me in advance. Now, -after nine years of effort, I shall make no -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_105" id="Page_105">[Pg 105]</a></span>further appeal to the Court of Spain. Perhaps -the King of France will be as generous -and more just than the sovereigns of -Spain.”</p> - -<p>The shock of painful surprise kept all silent -until Fray Piņa spoke in a low voice.</p> - -<p>“This is indeed a calamitous decision for -Spain.”</p> - -<p>“True,” said Alonzo de Quintanilla, “but -I will say that the Admiral’s course is but -just. He treated with the representatives of -the King and the Queen with a noble haughtiness, -proving himself their equal, and demanded -firmly, as they recognized the magnificence -of his scheme, that he, at least, should -have those honors which must go to some one. -Shall he, the discoverer, be under the authority -of a viceroy or another admiral? They -thought he would be intimidated, that in -his anxiety to carry the matter through he -would yield what he thought his due; but -he would not.”</p> - -<p>And then, growing scarlet in the face, De -Quintanilla suddenly brought his fist down -on the table and shouted:</p> - -<p>“Upon the heads of those persons, and es<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_106" id="Page_106">[Pg 106]</a></span>pecially -upon the Archbishop of Granada, -will lie the loss of a new world to Spain!”</p> - -<p>The Admiral remained silent for a moment, -and then with his usual calmness began to -make arrangements for his immediate departure -with Diego for France. Diego and -Don Felipe were stunned. They knew not -until the moment of separation came how -quickly and strongly the bond of brotherhood -had been forged between them. Their -elders left them alone, the Admiral telling -Diego to pack at once his few books and -clothes, as they were to mount and ride -within three hours. It took but a short time -to collect Diego’s books and clothes, Don -Felipe helping, and neither lad saying much. -It seemed to them an eternal separation, and -it was indeed doubtful if they would ever -meet again. Don Felipe drew from his -finger a little ring made of two hoops entwined. -He took them apart and, placing -one on Diego’s finger, he put the other back -on his own.</p> - -<p>“As long as we wear each the half of this -ring,” he said, “we shall be friends still, no -matter how far separated.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_107" id="Page_107">[Pg 107]</a></span></p> - -<p>At last, with his small belongings packed -in a portmanteau and his cloak around him, -Diego with Don Felipe went down the stair, -their arms entwined about each other’s shoulders. -At the door stood a horse for the -Admiral and another for Diego, both equipped -for hard travel. There were but three persons -to say farewell to the Admiral—Fray -Piņa, Alonzo de Quintanilla, and Luis de St. -Angel, controller of the ecclesiastical revenues. -All showed marks of the deepest grief and -chagrin at the loss of the honor and glory for -which they had hoped for their country. No -word of remonstrance was said, however, as -the Admiral made his farewells. No one -could have judged from his composure that -this meant the wreck and ruin of eighteen -years of constant and earnest effort, nine of -which had been spent in Spain. The farewells -were soon said, Diego and Don Felipe -kissing each other on the cheek silently. As -Diego flung himself into the saddle and rode -off, tears were dropping upon his face; but -he said no word.</p> - -<p>They rode rapidly in the cold January -afternoon and were soon clear of the town. -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_108" id="Page_108">[Pg 108]</a></span>Many persons recognized the Admiral and -looked after him curiously, not understanding -the meaning of his sudden departure. When -the Admiral and Diego reached the highroad -they rode still faster. The sky was overcast, -and a fine, small rain began to fall. -They met few travelers, and those mostly -seeking shelter. When they had ridden nearly -an hour and were nearing the pass at the -foot of the mountain of Elvira, where many -desperate battles had been fought between -the Moors and the Christians, the tears were -still dropping upon Diego’s face; the whole -world seemed dark to him. The Admiral -then said to him, gently:</p> - -<p>“I see you have a good heart, for you are -still grieving for Don Felipe.”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” answered Diego, “and for you, my -father.”</p> - -<p>“It is as God wills,” replied the Admiral, -upon whose lips those words were often heard.</p> - -<p>The gorge grew dark in the winter twilight, -and the rough road was slippery with rain -and snow. They had just crossed the bridge -of Pinos when behind them they heard -the clattering of horses’ hoofs coming at a -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_109" id="Page_109">[Pg 109]</a></span>sharp gallop. Neither the Admiral nor Diego -turned to see who was coming. Suddenly, -the rider, on his steaming horse, came alongside -and, laying a bold hand upon the Admiral’s -bridle, brought the horse back on his haunches. -In the gloom of the evening the Daredevil -Knight, Don Tomaso de Gama, was recognized.</p> - -<p>“I come, Christobal Colon, with the command -of her Majesty, the Queen, that you -are to turn about and ride back to Santa Fé -with me—now—this instant—in the present -moment.”</p> - -<p>Even as Don Tomaso spoke he turned the -head of the Admiral’s horse around; but the -Admiral checked him.</p> - -<p>“I honor and respect her Majesty, the -Queen,” he said, sharply; “but I owe her no -allegiance. I was born a subject of the Duke -of Genoa, and I am a naturalized subject of -the King of Portugal.”</p> - -<p>“That is all very well, Christobal Colon, -born a subject of the Duke of Genoa and a -naturalized subject of the King of Portugal, -but I have ten good men-at-arms within a -stone’s throw, and if you will not ride back -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_110" id="Page_110">[Pg 110]</a></span>with me holding the reins in your own hand -you shall ride back with your hands tied behind -your back and a man-at-arms on each -side of you holding your bridle.”</p> - -<p>At that Diego heard what he had known -but seldom in his life, a clear laugh from the -grave Admiral. The impudence of the young -knight, the threat of force against a man -accustomed to command all, like the Admiral, -could not but move to laughter. Don Tomaso, -suiting the action to the word, gave the Admiral’s -horse a sharp cut, and before they -knew it all three were trotting rapidly back across -the bridge. The Admiral held the -reins in his own hands; but the Daredevil -Knight kept a firm grip upon the bridle.</p> - -<p>“And for what does her Majesty, the -Queen, wish me to return?” asked the Admiral.</p> - -<p>“I do not know,” responded Don Tomaso. -“I have not been accustomed to ask the King -and the Queen their reasons; but I know that -Luis de St. Angel went straight to her Majesty, -Queen Isabella, and told her plainly that she -was throwing away the greatest honor and -glory that ever awaited any sovereign and -any country in not granting you the terms -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_111" id="Page_111">[Pg 111]</a></span>to which you were justly entitled, and that -you must be brought back to Santa Fé by -force, if necessary. He was reinforced by -that stern tutor of Prince Juan, Father de -Deza. After a short conference with the -Queen, St. Angel and De Quintanilla ran to -me and said:</p> - -<p>“‘Go you and fetch Christobal Colon back, -and tell him all shall be as he wishes. We -send you, knowing you to be a daring fellow, -and not to be overawed by Christobal Colon, -as most men are.’ So here I am, carrying -back the Admiral of the Ocean Seas, the -Viceroy and Captain-General of all the lands -you discover, and your son, Don Diego, -grandee of the first rank in Spain.”</p> - -<p>Diego listened, almost dazed by Don Tomaso’s -words. Presently the Admiral spoke -as the horses kept up their sharp trot through -the pass, growing darker every moment.</p> - -<p>“Where are your ten men-at-arms, Don -Tomaso?”</p> - -<p>“I have no men-at-arms,” answered Don -Tomaso, coolly, “but I have a good harquebus; -if you ask for my order, this shall be -my order.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_112" id="Page_112">[Pg 112]</a></span></p> - -<p>At that Don Tomaso drew his harquebus -and leveled it straight at the Admiral, who -laughed again and put it aside.</p> - -<p>“I wish you were a seaman, Don Tomaso,” -he said. “I should make you my first -lieutenant.”</p> - -<p>After riding for nearly an hour in the darkness -they saw the lights of Santa Fé, and soon -they were clattering through the streets. -The Admiral was about to take the way to -his lodgings when the Daredevil Knight -again laid his hand upon the bridle.</p> - -<p>“No,” he said, “we cross the Vega and -ride straight to the Queen’s pavilion, where -her Majesty awaits you.” Then, having assumed -the direction of the Admiral, the Daredevil -Knight also gave orders to Diego. -“Go you,” he said, “back to your lodgings. -Your father will return sometime before midnight—perhaps.”</p> - -<p>Diego leaned over and caught his father’s -hand and kissed it. He had no words in -which to express the tumult of joy and pride -in his soul.</p> - -<p>Ten minutes afterward he dismounted -from his spent and dripping horse in front -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_113" id="Page_113">[Pg 113]</a></span>of the lodgings he had left only a few -hours before. The next moment he was -dashing up the long, dark, narrow stairs. He -stopped for a moment outside the door of -the little room in which he had lived and -studied for many weeks with Don Felipe -and softly opened the door. Don Felipe sat -at the table, upon which a rushlight burned, -making a little glow in the darkness. He was -neither reading nor writing, but leaning his -head upon his hands, looking the image of -forlornness. Diego slipped in softly and threw -himself upon Don Felipe.</p> - -<p>“All is as we wished!” he shouted. “It -is glorious, glorious, I tell you! When the -Queen heard my father was indeed gone she -sent Don Tomaso galloping after him, who -brought him back. The Queen will do for -my father all he asks. He is now on his way -to the Queen, and you and I, Don Felipe, are -here together once more!”</p> - -<p>In one day the whole face of the world -seemed to have changed for Diego. The -Admiral, who, but a little while before, could -count on only a few steady friends like Alonzo -de Quintanilla and Luis de St. Angel, both -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_114" id="Page_114">[Pg 114]</a></span>accountants to the Queen, and Father de -Deza, was now treated with the greatest outward -respect by all. Fernando de Talavera, -Archbishop of Granada, withdrew his opposition -to the Admiral, which had been based -solely upon what he considered too high -honors to be demanded in the event of -success. He believed in the Admiral as a -great navigator and looked for the success -of the expedition.</p> - -<p>One of the points tenaciously upheld by -the Admiral was that certain honors should -be given his sons, especially Diego, as the -elder. That the enterprise would result in -immortal glory for himself the Admiral never -doubted; but with the passionate love of his -children was the natural desire that they -should have a place and a degree of consideration. -For this reason, after many long -consultations with Father de Deza, tutor to -Prince Juan, the Admiral had required that -Diego should be ennobled by the title of Don -and should be made a page-in-waiting to -Prince Juan. It was by this steadfast maintenance -of the dignity of his position that the -Admiral, a foreigner and penniless but for -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_115" id="Page_115">[Pg 115]</a></span>the Queen’s pension, made it apparent that -he understood in advance the enormous gift -he was about to make to Spain. All he asked -for Diego was conceded to him at once on his -return to Santa Fé.</p> - -<p>At any other time the thought of the singular -change in his life from poverty and uncertainty -into a footing of equality with the -grandees of Spain would have impressed -Diego more deeply; but the thought uppermost -in his mind was the great voyage upon -which his father was to set forth. Everything -seemed small beside it.</p> - -<p>It seemed to Diego and Don Felipe as if -they had entered upon a new world since the -pleasant autumn days at La Rabida.</p> - -<p>They had witnessed one of the greatest -and most splendid events of the age in the -driving-out of the Moors from Spain, and they -were brought close to the contemplation of -an enterprise so vast that the imagination -was bewildered. In the midst of it they lived -the ordinary life of youths of their age under -a strict master and stern discipline, but they -saw and heard men and things that fall to the -lot of few young souls.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_116" id="Page_116">[Pg 116]</a></span></p> - -<p>The winter passed like a dream. Everywhere -was the coming voyage of the Admiral -talked of, and the King and the Queen supported -him loyally. Especially was this true -of Queen Isabella, whose lofty and resolute -character made her very steadfast in all her -undertakings. Diego saw but little of his -father in those fleeting months between -January and April. Once it had been difficult -for the Admiral to obtain audiences of -those in power; now he could not see all who -flocked to his plain lodgings. It was then -expected that he would be able to collect his -squadron and sail before the first of June. On -a glorious April day the King and the Queen -were to sign the agreement between themselves -as independent sovereigns and the -Genoese captain, to whom they were to give -the noble title of Admiral of the Ocean Seas, -and Viceroy and Captain-General of all lands -to the westward. The great event was to -take place at the Alhambra, in Granada, and -it was on that day that Diego and Don Felipe -first saw the dazzling and overwhelming -beauty of the palace of the Moorish kings. -The splendor of the “Red Palace,” as the -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_117" id="Page_117">[Pg 117]</a></span>Alhambra means, the glory of its architecture, -the magnificence of its halls and courts -and fountains, the treasures of gold and silver -and jewels used in decorating its vaulted -ceilings and marble walls, amazed all who -saw them, from the King and the Queen down -to the private soldiers and servants.</p> - -<p>On this spring morning, April 17, 1492, -Diego and Don Felipe were to be of the group -that was to accompany the Admiral into the -presence of the King and the Queen, where the -agreements were to be formally signed and -sealed.</p> - -<p>The Queen, with characteristic delicacy, -had advanced a sum of money to the Admiral -which enabled him to make a good appearance -for himself and for Diego. Gorgeous dress -would have been out of place upon Columbus, -whose personality made all accessories appear -trivial. On that day he wore a plain costume -of black satin with a small collar of -lace and a cloak of black cloth. At his side -was a plain sword. Diego and Don Felipe -were dressed alike in dark-blue cloth with -handsome shoes of Cordovan leather and -black satin cloaks. The Prior of La Rabida, -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_118" id="Page_118">[Pg 118]</a></span>Juan Perez, the first friend the Admiral had -found in Spain and the most devoted, was -to be present on this great day, which was -one of triumph to him. With him he was to -bring the little Fernando, in the care of -Brother Lawrence. The party from La Rabida -reached Santa Fé on the night of April -16th, and were joyfully greeted. Fernando -was delighted to see his father and brother -again, and was charmed with the sight of the -knights and soldiers.</p> - -<p>At ten o’clock next morning, when Diego -and Don Felipe were ready to start, they were -sent for to go to the Admiral’s room. On -the table lay two swords with sword-belts.</p> - -<p>“Don Felipe and my son,” said the Admiral, -“the time has now come when you must -wear swords, not as boys, but as men. I give -you these praying you to consider the solemn -meaning of a sword. A sword means courage, -truth, and honor. Courage is the greatest -virtue in the world, for on it all other -virtues are built. It does not avail a man to -love the truth unless he has the courage to -speak it. The beginning of lying is cowardice. -Sin has many tools; but a lie is the -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_119" id="Page_119">[Pg 119]</a></span>handle that fits them all. So must you ever -be ready to draw your swords in the cause of -truth. A man should reverence his sword as -a symbol of his honor. When he is disgraced -his sword is taken from him and broken, -signifying that he has no more honor. Do -you understand this?”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” instantly and clearly replied both -youths.</p> - -<p>The Admiral then, taking the first sword, -clasped it around the waist of Don Felipe, -who, drawing it from its scabbard, kneeled -and kissed it reverently. Then, the Admiral -belting the second sword around Diego’s -body, Diego, too, kneeled and kissed the -sword. Both were vividly impressed with -the Admiral’s words and the deep meaning -he had attached to them.</p> - -<p>“It is a good thing, though not of obligation,” -said the Admiral, “that when a young -man receives his sword he shall take it to -the church and, laying it on the altar, shall -spend the night in prayer and contemplation, -asking the help and guidance of God in his -future life.”</p> - -<p>“That will we do, my father,” answered Diego.</p> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_120" id="Page_120">[Pg 120]</a></span></p> -<p>“This very night,” added Don Felipe.</p> - -<p>The gift of the swords seemed at once to -make men of the two youths. They were -too intelligent not to understand the full -meaning of what they had received.</p> - -<p>Below in the street well-caparisoned horses -were awaiting them. The Admiral, accompanied -by his unfailing friends, De Quintanilla -and Luis de St. Angel and Juan Perez, the -Prior of La Rabida, rode in advance. Behind -him came Fray Piņa, while Brother -Lawrence, mounted on a steady mule, carried -in his arms the little Fernando. Diego and -Don Felipe brought up the rear. The eyes -of the curious crowd of soldiers and citizens -were turned upon the cavalcade. They no -longer ridiculed the Admiral, but regarded -him with fear, as a person likely to draw to -him many ardent souls in his voyage into the -unknown. Many remarked, however, upon -the beauty of the little Fernando and the -manly and noble appearance of Diego. They -rode through the town of Santa Fé, across -the bridge of the Xeni, and climbed the -broad acclivity down which the abject Moorish -king had traveled on a January day. -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_121" id="Page_121">[Pg 121]</a></span>Neither Diego nor Don Felipe had been -within the walls of Granada, and they were -deeply interested in the strange and gorgeous -architecture of the city, the barred windows -of the women’s quarters, and the mosques, -now converted into Christian churches.</p> - -<p>At the Gate of the Pomegranates the Alhambra -really begins, that marvel of beauty, -palace and citadel in one, with walls a mile -in circumference, and containing within itself -wonderful varieties of loveliness. At this -gate the party dismounted and proceeded on -foot through the gardens and courtyards -leading to the Hall of Ambassadors, where -the King and the Queen in state would pledge -themselves to the Admiral and sign and seal -their agreements. Never had any of them -seen anything like the splendors of the glorious -courts and superb corridors. The gardens -were blooming in all the beauty of the -late April, and in the trees and shrubbery -were the rare birds caught and tamed for the -pleasure of the Moorish kings.</p> - -<p>Through long, arched colonnades of gleaming -malachite they passed; through the exquisite -gardens watered by the icy waters -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_122" id="Page_122">[Pg 122]</a></span>of the Darro, trickling in silver streams or -in crystal waterfalls. In every beautiful -courtyard great fountains played, making -showers of diamonds in the April sun of -Andalusia. The air was drenched with the -perfume of violets and hyacinths, jasmine -and myrtle blooming in splendid profusion.</p> - -<p>At the entrance to the magnificent Court -of the Lions they were met by a brilliant -group of court officials, and passed from one -superb apartment to another until they -reached the splendid Hall of Ambassadors.</p> - -<p>The scene was worthy of the stupendous -event that was to take place in it. The walls -of polished marble, inlaid with arabesques, -its graceful columns, its lofty and beautiful -ceilings, its riot of color, was overwhelming in -its beauty. Here had the Moorish kings exercised -their despotic power; here had they treated -with haughty contempt the ambassadors of -the Christian nations. Upon this glorious -throne-room had been spent the vast sums -wrung from the toilers of the land and sea, -the money gained by piracy, robbery, and the -ransom of Christian captives. Driven forth -at last from it, their places had been taken by -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_123" id="Page_123">[Pg 123]</a></span>great and enlightened Christian monarchs. -Ferdinand of Arragon was a brilliant soldier, -a statesman, shrewd in affairs, and of enlightened -views according to his time. The -name of Isabella of Castile makes a blaze of -splendor upon the page of history. Not less -desirous than Ferdinand for the glory and -material welfare of her country, Isabella had -a loftier mind, a nobler conception of all -things, than any monarch of the age. She -looked to the spread of the Christian religion, -to the civilization of the new peoples in those -far lands which Columbus might discover. -It was her great and magnanimous mind -which caused the introduction into the compact -with Columbus of that clause providing -that the inhabitants of the new world to be -discovered should have the same protection -of law as the Spaniards themselves.</p> - -<p>At the farther end of the Hall of Ambassadors, -upon the great gilded throne of the -Moorish kings, sat in throne chairs King -Ferdinand and Queen Isabella, Prince Juan -and Princess Katharine seated below them, -and surrounded by a huge company of officials, -statesmen, soldiers, and ecclesiastics. At -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_124" id="Page_124">[Pg 124]</a></span>the steps of the throne was a small table -with pens and inkhorns and a great document -inscribed upon many leaves of parchment. -It was the agreement between the -courts of Arragon and Castile with Columbus, -and it was in that hour to be signed by -King Ferdinand and Queen Isabella and the -great Admiral.</p> - -<p>It is the prerogative of men of the first -order of genius that those nearest to them, -who see them oftenest, should have greater -reverence for them than those who do not -know them so well. So it was with Columbus. -Never had those who had been associated -with him through his eighteen years of toil, -poverty, disappointment, broken hopes, and -baffled plans admired him so much as at the -moment when he entered the great hall. -The friends who escorted him fell back. -Columbus, taking the hand of the little -Fernando, placed it in that of Diego and -advanced alone to the foot of the throne, -where he knelt respectfully. All present, from -the King and the Queen down to Diego and -Don Felipe, showed a visible agitation and -tremulous emotion at what was about to -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_125" id="Page_125">[Pg 125]</a></span>take place, except one person; that was the -great Admiral himself. He, a man of the -people, a foreigner without fortune, with no -endowment but his genius, his courage, his -virtue, was about to be invested, in case of -his successful return, with honors and dignities -that dwarfed those of the highest -nobles present and placed him one step in -advance of all of them. King Ferdinand’s -keen face wore an expression of triumph he -could not conceal. The cost of the expedition -was small, and the King had become -convinced that the chances of a stupendous -return were very great. Queen Isabella was -inspired with a profound and noble enthusiasm; -she had eagerly offered to pledge her -jewels, and on this offer the amount of money -had been raised necessary for the expedition.</p> - -<p>The Queen’s face was unusually pale; but -her eyes, of a dark and beautiful blue, were -shining, and she leaned forward in her chair, -returning with a deep bow the reverence -made her by the Admiral. He alone was perfectly -composed, and gave no sign either of -triumph or of nervousness. When he rose -from his knees, a chair was placed for him, -and then Luis de St. Angel read in a loud -voice the terms of the agreement which was -to be signed. These were as follows:</p> - -<div class="blockquot"> -<p>1. That Columbus should have for himself -during his life, and his heirs and successors -forever, the office of admiral in all the lands -and continents which he might discover or -acquire in the ocean, with similar honors and -prerogatives to those enjoyed by the high -admiral of Castile in his district.</p> - -<p>2. That he should be viceroy and governor-general -over all the said lands and continents, -with the privilege of nominating three candidates -for the government of each island or -province, one of whom should be selected by -the sovereigns.</p> - -<p>3. That he should be entitled to reserve -for himself one-tenth of all pearls, precious -stones, gold, silver, spices, and all other articles -and merchandise, in whatever manner -found, bought, bartered, or gained within -his admiralty, the costs being first deducted.</p> - -<p>4. That he, or his lieutenant, should be the -sole judge in all causes and disputes arising -out of traffic between those countries and -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_126" id="Page_126">[Pg 126]</a></span>Spain, provided the high admiral of Castile -had similar jurisdiction in his district.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_127" id="Page_127">[Pg 127]</a></span></p> - -<p>5. That he might then, and at all times, -contribute an eighth part of the expenses in -fitting out vessels to sail on this enterprise -and receive an eighth part of the profits.</p></div> - -<div class="figcenter"> -<img class="box" id="i_126" src="images/i_126.jpg" width="400" height="639" alt="The Signing of the Documents of Agreement" title="" /> -</div> - -<p class="caption center no-indent">THE SIGNING OF THE DOCUMENTS OF AGREEMENT</p> - -<p>Splendid, indeed, were these terms, but all -present knew that the great Admiral would -accept nothing less; and they respected him -the more for his steady defense of his rights. -When the reading was over, Luis de St. Angel, -taking the copies in duplicate, ascended the -steps of the throne and laid them first before -King Ferdinand, who signed them. He then -handed them to Queen Isabella, who also -signed them, after which she clasped her -hands and engaged a moment in silent prayer. -Then the documents were handed to Columbus, -and he, in his turn, signed them. A -tremor ran through the whole of the great -company; the tension was relaxed. The -King and the Queen descended from the -throne and, followed by Prince Juan and -Princess Katharine and a splendid train, -passed out of the hall. Luis de St. Angel -made a sign to Columbus, who remained -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_128" id="Page_128">[Pg 128]</a></span>standing as did the rest of the company. In -a minute or two St. Angel returned, and -speaking a word to Columbus, the Admiral -motioned to Diego, who followed his father -and St. Angel. They crossed the vast hall -and entered a small, high-ceiled room where -the King and the Queen awaited them with -Fernando de Talavera, Archbishop of Granada, -and Doņa Christina, as lady-in-waiting -to the Queen. There were also present Prince -Juan and Princess Katharine. The Admiral, -on being greeted by the King and the Queen, -expressed in a few words his deep sense of -gratitude. The Queen then said:</p> - -<p>“We are now prepared to fulfil the request -you made of us some months ago, and to -issue letters patent giving your eldest son -the title of Don, and making him a page-in-waiting -to our son, Prince Juan, and granting -him an allowance for his maintenance. I, -myself, Christobal Colon, will not forget your -son during your absence and will keep informed -of his conduct and progress in study. -Doņa Christina will represent me. For your -younger son we shall also provide suitably, -though he is not of an age to be at court.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_129" id="Page_129">[Pg 129]</a></span></p> - -<p>“I earnestly thank your Majesties,” replied -the Admiral, “especially for the gracious -offer you make of keeping informed concerning -my son’s conduct and progress. It shall be -my constant prayer and hope that my son -may never be unworthy of your Majesties’ -kindness. And my thanks are also made to -the noble lady, Doņa Christina.”</p> - -<p>Diego then advanced and made his obeisance -to the sovereigns, Queen Isabella giving -him her hand to kiss. Nobility of soul and -kindness of heart radiated from the Queen, -and Diego felt that he would be ten times a -traitor if he did not do his best to deserve -her good opinion. The King and Queen then -engaged in earnest conversation with the -Admiral, and Diego had time to observe -Prince Juan at closer range than ever before. -He was a handsome, slender youth, strongly -resembling his illustrious mother in the frankness -and nobility of his countenance; but his -slenderness and delicacy foreboded that his -life would not be long, although he lived to -be knighted upon the field of battle by his -father. The Princess Katharine, destined -also for a tragic fate as the wife of the eighth -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_130" id="Page_130">[Pg 130]</a></span>Henry of England, though then but fourteen -years of age, also resembled the Queen, and -had a dignity and a fearlessness of character -that was to sustain her through her stormy -and unfortunate life. Diego felt all confidence -when he looked into the honest and -kindly eyes of Prince Juan, and thought to -himself: “This must be a noble prince, being -the son of his mother.”</p> - -<p>After a short conference the Admiral was -dismissed, and in a little while Diego had rejoined -Don Felipe and Fray Piņa and Brother -Lawrence with the little Fernando. Leaving -the splendid palace, they rode back through -the soft, bright April noon to their lodgings -in Santa Fé. Diego said nothing of what had -passed until he found himself alone in the -small, plain room he shared with Don Felipe. -Then he told Don Felipe all.</p> - -<p>“If I should ever forget the kindness of -the great Queen, or fail to live as she expects -me to, I think I should have the blackest -heart in the world,” he said. “Besides giving -me honors and money, she gave me kindness, -and your mother, Doņa Christina, has -said that she will have a care for me as for -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_131" id="Page_131">[Pg 131]</a></span>you. What a good woman your mother must -be, Don Felipe!”</p> - -<p>“The best on earth,” answered Don Felipe. -“As good as Queen Isabella.”</p> - -<p>Diego then unbuckled his sword and laid -it on the table, and Don Felipe did the same. -Then came a long pause before Diego spoke.</p> - -<p>“This is the first day,” he said, “that we -have worn swords as men. Ought we not to -consecrate them with prayer as knights do?”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” answered Don Felipe. “My mother -has told me that my father, when first he -was girt with a sword, spent the night in -prayer on his knees before the altar of the -Cathedral of Seville.”</p> - -<p>“Then,” replied Diego, gravely, “let us -ask that we may lay our swords upon the -altar of San Sebastian this night and pray -earnestly that we may be worthy to wear our -swords in honor.”</p> - -<p>That night at ten o’clock Diego and Don -Felipe walked through the quiet streets of -Santa Fé, the darkness lighted only by the -watchmen’s lanterns and the watch fires of -the sleeping camp, and the silence broken -only by the warders’ call and the sentries’ -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_132" id="Page_132">[Pg 132]</a></span>challenge. The night was illuminated by a -great white moon hanging high in the blue -heavens and making the world all white -except for the black shadows of the rocks and -hills and forests. The two youths soon -reached the narrow road that led to the little -stone chapel, so lately converted from a -Mohammedan mosque into a place of Christian -worship. They were expected, and at -the tap on the door from the hilt of Diego’s -sword the door was quickly opened from -within and closed after them, leaving them -alone in the solemn darkness of the little -church, lighted only by the faint glow of the -sanctuary lamp. Diego and Don Felipe, -advancing reverently, drew their swords and -laid them on the altar steps, and then, retiring -to a little distance, knelt with reverence. -Through the long hours of the night they -remained on their knees, their minds filled -with solemn and glorious thoughts, striving -to understand their obligations to God and -men, and fortifying their souls with good and -honorable resolutions. The hours slipped by -with strange quickness. A deep and subtle -change was taking place in the heart of each. -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_133" id="Page_133">[Pg 133]</a></span>In those hours they became men. When, at -last, the darkness gave place to the pallid -dawn, they rose from their knees and passed -silently out of the church. As they breathed -the fresh April air and saw the sky, flushed -with the sudden glory of the sunrise, a new -life seemed infused into their bodies and their -souls. They swung rather than walked up -the steep roadway. They felt capable of all -things.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_134" id="Page_134">[Pg 134]</a></span></p> - -<h2 class="no-break">VI<br /> -<small><small>THE HARBOR BAR IS PASSED</small></small></h2></div> - -<p class="no-indent"><span class="dropcap">T</span>HE days that followed were crowded -with events for all. Even Fray Piņa -was forced to suspend the studies of Diego -and Don Felipe, that he might act as secretary -to the Admiral. He, the man once -avoided, was sought by all. Many adventurous -souls, like Ponce de Leon, wished to sail -upon the great voyage; but the Admiral was -careful in making his choice, not taking all -who applied. As in all enterprises of the -sort, men of the higher grades were found; -but the Admiral feared difficulties in getting -foremast men, the sailors to do the actual -work of the promised vessels. This problem -was postponed until the vessels were purchased -and the enlistments were to be made at -Palos and Huelva, places renowned for producing -a race of hardy mariners.</p> - -<p>Every day the Admiral held long confer<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_135" id="Page_135">[Pg 135]</a></span>ences -with the King and the Queen and their -advisers. The high respect with which the -sovereigns, and especially Queen Isabella, -treated the Admiral won for him that kind -of popularity which follows the favor of the -great. All who pretended to be scientists or -mathematicians were eager to be seen in the -company of the Admiral. But Columbus -knew human nature too well to value highly -this kind of favor and maintained an equal -behavior to all. Only those were admitted -to his confidence whom he knew well, like -Juan Perez, Father de Deza, Alonzo de Quintanilla, -Luis de St. Angel, and a few others -equally sincere. Among the great dignitaries -of the court the Cardinal Pedro Gonzalez de -Mendoza had always shown a profound esteem -for the character and attainments of -the Admiral, and to him and certain other -learned men the Admiral felt deeply grateful.</p> - -<p>The Admiral worked hard at his plans, and -every facility was now afforded him. On -May 8, 1492, Queen Isabella redeemed her -promise concerning Diego by appointing him -a page-in-waiting to Prince Juan, giving him -the title of Don, and at the same time pro<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_136" id="Page_136">[Pg 136]</a></span>viding -a modest pension for his maintenance -at court. Thenceforth Diego was Don Diego. -Also Don Felipe, by virtue of his rank and -age, was made a page-in-waiting to Prince -Juan.</p> - -<p>The Admiral, who was to leave Granada in -four days, and who then expected to sail -within a fortnight, asked that Diego be allowed -to remain with him until his departure. -To this the Queen readily assented, and Don -Felipe, who earnestly desired to witness the -sailing of the Admiral, was also permitted to -return to La Rabida with Diego. Both -youths were to report at the same time to -the court. While not yet in attendance -upon Prince Juan, Diego and Don Felipe -often saw him. He seemed to them the embodiment -of honor, courtesy, and modesty.</p> - -<p>Although left more to themselves than they -had ever dreamed possible, Diego and Don -Felipe observed their hours of study without -any compulsion. So inspiring is the association -with noble characters that young minds -thrown with these lofty types of men insensibly -become lofty-minded too. It is true -that the two youths did not make the same -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_137" id="Page_137">[Pg 137]</a></span>progress in their studies as when regularly -schooled; many of their hours were passed -in those brilliant dreams of the future which -are a part of the heritage of youth. But both -became deeply interested in astronomy and -mathematics, sciences of which they heard -much in those days of preparation, and really -did well at them. That which was best, however, -was their voluntary regulation of their -lives, according to their accustomed rules, -when there was no one to compel them.</p> - -<p>On the twelfth day of May, 1492, Diego -once more crossed the bridge of Pinos on his -way to Palos; but in very different case from -that in which he had crossed it on the January -night when the Admiral was halted and turned -back by the Daredevil Knight, Don Tomaso de -Gama. Don Tomaso was with them now, as he -ardently wished to witness the departure of -the Admiral, which it was supposed then to -be a matter of a few days. Alonzo de Quintanilla -went as the representative of the -sovereigns, and Fray Piņa acted as secretary -to the Admiral. Little Fernando and -Brother Lawrence completed the party. Both -Diego and Don Felipe had hoped for a stop, -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_138" id="Page_138">[Pg 138]</a></span>if of a night only, at the castle of Langara, -where Doņa Luisita had remained in the care -of Seņora Julia. But as it was out of the -direct route to Palos, no one thought of it -except the two youths. After the sailing of -the ships, they were to join the court wherever -it might be; and then Doņa Luisita, being now -fifteen, was to be with Doņa Christina at -court.</p> - -<p>The May day was bright and beautiful, -and all were in high spirits, even the Admiral’s -grave face showing a new animation, and his -piercing eyes radiated light. As for Diego -and Don Felipe, they could scarcely forbear -caroling aloud as they trotted along on their -spirited horses in the golden morning. The -little Fernando, whom Brother Lawrence held -before him upon his sturdy mule, laughed, -talked, and sung incessantly without being -checked by any one. Diego’s confidence that -his father would return triumphant became -more than ever a fixed conviction. The -thought of the separation gave him pain; -but the pain was compensated by the anticipation -of the glory that awaited the Admiral’s -return.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_139" id="Page_139">[Pg 139]</a></span></p> - -<p>Diego had hung at his saddle-bow the little -manuscript volume of the poems of Petrarca, -which had been given him by Doņa Christina. -As he rode along he read the soft lines -to Don Felipe, who did not understand Italian -so well as Diego, whose native tongue it -was. Diego became so absorbed in his reading -that he let the reins lie upon his horse’s -neck, while Don Felipe, equally careless, -leaned over, taking one foot out of the stirrup -in order to look at the page Diego was -reading. Suddenly, Don Felipe’s horse stepped -into a deep mud-puddle in the road and came -down on his knees. The next thing Don -Felipe knew he was floundering in the puddle. -Meanwhile, Diego’s horse made a spring to -cross the puddle, and Diego, quite unprepared -for it, slipped off and went down, even -more ignominiously than Don Felipe, on his -back with his heels in the air. In an instant -both scrambled to their feet, their faces scarlet -with mortification, but so covered with -mud that their color was unknown. The -horses stood still, as if pitying them, and the -whole party, led by the Daredevil Knight, -burst into laughter at their predicament. -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_140" id="Page_140">[Pg 140]</a></span>Their chagrin was increased by the Daredevil -Knight sarcastically advising them to change -their horses for old steady-going mules such -as ladies rode in traveling. In vain Diego -and Don Felipe strove to get the mud off -their faces, out of their hair, and from their -clothes. Their bath in the mud-puddle by -no means improved their appearance. They -mounted and rode on, therefore, unable to -reply to the jokes and good-natured taunts -of the rest of the party. They were exceedingly -careful after that and were not again -unhorsed, nor did Diego again tie the book -of his favorite poet to his saddle-bow.</p> - -<p>Every moment of the journey was enjoyed, -however, by the two youths, in spite of their -misadventure in the mud-puddle. They liked -the rapid travel in the soft May air, and at -night, instead of sleeping at the inns like their -elders, they wrapped themselves in their -blankets and cloaks and slept in the open -under the palpitating stars. They talked -of many things in those two quiet nights -spent on the road. They were studying -astronomy, and they pictured to themselves -the ship of the Admiral ploughing its way -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_141" id="Page_141">[Pg 141]</a></span>along into the wide, unknown ocean, and -guided by the planets in their courses. They -mutually resolved that when the Admiral -went upon his second voyage they -would take no denial and would go with -him.</p> - -<p>At last, at nightfall on a warm May evening, -they reached La Rabida. Once more -Diego and Don Felipe slept in the little tower -room and recalled, before they slept, the great -and exciting events which had happened -since they left that quiet place seven months -back. In the morning they waked early, -because on that day at ten o’clock proclamation -was to be made from the steps of the -Church of St. George in Palos of the commands -of King Ferdinand and Queen Isabella concerning -the voyage.</p> - -<p>By sunrise the whole of Palos, of the neighboring -towns of Moguer and Huelva, and the -country-side with its towns and villages, was -astir, palpitating with excitement. For them -the voyage meant much. Each family feared -and dreaded that some of the adventurous -spirits among them would want to go upon -the expedition. It was expected that the -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_142" id="Page_142">[Pg 142]</a></span>ships would be found and manned and made -ready to sail within a fortnight.</p> - -<p>The seafaring people of the Andalusian -coast were brave and adventurous; but the -proposed voyage appalled them. Never in -the history of the world had anything been -known like it. The mariners could face -ordinary and even extreme danger: but to -set forth into the boundless wastes of unknown -seas; to meet mysterious dangers, perhaps -to be engulfed in great abysses; or to -sail on and on until they died of thirst and -starvation; to find land, it might be, peopled -with savages who would murder them on -landing; to encounter frightful monsters on -land and sea which might devour them—these -and many other horrors terrified the -souls of the bravest sailors of the time. Only -once in a great period of time a man is born -with the stupendous courage of Christopher -Columbus.</p> - -<p>The whole population of the region had -begun pouring into Palos very early in the -morning. All classes were represented—mariners -and peasants, cavaliers on horseback, -great nobles with their retinues, mer<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_143" id="Page_143">[Pg 143]</a></span>chants -and ecclesiastics on mule-back—all -eager to hear the royal proclamation. It was -known that the sovereigns had given orders -to impress men and ships, and no man knew -whether he or some of his family might not -be impressed for the voyage or be compelled -to furnish the ships or any part of their -equipment.</p> - -<p>At half-past nine in the brilliant May morning -the cavalcade was to set forth from La -Rabida; but long before that Diego and Don -Felipe, with Brother Lawrence carrying the -little Fernando, had started for Palos and -had taken their places on the porch of the -little stone Church of St. George. Diego held -the little Fernando’s hand with a feeling in -his heart that for the first time he was to take -his father’s place toward the little lad.</p> - -<p>The vast and excited multitudes that -thronged about the church and crowded all -the streets leading to it were in themselves a -great picture.</p> - -<p>A strange hush fell upon all when the head -of the cavalcade from La Rabida appeared at -the top of the street leading to the church. -First rode the Admiral, wearing the costume -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_144" id="Page_144">[Pg 144]</a></span>of black satin with the black cloak in which -he had attended the Queen, and with his -sword at his side. On his right rode Alonzo -de Quintanilla, the Queen’s accountant, who -was to make the proclamation in the name -of King Ferdinand and Queen Isabella. On -the Admiral’s left rode his steady friend, Juan -Perez, Prior of the monastery. Behind them -rode other persons of distinction, including the -three Pinzon brothers, wealthy ship-owners, -Dr. Garcia, and the pilot Rodriguez, who had -been the messenger sent by Juan Perez to -Queen Isabella more than nine years before.</p> - -<p>The Admiral and his friends dismounted, -and were received by the mayor and other -officials of the little town of Palos. They -then took their places upon the porch of the -church; a fanfare of trumpets rang out; and -the mayor, commanding silence in the great -multitude, ordered attention and obedience -to the orders of their Majesties King Ferdinand -and Queen Isabella, to be read by -Alonzo de Quintanilla, their deputy on that -occasion. Then De Quintanilla, standing -next the Admiral, read in a ringing voice -the commands of King Ferdinand and Queen -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_145" id="Page_145">[Pg 145]</a></span>Isabella. The authorities of Palos were to -have two caravels ready for sea within ten -days after this notice, and to place them and -their crews at the disposal of Columbus, who -was empowered to procure and fit out a third -vessel. The crews of all three were to receive -the ordinary wages of seamen employed in -armed vessels and to be given four months’ -pay in advance. They were to sail in such -direction as Columbus, under the royal authority, -should command, and were to obey -him in all things, with merely one stipulation, -that neither he nor they were to go to -St. George la Mina, on the coast of Guinea, -nor any other of the lately discovered possessions -of Portugal. A certificate of their -good conduct, signed by Columbus, was to -be the discharge of their obligation to the -crown.</p> - -<p>Orders were likewise read, addressed to the -public authorities and the people of all ranks -and conditions in the maritime borders of -Andalusia, commanding them to furnish supplies -and assistance of all kinds at reasonable -prices for the fitting out of the vessels; and -penalties were denounced on such as should -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_146" id="Page_146">[Pg 146]</a></span>cause any impediment. No duties were to -be exacted for any articles furnished to the -vessels; and all civil and criminal processes -against the person or property of any individual -engaged in the expedition were to be -suspended during his absence and for two -months after his return.</p> - -<p>When the reading was finished it was received -with a deep and awful silence by the -listening throngs. The mayor of Palos broke -this stillness by making the usual official announcement -of his readiness to obey the orders -of the King and the Queen. Then, with ceremonious -farewells, the Admiral and his party, -joined by Diego and Don Felipe and Brother -Lawrence with the little Fernando, set out -toward La Rabida.</p> - -<p>As they passed through the crowded streets -they could not but observe the fear and dismay -which had taken possession of the people. -Not until then had they fully realized -the desperate nature of the proposed voyage, -and the knowledge that force would be used -if necessary in order to provide vessels and -crews made each one fear that he might be -obliged to go upon this appalling voyage. -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_147" id="Page_147">[Pg 147]</a></span>The men of Palos, Moguer, and Huelva, and -indeed all that part of the Andalusian coast, -were among the boldest mariners of their -day; but it was given to but one man, and -that man Columbus, to advance without fear -into the trackless and unknown ocean. The -time, ten days, seemed frightfully short, and -had been made so purposely that the people -should not have time to become panic-stricken. -But panic-stricken they were; and at the first -moment of triumph to Columbus, when he -stood, in the May morning, on the steps of -the Church of St. George, began for him another -period of new and dreadful trial which -lasted almost three months.</p> - -<p>Never had Diego understood the unparalleled -steadfastness of his father as in those -trying days of La Rabida. Every day some -new difficulty arose. Vessels suitable for the -service mysteriously disappeared. The sailors -and seafaring people of the coast said:</p> - -<p>“We are not cowards, but we are not bold -enough to sail where no keel has ever before -floated, where we know neither winds nor -tides nor the country for which we are steering, -except that it is on the other end of the -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_148" id="Page_148">[Pg 148]</a></span>world. We can die but once, and we would -rather die at home.”</p> - -<p>The feeling against Columbus grew so -strong that when he appeared in the streets -of Palos the people fled from him. Even on -those rare occasions when Diego and Don -Felipe had the privilege of walking in the -town in the evening with the Admiral, and -on the seashore, Diego was pointed at, the -people saying:</p> - -<p>“Poor lad; little good will it do him to be -a royal page at court for a while! He is -already an orphan, and so will the little boy -be fatherless, and he only seven years old.”</p> - -<p>But a handful of brave and intelligent men -remained staunch to the Admiral, especially -the Pinzons, the Prior, Juan Perez, the pilot -Rodriguez, and Dr. Garcia. They had not -the power, however, to compel compliance -with the commands of the Spanish sovereigns. -When the July days came there were still -neither ships nor men provided, and instead -of being able to start early and to return -before the winter set in, as the Admiral confidently -hoped, it looked as if the whole summer -would be gone before the little squadron -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_149" id="Page_149">[Pg 149]</a></span>could be assembled. Early in July Queen -Isabella, hearing of the difficulties in the way, -sent an officer of her household, Juan de -Peņalosa, with still more peremptory orders; -but these were no better obeyed than the -first. Then Martin Alonzo Pinzon and his -brothers, Vicente and Francisco, all experienced -seamen and wealthy ship-owners, accepted -an offer to go as commanders under -the Admiral and to furnish a share of the -equipment. This had some effect in overcoming -the fear and opposition, and at last -three small vessels were secured—the Santa -Maria, which the Admiral chose for his flag-ship, -the Pinta, and the Niņa. Two of these -were caravels, open boats with a high poop -and stern, and only one of the vessels was -decked. Even then there were fresh perplexities. -The calkers among the impressed -crews did the work badly of calking the ships, -and when they were ordered to do it over -again they deserted in a body. The Pinzons -and a few other high-hearted men were inspired -by the dauntless courage of the Admiral; -and by almost superhuman efforts, -through wearisome nights and days, the three -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_150" id="Page_150">[Pg 150]</a></span>vessels were put in readiness and a hundred -and twenty men all told, including a royal -notary, a physician, and a surgeon, were -secured by the first of August.</p> - -<p>In all the anxieties of those terrible preceding -months Diego and Don Felipe had -apparently led the same secluded and studious -life which they had begun in the autumn, -for they had resumed their studies under -Fray Piņa; but they lived in a tumult of soul -which nothing but strong wills and a stern -discipline could have controlled. Each morning -they saw persons coming to the monastery -to confer with the Admiral, to protest, to -complain, to deceive him, and to defy him. -Each evening they saw him weary, but not -discouraged; saddened, but unshaken of soul. -The two youths, from the door of the tower -room opening upon the parapet, could see -much of what was passing, and it was of a -kind to excite and agitate them. They came -to feel even a sort of gratitude to Fray Piņa -for the hours of study so rigidly maintained, -in which they could for a little while forget -some of the painful things surrounding them. -A change was perceptible after the Pinzons -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_151" id="Page_151">[Pg 151]</a></span>took the matter in hand; but there was only -a melancholy acquiescence, a dogged submission, -in the faces of those who were forced -to go upon the voyage of deathless glory, so -little do men know where honor lies.</p> - -<p>The Admiral had fixed upon Wednesday, the -first of August, as the day to sail; but on that -day it fell dead calm, and there was no prospect -of going to sea. On Thursday it remained -calm until late in the afternoon, when -a breeze sprung up that grew stronger as -night fell and gave promise of continuance. -Then the Admiral sent forth the order that -the ships, which lay outside the bar of Saltes -would sail on Friday morning, half an hour -before sunrise. Many of the sailors were -superstitious about sailing on the Friday; -but the Admiral’s strong soul was above such -petty and groundless fears, and his order was -that every man of the crews should report on -board by daybreak. All through that agitating -day Diego did not see the Admiral -except when they supped together in the refectory, -where no word was spoken, as usual, -during the meal, except for the reading of -the Scriptures. Never had the Admiral ap<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_152" id="Page_152">[Pg 152]</a></span>peared -calmer or more unshaken. When the -simple meal was over and all were leaving -the refectory, the Admiral called Diego and -said:</p> - -<p>“My son, to-night at nine o’clock come to -me in my chamber. There will I speak with -you.”</p> - -<p>All through that day Diego had felt as if -he were in a dream. He had not the least -doubt of his father’s return, but when the -moment of parting came he felt all the sharpness -of its pain. Not even Don Felipe could -comfort him then. He spent the time from -supper until nine o’clock sitting on the parapet -outside the tower room, his eyes fixed upon -the far-off ocean, illuminated by a great white -moon. Don Felipe sat within the room, his -heart full of sympathy for Diego, who said -nothing to him; but when his eye fell upon -his friend a little sense of comfort stole into -his heart. It was Don Felipe who came out -upon the parapet and said:</p> - -<p>“Diego, it is close to nine o’clock.”</p> - -<p>Diego rose and went down the long corridor -to his father’s room and knocked at -the door, which the Admiral immediately -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_153" id="Page_153">[Pg 153]</a></span>opened. The room was in a corner of the -monastery, and through its four small windows -the moon made patches of white light -upon the stone floor. On a little pallet by -the Admiral’s bed the little Fernando slept -peacefully.</p> - -<p>Diego sat down on a bench beside his father, -his arm around the Admiral’s neck, and he -was not ashamed of the tears that dropped -upon his cheeks.</p> - -<p>“What I have to say to you is brief,” said -the Admiral, “but never to be forgotten, -whether I return or not. First, it is that you -shall be a Christian; that includes everything—honor, -probity, all that makes a man, -and especially courage, for God hates a coward. -Then I confide to you your brother. -You are to set him an example in every way -and to be tender with him, remembering that -he is so young a child. In my absence he is -to remain here under the charge of the Prior, -and good Brother Lawrence to take care of -him. The noble lady, Doņa Christina, has -promised to keep informed concerning the -child, and if he should be ill to take care of -him. The Prior is to communicate with her -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_154" id="Page_154">[Pg 154]</a></span>as often as possible concerning the child. -The noble lady and the Prior will have a care -for the child; but to you, his brother, I intrust -him in the end.”</p> - -<p>“I swear to you, my father,” answered -Diego, “to do as you have commanded by -my brother, and I will try to live so that when -we next meet, whether it be in this world -or in the other, I can look you in the eye, -as I do now, and say I have kept my word -to you.”</p> - -<p>“There speaks my son,” replied the Admiral. -“Now, concerning to-morrow, the most -important day in my life. I shall confess -myself this night to the Prior, and I desire -you to do the same, and hope that Don -Felipe may do likewise. At daybreak, in -the Church of St. George, I desire that you -receive Holy Communion with me and with -all those who sail with me. We go not as -unbelievers, but as men humbly asking God’s -help in crossing His oceans, guided by His stars -by night and His sun by day, and sustained -by His protecting hand. Go now and sleep.”</p> - -<p>“Give me your blessing, and I will go,” replied -Diego.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_155" id="Page_155">[Pg 155]</a></span></p> - -<p>Then, kneeling by little Fernando’s pallet, -the Admiral blessed both his sons, a hand -upon the head of each. Diego rose, soothed -and comforted. He felt that he must show -the same cool courage as his father, and the -Admiral’s words “God hates a coward” remained -fixed in his mind.</p> - -<p>Diego returned to the parapet outside of -the tower room, from which he watched the -far-off sea. There was little sleep in the -monastery or in Palos that night.</p> - -<p>The wind still held, and the August night -grew chill; but Diego did not know it. Don -Felipe, however, brought his cloak and wrapped -it around him. The moon swung high -in the dark-blue sky and made a path of -glory across the sea that reached to heaven. -As Diego heard the chime of the midnight -bell of the monastery he saw a dark figure -come out of the iron gate and walk quickly -down the white road toward the little town. -It was the Admiral, who spent the night on -his knees in the Church of St. George.</p> - -<p>At daybreak Diego and Don Felipe, with -Fray Piņa, the Prior, and all of the monks -of the monastery, including the lay brothers, -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_156" id="Page_156">[Pg 156]</a></span>Brother Lawrence carrying the little Fernando -in his arms, walked in the cool, sweet -dawning to Palos and into the church. Every -one of the one hundred and twenty men of -all classes who were to sail upon the great -voyage was in the church, which was also -filled with their relatives and friends, even -the church porch being crowded and the -narrow street packed with persons. A deep -and solemn silence pervaded. The wives and -families of the officers, especially the Pinzons, -showed calmness and courage in order to sustain -the more ignorant and timid. The Prior, -Juan Perez, from the steps of the altar within -the church, spoke with deep and solemn feeling -to those who were to sail within an hour. -The Admiral, taking Diego by the hand, advanced -at the proper time to the Communion -rail, where he received the Blessed Sacrament, -as did all of his men and many other persons, -with the deepest reverence, including Diego -and Don Felipe. When the short religious -service was over the men filed out of the -church and, after a last farewell to their -families and friends, marched straight to the -shore; the Admiral wished to make those -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_157" id="Page_157">[Pg 157]</a></span>last painful moments as brief as possible. -The vessels were lying in midstream off the bar -of Saltes, and their boats were at the quay -ready to take the crews out. Hundreds of -other boats lay in the stream to accompany -them a short distance to sea.</p> - -<p>The Admiral, on reaching the quay where -his own boat awaited him, was surrounded by -his captains, Martin Alonzo Pinzon and Vicente -Pinzon, and his three pilots, Sancho Ruiz, -Pedro Alonzo Niņo, and Bartolomeo Roldan.</p> - -<p>Every eye was fixed upon the Admiral. -All realized that upon him, upon his courage, -his science, and his judgment, rested the lives -and fortunes of every man with him. Never -had the Admiral appeared so serenely great. -Fortified by a deep religious faith, conscious -of his own powers, he faced the unknown -with an indomitable courage. None who -beheld him on that day doubted that this -man, Columbus, was born a captain.</p> - -<p>“Here,” said he, to his companions and -pilots, in a clear voice that made itself heard -afar, “do I give you my order as your -Admiral, and it is to be strictly obeyed. If -you should become separated from me and -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_158" id="Page_158">[Pg 158]</a></span>beyond the reach of signals, lay your course -due west, and when you have sailed seven -hundred and fifty leagues from this port -make no more sail after midnight, for there -will be land off your quarter. Do you understand?”</p> - -<p>“And we will obey,” shouted the captains -and the pilots, led by the strong voice of -Martin Pinzon.</p> - -<p>The boldness of this stern order thrilled -and captivated the awed and sullen throngs, -and an involuntary cheer broke from them. -The Admiral smiled and raised his hat in -salute.</p> - -<p>He stepped into his boat, followed by Diego -and the little Fernando, and led the procession -down the bright river to the vessels -tugging at their anchors off the bar. As the -Admiral’s boat reached the side of the Santa -Maria the Admiral stood up and, taking the -little Fernando in his arms, kissed and blessed -him. Then he clasped Diego in his arms, -kissing and blessing him likewise, without -agitation on either side. Diego felt as if the -wine of courage were pouring into his veins. -He was so quiet, so smiling, so at ease, that -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_159" id="Page_159">[Pg 159]</a></span>he seemed worthy to be the son of his father. -The little Fernando wept when the Admiral, -from the Santa Maria’s poop, waved his -hand back at the child; but Diego, taking -the boy in his arms, said cheerfully:</p> - -<p>“Do not weep, Fernando. Our father will -return, bringing you wonderful things never -seen before in Spain, and he will at once ask -if you have been good and brave. If you -weep you will be neither good nor brave.”</p> - -<p>The little boy was soothed by Diego’s -calmness, and waved his small hand cheerfully -back at his father.</p> - -<p>The boats returned to the quays, which -were crowded with a multitude of persons, -who made way respectfully for the sons of -the Admiral. The ships then hoisted their -sails, and with a fair wind slipped out into -the open sea. The sky was glowing, and the -earth and sea basked in a rose-red light shot -with gold. As the three little vessels became -white specks upon the horizon, where the -blue sea met the bluer sky, the great sun -suddenly burst forth in splendor; the vessels -disappeared in the golden light which flooded -the world with glory.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_160" id="Page_160">[Pg 160]</a></span></p> - -<h2 class="no-break">VII<br /> -<small><small>THE JOYOUS HEARTS OF YOUTH</small></small></h2></div> - -<p class="no-indent"><span class="dropcap">“D</span>IEGO, DIEGO, wake up! Suppose -you should be caught napping like -this; you would have a hard time with the -master of the pages, I can tell you!”</p> - -<p>Diego opened his eyes, sprang to his feet, -assumed a military attitude, and was all -awake in a moment. It was Don Felipe who -spoke, and they were in a splendid corridor -of the palace at Barcelona. It was magnificently -carpeted from the looms of Granada; -and long, narrow windows let in a flood -of sunshine upon splendid pictures on the -walls, which were decorated with trophies of -arms, the great curved simitars of the Moors -with jeweled handles, Moorish shields and -breastplates cunningly wrought with gold, -and marvelous daggers and other arms. White -statues gleamed against the dark-red walls, -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_161" id="Page_161">[Pg 161]</a></span>and everywhere were the beauty and splendor -of a royal palace.</p> - -<p>As Don Felipe spoke the great carved doors -at the farther end of the corridor were thrown -wide, and Queen Isabella, with a glittering -suite of ladies and gentlemen in attendance, -was seen about to enter. At the threshold, -however, the Queen paused. The great Cardinal, -Pedro Gonzalez de Mendoza, the first -subject in Spain, appeared, followed by his -secretary. The Cardinal saluted the Queen -with profound respect, who engaged in conversation -with him. Both Diego and Don -Felipe recognized the Cardinal at once, a -tall, handsome man of commanding appearance, -wearing a black robe edged with scarlet -and a black and scarlet skull-cap, while around -his neck hung a gold chain from which depended -a superb cross of jewels.</p> - -<p>Diego and Don Felipe, standing side by -side, their right hands upon their sword-hilts, -their left hands raised at the salute, could yet -talk without being heard by the Queen and -her train at the end of the long corridor.</p> - -<p>“I told you,” said Don Felipe, in a whisper, -without turning his head, “that you would -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_162" id="Page_162">[Pg 162]</a></span>find the master of the pages a much more -difficult person than Fray Piņa. Suppose you -had been caught asleep while waiting for the -Queen?”</p> - -<p>“I should have been mortified beyond -words,” whispered Diego, as motionless as -Don Felipe. “But the truth is that, with -rising at four o’clock and having the horse -exercise and the sword exercise and then -studying and standing many hours and doing -many errands and sitting up late at night, -I am sometimes half dead for want of sleep.”</p> - -<p>“It is not an easy business, being at court,” -was Don Felipe’s answer.</p> - -<p>Then, as they saw the Queen advancing, -they remained respectfully silent. The Queen -was dressed as usual with quiet splendor, but -wearing few jewels. She wore a robe of -crimson cloth, and her beautiful auburn hair -was as usual coifed with pearls. Doņa Christina -walked a short distance behind the -Queen.</p> - -<p>As she approached, talking in a low voice -with the Cardinal, who walked by her side, -and followed by Doņa Christina and a number -of ladies and gentlemen of the court, the -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_163" id="Page_163">[Pg 163]</a></span>Queen was so absorbed in what she was saying -that she did not observe either Diego or -Don Felipe. Her voice was pitched low, -almost a whisper; but both youths heard -her say distinctly to the Cardinal:</p> - -<p>“And so, my Lord Cardinal, the rumor has -come from Portugal that the caravels were -seen entering the Tagus on the fourth day of -March. It is unconfirmed, and in some respects -improbable. Why should the Admiral -land in Portugal before coming to Spain?”</p> - -<p>“He may have put in by stress of weather -or for repairs, madam,” the Cardinal replied, -in a low and earnest voice. “Many unforeseen -things might induce the Admiral to make -the first port possible if, indeed, he has returned -from that strange voyage.”</p> - -<p>The Queen glanced backward and seemed -to grow suddenly conscious of the presence -of Diego and Don Felipe. Diego’s ruddy -face had turned deadly pale, although he still -maintained his rigid military attitude.</p> - -<p>“Come here, Don Diego,” said the Queen, -stopping, “and you, Don Felipe. Tell me -when does the exercise in the mančge begin -for Prince Juan and the pages?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_164" id="Page_164">[Pg 164]</a></span></p> - -<p>“In half an hour, madam,” responded -Diego, advancing and bowing low as the Queen -spoke.</p> - -<p>“Then we shall have the pleasure of seeing -the exercises in the mančge,” said the Queen, -in her usual gracious manner. “Doņa Christina, -will you say to the Princess Katharine -and to Doņa Luisita that they may be present -to see the exercises in the mančge?”</p> - -<p>The Queen resumed her earnest conversation -with the Cardinal, and the rest of the -suite passed on. When the great doors at -the other end of the corridor had closed after -the royal train, Don Felipe said to Diego:</p> - -<p>“You heard the Queen’s words, and what -the Cardinal replied?”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” answered Diego. “It seemed as if -my heart stopped beating. Now it thumps -hard enough, I can tell you.”</p> - -<p>“But there is no time to count heart-beats,” -said Don Felipe. “We have not a moment -to spare if we are to be ready in half an hour -for the mančge.”</p> - -<p>Without another word both ran the long -length of the corridor, through various winding -passages, and up a narrow stairway until -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_165" id="Page_165">[Pg 165]</a></span>they came to the rooms of Prince Juan, where -Diego knocked. Prince Juan, who was alone, -himself opened the door. He inherited his -mother’s noble simplicity of character, and, -while fully understanding the duties of his -position, he treated his pages, all youths of -his own age, like companions of his own rank.</p> - -<p>“The Queen and her ladies will be present -in the mančge,” breathlessly burst out Don -Felipe, “and we thought your Highness would -wish to know it.”</p> - -<p>“Certainly I should. Many thanks, Felipe,” -cried Prince Juan. “When the Queen -honors our exercises we must show at our best.”</p> - -<p>Prince Juan ran down the stairs, breakneck, -followed by Diego and Don Felipe, -through the winding passages, across the wide -courtyard, into a long colonnade that led to -the great circular riding-school. It was an -immense space covered with tan-bark, with -galleries for spectators. Adjoining it was a -large room surrounded with alcoves, in which -the arms and riding paraphernalia were kept. -This room was soon filled with the pages, -twenty youths, all lithe, active, and eager to -show their accomplishments before the Queen. -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_166" id="Page_166">[Pg 166]</a></span>All, including Prince Juan, disappeared within -their alcoves, where there were valets to assist -them in changing their clothes. They kept -up, meanwhile, much talk and laughter, Prince -Juan joining as an equal in their merry preparation. -One only, Don Diego de Colon, -usually the merriest of them all, was silent. -In a few minutes they trooped out, dressed -in leather surcoats and riding-breeches and -boots with huge spurs, and wearing light -helmets. Prince Juan was dressed exactly -like the others, except that on his helmet was -engraved a small crown, and on the breast -of his jacket of Cordovan leather was also -a small crown embroidered in gold. The -young prince noticed the silence and pallor -of Diego, and, going up to him, put his arm -kindly within Diego’s, saying:</p> - -<p>“What is the matter, Don Diego? You -are as solemn as an owl.”</p> - -<p>“There is a report abroad, so I heard her -Majesty the Queen say to the Cardinal de -Mendoza, that the ships of my father, the -Admiral, had been seen in the Tagus. That -is enough to make one silent, is it not, your -Highness?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_167" id="Page_167">[Pg 167]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Indeed it is,” replied Prince Juan. “For -my part, I often dream at night that the -Admiral has returned and has discovered a -new world for Spain. Ah, Don Diego, what -a great day that will be for Spain!”</p> - -<p>There was no time to say more as the -trumpet-call sounded for the riding-hall, into -which the pages now marched. The grooms -were bringing in the chargers, the finest breeds -of Andalusia, celebrated for its horses, their -coats like satin, their muscles like steel, their -hoofs black and polished. The horses knew -well enough for what they were brought, and -were keen for the sport. Before mounting, -Don Tomaso de Gama, the Daredevil Knight, -reckoned the most accomplished horseman in -Spain and master of the riding-school, appeared. -He, too, wore riding-dress and a -glittering casque. He gave the order at -once to mount, that they might have a warming-up -canter before the Queen and her ladies -arrived. Then began a quick gallop around -the circular space, the horses’ hoofs sounding -softly on the tan-bark. In a few minutes the -signal was given to retire, and the young -horsemen all filed out through an arched -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_168" id="Page_168">[Pg 168]</a></span>gateway into the great courtyard of the -stables beyond.</p> - -<p>At this moment the Queen, preceded and -followed by her ladies and attended by several -gentlemen and escorted by the Cardinal, -entered the ladies’ gallery. The Queen sat -with Doņa Christina on one side of her and -the Cardinal on the other. Many ladies were -sitting on chairs behind her, and on the step -below the Queen’s chair the Princess Katharine -and Doņa Luisita sat on silken cushions. -Doņa Luisita looked no longer a child, but a -charming young lady.</p> - -<p>Four trumpeters with silver trumpets were -stationed at the farther side of the great -circular hall, and at a signal from the Queen -played a fanfare. At that the doors under -the archway were flung open, and the long -line of pages entered headed by Prince Juan. -As he dashed through the great archway, -sitting square and steady upon a splendid -black horse, the Queen’s eyes lighted up with -pleasure at the appearance of this gallant -youth.</p> - -<p>When Prince Juan came abreast of the -Queen’s gallery, he pulled up quickly, the -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_169" id="Page_169">[Pg 169]</a></span>horse rising for a moment on his haunches -and then standing like a statue, as Prince -Juan saluted first the Queen and then the -other ladies present. The same thing was -done by each of the twenty pages, every -charger acting with an intelligence almost -human. When the Daredevil Knight, the -master of riding, brought up the rear of the -line, his horse, too—a sinewy chestnut charger—stood -on his haunches and then came down -gracefully on his knees as if making an obeisance -to the Queen, then rose and stood as -still as a bronze horse. The Queen was -charmed with this pretty trick of horsemanship, -and, leaning over, bowed and smiled and -waved her hand to the Daredevil Knight. -Then the exercises began, Prince Juan always -riding first and the Daredevil Knight last. -They galloped around the ring twice to show -their manner of ordinary riding. Then the -grooms brought four rings, which they hung -at the four quarters of the circle; and the -pages, with glittering lances, rode around, -taking the rings as they went. Some took -all the rings, while others took only three or -sometimes two. Next a stuffed horse with a -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_170" id="Page_170">[Pg 170]</a></span>manikin mounted on him was rolled in; and -each young horseman, galloping by at full -speed, had to knock off the manikin’s head -with a single blow of the sword, and again -passing it had to dismount at full speed, -taking up the head, and mount again. This -was most exciting, and some of the pages -failed to get the head. Prince Juan, however, -succeeded in getting it each time. There were -various other tricks of horsemanship shown -which amused and delighted the Queen and her -ladies, especially the Princess Katharine and -Doņa Luisita. In one of the feats, Prince Juan -galloping past the gallery, his horse apparently -shied and unseated him. A cry of dismay -went up which changed to a burst of applause -when Prince Juan sprang back and stood up on -his horse’s back, galloping around the tan-bark -in that fashion, followed by all the other pages. -All through Diego and Don Felipe acquitted -themselves with credit. It was usually the -pleasantest hour of the day with them all, -this hour in the mančge, and when there -were no spectators it was a time of jokes and -merriment. But Diego felt as if he were in -another world. He went through his part -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_171" id="Page_171">[Pg 171]</a></span>well, but mechanically, and his look was so -grave that Doņa Luisita whispered to the -Princess Katharine:</p> - -<p>“What can be the matter with Don Diego -to-day? His body may be here, but his mind -is somewhere else.”</p> - -<p>When all was over the Queen sent for Don -Tomaso and questioned him upon the proficiency -of her son and his companions. The -Daredevil Knight, who was as frank as he -was brave, assured the Queen that Prince -Juan was an admirable horseman, but there -were several of the pages who surpassed him. -Don Felipe he considered the best horseman -of them all.</p> - -<p>“I believe what you tell me,” replied Queen -Isabella, “for I see that you tell the truth -and are no flatterer and do not tell me that -my son excels all, although I see that he does -well.”</p> - -<p>The nobility of the Queen was such that -all about her were encouraged to tell the -truth, and not to seek to deceive by flattery -and falsehood.</p> - -<p>It was nearly six o’clock when the pages -left the riding-hall, and in a half-hour they -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_172" id="Page_172">[Pg 172]</a></span>were washed and dressed in their ordinary -clothes and were seated at supper at the long -table in their dining-hall. Everything was -good but plain, as it was the wish of the King -and the Queen to bring Prince Juan up as a -soldier rather than a courtier. At one end of -the table sat the great Duke of Medina Cœli, -governor of the pages; and at the other end -sat Don Tomaso de Gama, the Daredevil -Knight. The Duke was a rigid governor, -and made no difference in his discipline between -Prince Juan and any of the other -youths under his charge. The sovereigns interfered -in no way with this discipline, and -Prince Juan had to ask permission from the -stern Duke for everything he wished to do, -as much as any of his attendant pages. Nevertheless, -the governor had a kindly heart. He -encouraged the pages to talk at their meals, -using this as a means of discovering their -natural temper and disposition. They often -spoke with the enthusiastic hopes of boyhood -of the return of the Admiral; their patriotism -was aroused in his favor; and they looked forward -with eager confidence to the day when -he would add a magnificent empire to the -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_173" id="Page_173">[Pg 173]</a></span>Kingdom of Spain. This had secured for -Diego perfect good-will among his companions, -none of whom had ever taunted him -with his humble origin or had spoken of his -father except with the highest respect.</p> - -<p>On this evening a singular silence prevailed -at the pages’ supper. The young men spoke -in undertones among themselves, and Diego -was conscious that strange looks were cast -upon him. When supper was over and the -pages, with Prince Juan, retired to their -study-hall, where they had an hour of study, -Diego found out the cause of the silence -and suppressed excitement. The pages -crowded around him; and Prince Juan, acting -as spokesman, said:</p> - -<p>“Two reports have come this day, Diego; -one that Captain Martin Alonzo Pinzon has -landed at Bayonne, and the other that your -father, the Admiral, has returned in a caravel -which is anchored in the Tagus. I do not -know who was the messenger that brought -the letter from Captain Pinzon, nor the person -who brought the news from Portugal.”</p> - -<p>“But it is true, my Prince!” shouted Diego, -raising his arms in triumph above his head. -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_174" id="Page_174">[Pg 174]</a></span>“I know it, I feel it! For a fortnight past I -have had the feeling that my father was -nearing land. The stories of the dreadful -storms and tempests have not frightened me. -Each day my father has been in my mind, -and I dream every night of him. Ah, my -Prince, it is true!”</p> - -<p>Then, seizing Don Felipe in his strong arms, -the two youths hugged each other and rubbed -their cheeks together in a rapture of boyish -affection. Their companions around them -broke into an involuntary cheer, led by Prince -Juan. They were young and sanguine, and -found it easy to believe in anything which -redounded to the glory and honor of their -country.</p> - -<p>Over the noise a ringing voice was heard at -the door, that of the Daredevil Knight.</p> - -<p>“The presence of Don Diego de Colon is -required by the governor of the pages.”</p> - -<p>An instant silence fell upon the shouting -and cheering youths. They could see through -the open door the soldierly figure of the governor, -who in general permitted no noisy -outbreaks; but to-night he said no word and -uttered no rebuke. The door closed imm<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_175" id="Page_175">[Pg 175]</a></span>ediately -after Diego, and the Duke said to -him:</p> - -<p>“Come with me at once, Don Diego, to the -presence of her Majesty.”</p> - -<p>Diego followed the Duke and Don Tomaso -as they rapidly walked through the halls and -corridors of the palace toward the wing occupied -by the Queen and the King. Nothing was -said except a brief inquiry made by the Duke -of Don Tomaso as to when King Ferdinand -might be expected to return from a hunting -expedition upon which he had that day -started.</p> - -<p>“In five days the King will return,” was -Don Tomaso’s reply.</p> - -<p>When they reached the door of the Queen’s -private apartments it was opened at once by -Doņa Christina. The Queen was alone except -for her favorite lady-in-waiting and -Cardinal Mendoza. For the first time in all -the years that Diego had seen the Queen, she -showed deep agitation. Usually of calm demeanor, -she was that night extremely restless, -sometimes sitting in her stately chair, -again rising and walking about the small but -richly furnished room lighted with silver -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_176" id="Page_176">[Pg 176]</a></span>lamps. As soon as Diego entered, the Queen -spoke to him kindly, saying to the Duke:</p> - -<p>“Tell Don Diego what we have heard.”</p> - -<p>Then the Duke spoke.</p> - -<p>“A Portuguese merchant has just arrived, -reporting that on the third of March, the -weather off the mouth of the Tagus being -very wild and stormy, a caravel was seen in -great distress. The tempest continued very -violent all that day, and the caravel was in -great danger of being dashed to pieces on the -rock of Cintra. The people watched it all -day, making many prayers for the mariners -in such peril, but unable to be of any assistance -to them. The storm continued the best part -of the night, but subsided, and the next morning -broke fair and sunny. The caravel had -survived and was entering the mouth of the -Tagus with a fair wind. It was said to be -the Niņa with the Admiral, your father, in -command, and several men of a strange race -on board with animals and objects hitherto -unknown. The merchant says that a large -Portuguese ship-of-war, commanded by Don -Alonzo d’Acunha, one of the greatest captains -in Portugal, was anchored in the Tagus, and -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_177" id="Page_177">[Pg 177]</a></span>that Don Alonzo sent a boat to the caravel -commanding that her captain report on board -the Portuguese ship to give an account of -himself. The caravel’s commander refused -to go, sending word in reply that he outranked -Don Alonzo d’Acunha, being under -letters patent of the King of Arragon and the -Queen of Castile, Admiral of the Ocean Seas, -Viceroy and Captain-General of all lands to -the westward. He therefore desired that -Don Alonzo d’Acunha, as his inferior in rank, -should pay him a visit of ceremony.”</p> - -<p>“That was my father!” cried Diego, forgetful -of all etiquette, his soul in a tumult of -pride and joy.</p> - -<p>The Queen, who was walking about the -room restlessly while the Duke spoke, instead -of rebuking the lad, came up to him and, laying -a hand upon his shoulder, said, smiling -proudly:</p> - -<p>“And there your father showed the true and -lofty spirit of a Spanish admiral. Small -might be his ship, but great must be his soul. -Happy am I in having an admiral who knows -so well how to maintain the honor of his -flag.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_178" id="Page_178">[Pg 178]</a></span></p> - -<p>The Queen sat down, her face aglow, her -eyes sparkling; and, turning to Doņa Christina, -she put her hand in that of her lady-in-waiting -and said:</p> - -<p>“We are but women; but we have hearts -like men.”</p> - -<p>Diego stood throbbing and palpitating and -longing to hear more. The Duke continued -quickly:</p> - -<p>“The merchant left Portugal soon after -this happened. There are, however, some -discrepancies in his story. He says that the -caravel was the Niņa, while the Admiral -sailed in the Santa Maria. The merchant -also says that the caravel’s commander was -to proceed to Lisbon instead of coming direct -to a Spanish port. Again, at almost the same -moment the Portuguese merchant appeared, -a messenger came bearing a letter from Captain -Martin Alonzo Pinzon, at the port of -Bayonne, saying that land was found to the -westward; but that he was separated from -the Admiral many weeks ago and knows not -if he still survives. All might be explained -except the persistence with which the Portuguese -merchant insists that the commander -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_179" id="Page_179">[Pg 179]</a></span>of the caravel was undoubtedly going to -Lisbon, and that he saw, before leaving, the -preparations to travel thence by land.”</p> - -<p>Then the Cardinal said:</p> - -<p>“If the King of Portugal commanded the -Admiral to come to Lisbon, he could scarcely -refuse. And, in that event, how poignant -must be the regret of the King of Portugal, -who abandoned the glorious project offered -him by the Admiral and left it to your -Majesty and King Ferdinand to reap the -glory of it.”</p> - -<p>“Ah!” cried the Queen. “Once more have -you, my Lord Cardinal, spoken words of wisdom. -One thing seems certain, two of the -ships have returned. How unfortunate it is -the King is not here! However, if more definite -news comes, I will send messengers for -the King. You may go now, Don Diego. I -will send a messenger to La Rabida telling -the Prior, Juan Perez, of what we have -heard.”</p> - -<p>Then Diego’s soul became possessed with -courage. He went up to the Queen’s chair -and, kneeling on one knee, said:</p> - -<p>“Will your Majesty pardon me for what -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_180" id="Page_180">[Pg 180]</a></span>I am about to ask? May I go with that -messenger to La Rabida? My father gave -his word that unless driven elsewhere by -stress of weather he would make his first -landing in Spain at the port of Palos. I saw -him depart, my Queen, and a voice like the -voice of God spoke in my heart, saying, ‘He -will return with immortal glory.’ His first -thought next his sovereigns will be for his -sons, for me and my little brother. If my -father lands at Palos and I am not there, it -will give him a pang, for my father loves his -children with all his heart. May I go, my -Queen? Oh, let me go, let me go, my Queen!”</p> - -<p>Diego, in his eagerness, had laid his hand -upon the Queen’s robe. Her eyes, ever -kind, grew more kindly; but while maintaining -her own authority well she never forgot -the authority of others. She turned to the -Duke and said, smiling:</p> - -<p>“My Lord Duke, can you spare this young -man from his duties and studies for a little -while. It is an occasion which so far has -never arisen but this once in the life of a -royal page.”</p> - -<p>“If your Majesty requests it,” replied the -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_181" id="Page_181">[Pg 181]</a></span>Duke, “leave shall be given to Don Diego, -and I agree with your Majesty that the occasion -is so great that Don Diego may well be -excused.”</p> - -<p>Diego, overjoyed, kissed the Queen’s hand -and thanked the Duke. The Queen nodded -by way of dismissal. It was then obviously -time for Diego to retire; but he stood irresolutely -glancing toward the door, but apparently -unwilling to leave. He looked imploringly -at Doņa Christina, who, smiling, went toward -him. The next moment the Duke smiled -and the Queen laughed outright as they heard -Diego say to Doņa Christina, in a loud -whisper:</p> - -<p>“Oh, how much would Don Felipe like to -see the caravel come in!”</p> - -<p>“I am sure he would,” responded Don -Felipe’s mother, amused at Diego’s straight-forward -simplicity.</p> - -<p>Then Diego, looking around and seeing -only smiling faces, went and knelt before the -Queen.</p> - -<p>“Your Majesty,” he said, “together Don -Felipe and I saw the caravel depart. Don -Felipe believed in my father as much as I do, -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_182" id="Page_182">[Pg 182]</a></span>and if he had not we should not have been -like brothers, but we should have fought like -tigers. Don Felipe was ever good to me from -the beginning. He was a grandee of Spain, -and I was the son of a poor Genoese navigator; -but Don Felipe never let me feel the difference -between us. He has ever been the best -of friends and comrades to me, and now for -me to see the caravel come in and Don Felipe -not to—”</p> - -<p>Diego sighed heavily, while the Queen and -all present could not forbear smiling.</p> - -<p>“Could you, my Lord Duke, grant the request -of this young man?” asked the Queen.</p> - -<p>The Duke hesitated a moment, and Diego -thought he would be refused. He rose, the -picture of dejection, and, hanging his head, -said mournfully:</p> - -<p>“Poor, poor Felipe!”</p> - -<p>The Queen at that laughed once more. -Diego, turning to Doņa Christina, said sadly:</p> - -<p>“Madam, I would ask you to plead for -Don Felipe with the Duke; but if the Duke -will not grant the Queen’s request I am -afraid he will not listen to any one else.”</p> - -<p>“But I shall obey the Queen’s wishes,” -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_183" id="Page_183">[Pg 183]</a></span>said the Duke. “I will give Don Felipe leave -also; but you are to start upon your return -two days after the caravel arrives.”</p> - -<p>A thrill ran through Diego, his eyes shone, -his mouth opened wide with delight; and -Queen Isabella, who understood youth well, -nodded to him again as a sign of dismissal. -Diego retained his senses enough to make -an obeisance to the Queen and low bows to -the Cardinal, the Duke, and Doņa Christina. -Then, slipping out of the door, he ran like a -deer back to the hall of the pages. As he -entered it Prince Juan sprang forward and, -clasping him around the neck, shouted:</p> - -<p>“Tell us all, all, all!”</p> - -<p>The other pages, with Don Felipe, clustered -around; and Diego, with Prince Juan’s arm -about his neck, poured forth the story told -by the Portuguese merchant, and also the -news that the Pinta had arrived at Bayonne.</p> - -<p>“And the Duke has given me leave, and -Don Felipe, too, to go to Palos immediately -to see the caravel come in. I knew that it -would be so hard for him to stay here when -I went to Palos and saw all the people crowd<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_184" id="Page_184">[Pg 184]</a></span>ing -the quays and shores and the caravel -come sailing in with my father on the poop.”</p> - -<p>“And why,” cried Prince Juan, shaking -Diego, “cannot I see that glorious sight as -well as you and Don Felipe?”</p> - -<p>“Because your Highness is a royal prince,” -answered Diego. “Your Highness cannot run -about the country as we do. We are not -heirs to thrones, we are not so important, and -so we have more liberty.”</p> - -<p>The door opened, and Father de Deza, tutor -to Prince Juan and master of studies, entered. -Instantly all sat down and took their books, -Prince Juan with the others, but the minds -of all were elsewhere speculating upon the -glorious discovery, the gain of new worlds -for Spain.</p> - -<p>It was the way of the Duke to act quickly, -and the next day by noon Diego and Don -Felipe were starting off with a party consisting -of Don Tomaso de Gama, Alonzo de Quintanilla, -the Queen’s accountant, and a dozen -men-at-arms. De Quintanilla was to make -official records of the return of the ship, to -take charge of important papers, and carried -a letter from Queen Isabella to the Admiral.</p> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_185" id="Page_185">[Pg 185]</a></span></p> -<p>As the cavalcade trotted out of the courtyard -of the palace, Prince Juan, watching from -a window and surrounded by all the pages, -wore a melancholy countenance; he longed -to be of the travelers. From another window -on a level with the heads of Diego and -Don Felipe watched Doņa Christina and -Doņa Luisita. The last picture impressed -upon Diego’s mind, as he rode out of the courtyard -in the cavalcade, was Doņa Luisita’s -soft and beautiful eyes gazing after him. But -his absence was not likely to be longer than -eight or ten days, and never did a young man -set out on a journey which meant more of -hope and happiness than did Diego. The -return of his father not only meant the sight -of the best and tenderest of fathers returning -from a long and hazardous voyage, but it -meant a triumph for the Admiral so great -that Diego was dazzled as he contemplated -it. How insignificant appeared the greatest -title by that of the Admiral of the Ocean -Seas, Viceroy and Captain-General of all -Lands to the Westward! It meant unending -fame for the Admiral and splendor for all his -descendants. Diego remained silent as they -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_186" id="Page_186">[Pg 186]</a></span>passed through the narrow streets of the town -of Barcelona, skirted the harbor, bright in -the spring sun, and the blue Mediterranean -beyond. Soon they were in the open country. -It was the ninth day of March, and the vegetation -in the sunny climate of southern Spain -was already well advanced. When they -struck the highway through the forests there -was a faint, delicate green upon the trees, -and the sweet and pungent odor of the coming -leaves perfumed the air. In the fields -the peasants tilled the rich earth and laughed -and sang as they toiled.</p> - -<p>Don Tomaso was the leader likely to be -most popular with youths of the age of Diego -and Don Felipe. He rode ahead, trolling in -his rich voice the canzonets and popular -ballads of the day—all relating to love and -war. His famous chestnut horse seemed proud -of being bestridden by so superb a horseman, -and whinnied with delight and caracoled -as they traveled rapidly along the highway. -At evening the Daredevil Knight scorned -inns and castles, saying:</p> - -<p>“Let us sleep like soldiers in our cloaks, and -not seek soft beds like ladies and carpet knights.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_187" id="Page_187">[Pg 187]</a></span></p> - -<p>Diego and Don Felipe were willing enough -for this, and their supper around the campfire -seemed to them the most delicious meal -they had ever eaten. The Daredevil Knight, -whose flow of spirits and energy seemed inexhaustible, -told them stories of his adventures -in camps and in the tilt-yard and in -tournaments in France as well as in Spain. -When they at last settled to sleep, wrapped -in their cloaks and blankets, Diego put a -stick of wood under his head by way of being -more comfortable. The Daredevil Knight, -seeing this, rose and kicked the log away, -crying indignantly:</p> - -<p>“You are too fond of luxury, Don Diego, -if you cannot sleep without a pillow under -your head; you are not fit for a soldier.”</p> - -<p>Diego remained meekly silent; and Don -Felipe, who was reaching out for another -stick of wood to use for the same purpose, -withdrew his hand and appeared to be sleeping -soundly. Neither slept much, however; -their veins throbbed with excitement; and, as -they watched the quiet stars overhead, the -thought of the story told by those stars to -the Admiral on the trackless ocean thrilled -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_188" id="Page_188">[Pg 188]</a></span>them both. They were late in falling asleep, -and slept so soundly that they were only -awakened by Don Tomaso’s kicks and reproaches -for being such sluggards. The sun -was just rising, their morning meal was prepared, -their horses groomed, and everything -ready for their departure. Mindful of his -father’s habits of singular neatness, Diego -boldly said:</p> - -<p>“Before we start I must wash in yonder -brook.”</p> - -<p>“I washed half an hour ago,” replied the -Daredevil Knight. “If we had depended on -you and Don Felipe an enemy might have -come and surprised us all and carried you -both off without waking you, I suppose. -Oh, very enterprising knights will you and -Don Felipe make!”</p> - -<p>Neither Diego nor Don Felipe minded Don -Tomaso’s jokes; but they privately arranged -to be up in advance of him next morning. -That day was a repetition of the rapid and -joyous travel of the day before. They were -passing through the richest parts of Spain, -with many castles and splendid residences -in sight, and they encountered noblemen and -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_189" id="Page_189">[Pg 189]</a></span>gentlemen upon the road who urged Don -Tomaso to stop at least for dinner or supper -in their houses. But to each one Don Tomaso -gave courteously the same reply:</p> - -<p>“I travel on urgent business for her Majesty -the Queen, and I cannot stop except -for needed rest and refreshment.”</p> - -<p>He made no mention of the names of either -Diego or Don Felipe, not wishing any one to -suspect his errand in advance.</p> - -<p>That night they slept again in the open -on the banks of the Guadalquivir, which narrowed -suddenly at that point. Next morning, -by break of day Diego and Don Felipe -were awake and, rising noiselessly, were careful -not to disturb any of the other sleepers; -and, going to the banks of the river, a short -distance off, had a bath so cold it made them -shiver, but soon brought a warm glow to -their healthy young bodies. When they returned -to their companions all were up and -awake except Don Tomaso, to the great joy -of Diego and Don Felipe. The Daredevil -Knight lay snoozing peacefully. They even -ate their morning meal without awaking him, -and at last, when Alonzo de Quintanilla called -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_190" id="Page_190">[Pg 190]</a></span>to Don Tomaso, Diego and Don Felipe were -sitting on their horses as if ready to start. -Don Tomaso sprang up in great confusion -and made a hurried toilet and a still more -hurried breakfast. When they finally started -off in the glorious spring sunrise, Don Tomaso -said, laughing, to Diego and Don Felipe:</p> - -<p>“You have once caught me napping; I -predict that I will catch each of you a thousand -times.”</p> - -<p>That day they drew near the coast, and on -the next, about four o’clock, when the afternoon -sun was at its richest, they caught the -far-off gleam of the blue Atlantic.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_191" id="Page_191">[Pg 191]</a></span></p> - -<h2 class="no-break">VIII<br /> -<small><small>SUNRISE OFF THE BAR OF SALTES</small></small></h2></div> - -<p class="no-indent"><span class="dropcap">T</span>HE sight of the monastery and -the thought of seeing his little brother and -the good Prior and Fray Piņa filled the heart of -Diego with joy. He had an imaginative mind, -and he lived over in thought and spoke to -Don Felipe of the extraordinary change that -had taken place in his fortunes since the day, -nearly eight years before, when his father, a -poor and unhonored and unsuccessful applicant -at the courts of kings, jeered at and disbelieved, -and Diego, himself a little ragged and -barefooted boy, had stopped at La Rabida to -ask for a dole of bread. Now, he was returning -as Don Diego, a page-in-waiting to the heir -to the thrones of Arragon and Castile; his -father returning as Admiral of the Ocean -Seas and Viceroy and Captain-General of all -lands to the westward, a title far transcending -that of any grandee of Spain and second -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_192" id="Page_192">[Pg 192]</a></span>only to the title of royalty, the arrival of this -great man breathlessly awaited not only by -kings and queens, but by the whole Spanish -people. No more amazing picture of the -vicissitudes of fortune had ever been presented -to the human mind.</p> - -<p>The party pushed on rapidly to the monastery -and drew up before the courtyard within -half an hour. There, all was placid; no hint -of the return of the Admiral’s caravel or -that of Captain Martin Alonzo Pinzon had -reached the neighborhood of Palos. Diego, -looking about the silent old stone building, -the orchard, and the fish-pond basking in -the afternoon glow, and the monks at their -business of work or prayer, felt that a thunderbolt -was to fall among them.</p> - -<p>The Prior, Juan Perez, came out at once -when he heard the clattering of the horses’ -hoofs. One glance at Diego’s radiant face -and De Quintanilla’s look of triumph aroused -a strong hope in the Prior’s heart. The -Daredevil Knight flung himself off his horse -and, courteously greeting the Prior, drew him -aside and told in a whisper the news they had -heard, and that they had come to await the -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_193" id="Page_193">[Pg 193]</a></span>arrival of the caravel at Palos, which might -be expected at any moment. Juan Perez, a -man of deep and sincere piety as well as of -strong understanding, fell on his knees in the -courtyard and gave loud and fervent thanks -to God for the news that had been brought. -When he arose he sent for Fray Piņa, who -came quickly; and to him the great event -was confided. Diego and Don Felipe were -glad to see their old instructor once more, and -actually had the grace to thank him for his -strictness and sternness. They had learned -some courtly ways from being at court.</p> - -<p>Alonzo de Quintanilla, a prudent man, seizing -Juan Perez by the arm, said:</p> - -<p>“But no word of this must get abroad in -Palos; it would excite the people too much. -I bear letters to the families of the three -Pinzon brothers telling them of the safe -arrival of Captain Martin Alonzo Pinzon at -Bayonne; but that is to be kept secret for -the present. I shall not go to the houses -of the Pinzons to give their families the joyful -news until nightfall, so that I may not -be recognized and thereby the whole coast -be aroused and excited.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_194" id="Page_194">[Pg 194]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Then,” said Juan Perez, “you will have -time to go with me and the brothers to the -chapel, where we shall give thanks to God -for the success of this great enterprise.”</p> - -<p>Diego asked that the little Fernando be -sent for, and soon the boy was seen running -along, his little hand within Brother Lawrence’s -big paw. Diego took the child in his -arms, and kissed him with a heart overflowing -with tenderness. He felt then more like -a father to little Fernando than an elder -brother. The Admiral had never ceased to -impress upon Diego his sense of responsibility -toward his younger brother, and Diego, whose -heart was naturally tender, glowed with affection -for the child. Fernando’s first question -was:</p> - -<p>“Diego, when will our father come back?”</p> - -<p>“Very soon,” whispered Diego, “and he -will bring you, Fernando, beautiful play-things -and strange little animals for pets -unlike any you have ever seen before.”</p> - -<p>The Prior directed Brother Lawrence to -ring the great courtyard bell that all the -brothers might assemble in the chapel. When -the solemn call of the bell was heard the -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_195" id="Page_195">[Pg 195]</a></span>monks, in their coarse robes and sandals, -left their work and marched silently into the -little stone chapel where Don Tomaso and -Diego, with little Fernando, and Don Felipe -and De Quintanilla and the men-at-arms were -already assembled. The Prior, speaking from -the altar steps, said simply that he had heard -good news of great import to Spain, and he -desired all to unite in thanks to God for what -had been vouchsafed them. Diego joined -with a sense of deep gratitude in these thanksgivings; -and little Fernando, his hands clasped, -whispered in Diego’s ear:</p> - -<p>“I prayed every night and morning that -our father would return, and now he is coming, -so I shall thank God just as you do.”</p> - -<p>The quiet monastery was thrilled with subdued -excitement; but nothing passed beyond -its stone walls.</p> - -<p>De Quintanilla waited until the darkness -fell before leaving on foot to visit the families -of the Pinzons.</p> - -<p>Diego and Don Felipe were given the same -little tower room in which they had last slept -almost a year and a half before. They were -no longer pupils of Fray Piņa; but they -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_196" id="Page_196">[Pg 196]</a></span>had learned to regard his stern justice with -respect.</p> - -<p>“He was very hard with us,” said Don -Felipe; “but not so hard as the master of -the pages.”</p> - -<p>“No, he was not,” said Diego, laughing.</p> - -<p>The last night they had spent together at -the monastery Diego had slept scarcely at -all, and the long night hours had passed in -watching the moonlit sea upon which his -father was to set forth at sunrise. This night, -too, he spent huddled in his cloak on the -parapet. Don Felipe, also wrapped in a long -and heavy mantle—for the spring night was -sharp—sat with him. The beautiful afternoon -had been succeeded by a lowering night -in which low-lying black clouds scurried across -a pale night sky, veiling the moon and the stars. -As the dawn approached, however, the sky -cleared beautifully. Diego, going within the -room, waked the little Fernando, and with -his own hands, willing but awkward, washed -and dressed the little boy, saying:</p> - -<p>“Fernando, we must go to the seashore -now and watch for our father’s vessel.”</p> - -<p>Something within Diego seemed driving -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_197" id="Page_197">[Pg 197]</a></span>him to the seashore. As soon as the little boy -was dressed Diego said to Don Felipe:</p> - -<p>“Come with me, Felipe, and do not leave -me during this day, for I feel that great glory -for my father and great happiness for my -brother and me are impending, and I want to -have you near me.”</p> - -<p>The two youths, Diego holding the little -Fernando by the hand, passed out of the -monastery gates just as the pearl and amethyst -of the dawn was turning to rose and gold. -They walked rapidly, too rapidly for the little -boy, whom Diego took in his arms and -carried. The town of Palos was awaking, -and workmen and sailors were appearing upon -the streets, and women were opening their -houses. As Diego passed a house a woman -recognized him and, pointing to him, cried -out angrily:</p> - -<p>“There goes the son of Colon, the Genoese -who feared neither God nor the devil, and -sailed away into the unknown seas taking -with him my husband and my brother.”</p> - -<p>As she spoke she burst into loud weeping. -The passers-by, startled by her passionate -sobbing, stopped and gathered about her. -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_198" id="Page_198">[Pg 198]</a></span>Not one consolatory or encouraging word was -uttered, and lowering and menacing looks -were cast on Diego. An old man cried out, -fiercely:</p> - -<p>“Yes! Colon the foreigner, Colon the Genoese -adventurer, came to this town of Palos, and -to Moguer and to Huelva, and by force took -away more than a hundred men from us to be -lost in an unknown ocean. My son—my -only son—was taken. Never shall I see him -again!”</p> - -<p>Others joined in the imprecations upon the -Admiral. Diego, putting down little Fernando -on the ground, stood and with crossed -arms boldly faced the excited and angry people -in the street.</p> - -<p>“Yes!” he shouted, in a ringing voice. -“The devil is not feared by my father, because -my father is an upright man and a Christian; -nor does he fear the sea, because he is the -boldest and most expert seaman that ever -sailed the ocean floors. He fears God alone. -He will return, and that soon, with the greatest -honor and glory the world has ever seen; -and you, men of Palos, who might have gone -with him and did not, will regret it all your -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_199" id="Page_199">[Pg 199]</a></span>lives; and the women and the children of -Palos and Moguer and Huelva will live to -boast that it was these towns chiefly that -supplied those who sailed with Christobal -Colon, Admiral of the Ocean Seas and Viceroy -and Captain-General of all lands to the -westward. Do you remember that when my -father sailed, he gave the order that when -the ships had sailed seven hundred and fifty -leagues to the westward no sail should be -made after midnight, knowing that land would -then be off their quarter? They were the -words of a captain who knew how to lay his -course and what he should find at the end -of it. Look you, I and my brother would -not change places to-day with the sons of -the greatest man in Spain, for it will soon be -seen that we are the sons of the greatest -and boldest man in the world!”</p> - -<p>As Diego proceeded, his voice grew firmer. -A deep enthusiasm possessed his soul; his -words, rapid and vehement, cut the air like -swords. The people, astounded at such language -from a beardless youth, remained silent. -After a deep pause Diego added:</p> - -<p>“Watch then, you men and women of Palos, -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_200" id="Page_200">[Pg 200]</a></span>the bar of Saltes this day; and when you see -my father’s ship standing up the river, go -down on your knees and ask pardon for all -you have said against my father.”</p> - -<p>Then Don Felipe shouted in a loud voice:</p> - -<p>“You who revile and execrate the name of -Christobal Colon to-day, to-morrow will hail -him as the greatest man in the world. For -my part I, Don Felipe Langara y Gama, -grandee of Spain of the first rank, reckon it -an honor to call the son of Christobal Colon -my friend.”</p> - -<p>With that Don Felipe threw his arm around -Diego’s neck, and the two marched defiantly -down the street, little Fernando walking in -front of them. Diego hugged Don Felipe -openly, and rubbed his cheek against that of -his friend. The people of Palos, used to the -distinction of rank, were impressed by Don -Felipe’s words, and gazed curiously but silently -at the two youths.</p> - -<p>When they reached the waterside Diego -said, with a strange look in his eyes, to Don -Felipe:</p> - -<p>“I have often thought as I lay in my bed -at night, or as I attended the Prince in the -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_201" id="Page_201">[Pg 201]</a></span>palace, or sat at meat with other pages, or -worked at my books, ‘At this moment my -father is watching for sight of land. If it be -daylight his eyes are fixed upon the horizon, -watching for the dark line of the land to appear. -If it be night-time he is standing on -the poop watching, watching, watching for a -light on shore.’ And so I shall watch all day -for the sight of my father’s ship, and when -night comes I will stay upon the quay still -watching for him.”</p> - -<p>As Diego spoke the sky, which had been -rosy red, grew blue and brilliant as the sun -suddenly burst out in great magnificence; -the world seemed bathed in the golden glory. -Diego had not once taken his eyes from the -blue billows of the Atlantic rushing in over -the bar of Saltes. And then—and then, he -saw a speck upon the horizon, a vessel carrying -all hard sail and standing straight for the -bar. Diego’s heart almost leaped out of his -body. He seized Don Felipe and shouted:</p> - -<p>“Is that a caravel I see?”</p> - -<p>Then the little Fernando began to jump -about and dance, shouting:</p> - -<p>“That is my father’s ship!”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_202" id="Page_202">[Pg 202]</a></span></p> - -<p>Diego stood as if turned to stone, his eyes -fixed upon the advancing vessel. It could -not be distinguished from any other vessel -of its class; but when it reached the bar of -Saltes it came about, for the water was low -on the bar. And far down the river Diego -saw, as did Don Felipe and little Fernando, -the great Gonfalon, the crimson and yellow -standard of Spain, flung to the breeze, which -blew it out bravely so that all could see -the sign of glory. Then, over the crystal -water, came a single loud gun, the signal for -a pilot to come aboard.</p> - -<p>It was as if the breaking out of the great -standard and the boom of the solitary gun -waked the whole of Andalusia. Instantly -the entire population of Palos, of Moguer, of -Huelva, and the country-side seemed rushing -to the seashore and watching in the glorious -sunrise the banner of Spain flying from the -caravel. It was all so rapid that Diego was -stunned by it, the excited crowds of people, -the sudden presence of Juan Perez and De -Quintanilla, the surging multitudes cheering, -weeping, laughing, the women shrieking with -joy and falling into each other’s arms, the -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_203" id="Page_203">[Pg 203]</a></span>men mad with excitement, every pilot of -Palos running for his boat to have the honor -of bringing the caravel up the river. Men -and women whose names Diego did not know -embraced him, and would have shoved him -into a boat to go to meet his father; but Diego, -although his soul was in a tumult, retained -his outward calmness. He would meet his -father on Spanish soil and would see that -glorious landing. The boats, some under sail -and others with rowers, sped down the river -and swarmed about the caravel; but none -was allowed to board her except the pilot, -Sebastian Rodriguez, one of the Admiral’s -earliest and most steadfast friends. To Rodriguez -was given the honor of bringing the -caravel over the bar. The cheers and cries -of the people echoed down the river, and the -wind brought back the shouts from the boats -surrounding the immortal ship. The tide -came in slowly, and it was not until high noon -that Rodriguez was able to take the vessel -over the bar. It was a wait of six hours in -the clear March sunshine; but to the assembled -multitudes it seemed a mere fragment -of time. Every hour added to the -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_204" id="Page_204">[Pg 204]</a></span>cheering and excited crowds that thronged -the shore. The church bells over the whole -district rang joyously, salutes were fired, and -bands of musicians played and sang religious -and patriotic hymns. Diego, holding his -little brother by the hand, and with Don -Felipe next him, watched the caravel as it -came slowly up the river in the midst of a -universal joy and applause that echoed to -the deep-blue sky above them. On the poop, -under the royal standard, stood the Admiral -splendidly dressed in crimson, his attitude -calm and unmoved, but full of that sublime -dignity which had ever marked him. The -boat of the pilot Rodriguez, which was towing -astern, was brought alongside and the Admiral, -with Rodriguez and the Queen’s notary, -came over the side and were pulled to the -shore.</p> - -<p>The crowd fell back, leaving the sons of -Columbus to meet him first. A profound and -solemn silence fell upon them as the Admiral, -when his foot touched Spanish earth, kneeled -down and kissed the ground and gave thanks -to God. The vast multitude followed his -example, Diego and the little Fernando being -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_205" id="Page_205">[Pg 205]</a></span>the first to kneel. Then, rising, the Admiral -took his sons in his arms and kissed and -blessed them. Next he embraced the Prior, -Juan Perez, and De Quintanilla. Both were -strong men; but they wept freely. The Admiral -did not forget Don Felipe.</p> - -<p>The men from the Niņa had poured ashore, -and were greeted with tears and cries and wild -embraces as men returning from the dead. -A procession was rapidly formed, headed by -the mayor and the officials of the town of -Palos and the ecclesiastics, to escort Columbus -and his men to the Church of St. George, -where a solemn Te Deum was to be sung. -The procession was preceded by a beautiful -youth in a red cassock and a white surplice -bearing a great glittering cross. He was followed -by the ecclesiastics in their robes and by -the officials. Then came the Admiral holding -with his right hand Diego and with his -left the little Fernando, and escorted by -Alonzo de Quintanilla, the Queen’s representative, -on one side, and Juan Perez on the -other. Behind them stretched thousands of -persons, only a few of whom could get into -the little church. The multitudes crowding -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_206" id="Page_206">[Pg 206]</a></span>about it fell on their knees and joined in the -singing of the solemn hymn of thanks. A -supernatural joy filled every heart; in that -of the Admiral the humble thanksgiving of -a Christian took precedence of the stupendous -triumph of the greatest discovery the world -had ever known.</p> - -<p>A scant forty-eight hours was allowed -Diego before beginning the return journey -to Barcelona. It was the shortest two days -Diego had ever known. Apart from the deep -and penetrating joy of seeing his father and -the splendid glow of pride which naturally -filled Diego’s heart, he, like Don Felipe, was -consumed with curiosity concerning the -strange new lands to the west, the men of a -race never before seen in Europe, whom the -Admiral had brought back, the specimens of -birds, plants, minerals, and animals hitherto -unknown. But there was little time for that. -The whole of Spain seemed roused in a single -day, and the Admiral was overwhelmed with -throngs of great people coming and sending -to him and the enthusiasm of vast numbers -of people half crazed with joy and pride in -the man whom they had opposed and thwart<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_207" id="Page_207">[Pg 207]</a></span>ed -and whose sublime purpose they had tried -in every way to defeat. The great and magnanimous -soul of the Admiral could easily -ignore the past; he made no reproaches and -bore his stupendous honors with the same dignity -he had borne contumely, neglect, and -treachery.</p> - -<p>At the end of the second day couriers -traveling at full speed by night and by day, -and with frequent relays of horses, brought -the Admiral a letter from the sovereigns. It -was addressed to “Don Christobal de Colon, -our Admiral of the Ocean Seas, Viceroy and -Captain-General of all Lands to the Westward.” -In it, after expressions of fervent -gratitude the King and the Queen desired the -Admiral to take time to refresh himself before -attending the sovereigns, who would await at -Barcelona his convenience.</p> - -<p>On the second night after the arrival of the -Admiral, he had his first long conversation -with Diego, who was leaving at daybreak with -Don Tomaso and Don Felipe. The Admiral -questioned Diego closely as to his life at court. -Diego was able to answer satisfactorily. His -conduct had not been perfect, but it was not -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_208" id="Page_208">[Pg 208]</a></span>stained by a single act of baseness. At saying -good night, the Admiral said:</p> - -<p>“Remember, do not on your return appear -puffed up with pride and make your companions -smile by references to your father, -and otherwise comport yourself with pride, -which is folly.”</p> - -<p>“But, my father,” answered Diego, “do -you think that I am not, after all, human, and -that I am not filled with pride at the thought -of being your son? I will try not to show -it too much; but I have ever told all my -companions, and said it before Prince Juan, -that my father, the Genoese navigator, would -one day be acclaimed not only the greatest -man in Spain, but the greatest man in all the -world. I think I have been very modest in -claiming so little.”</p> - -<p>Diego spoke with such fire and earnestness, -and with so much of boyish simplicity, that -even the grave Admiral was forced to smile -at the boy’s idea of modesty.</p> - -<p>“Take pattern,” he said, “by Don Felipe. -That youth has always had everything that -the highest rank, the greatest fortune, could -confer, yet see how little boastful he is.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_209" id="Page_209">[Pg 209]</a></span></p> - -<p>“But Don Felipe’s father was not to be -named in the same breath with my father,” -replied Diego, sturdily, and wagging his head.</p> - -<p>“Very well,” said the Admiral, still smiling, -“if you grow too boastful and self-conscious, -I think I can depend upon your -young companions to bring you to your -proper senses.”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” replied Diego, after a pause, and -looking with a clear, frank gaze into the eyes -of the Admiral. “And another thing will -make me guard my behavior and control my -tongue, which will be this: that my father -has done so much, not only for Spain, but -for the whole world, that the discovery is so -vast, it means so much to mankind, that for -me, the son of the discoverer, to be boastful -would be mean beyond comparison. I have -learned much, my father, in the time that I -have lived at court. I have heard the conversation -of the great Queen with mighty men -like the Cardinal Pedro Gonzalez de Mendoza -and the Duke of Medina Cœli, and with -statesmen and great generals and admirals -and learned men. I have been under the -care of the Duke de Medina Cœli, a man -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_210" id="Page_210">[Pg 210]</a></span>reckoned fit to train the heir to the throne, -and with the nineteen other royal pages, all -selected for their character and intelligence. -The Queen does not value rank exclusively, -and means that the companions of Prince -Juan shall all be worthy of his friendship. -When you sailed away, my father, I was a -boy; now I am a man, I think as a man and -feel as a man, and I hope I shall be able to -act as a man. I cannot help feeling in my -heart that I am the son of the greatest man -in the world; but I know that I, myself, have -done nothing; I have only reaped the benefit -of what you have done, beginning, even -before I was born, those eighteen years of -eternal struggle, of heartbreaking disappointments. -Do you think that in this triumphant -hour I have forgotten the days so far away -now when I was a little ragged, barefoot boy -holding your hand and toiling along the -country roads as well as I could, and when I -was tired and footsore being carried in your -arms? You were often tired and footsore, -too, were you not? And so in my mind I -have a pride in you such as no son ever felt -before in a father, and a deep joy, and it -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_211" id="Page_211">[Pg 211]</a></span>only makes me feel my own nothingness, -The only way I can ever prove myself worthy -of being your son is by good conduct, and in -that I will ever do my best.”</p> - -<p>The Admiral listened with amazement as -Diego proceeded. Here indeed was the transition -in the mind and heart of a boy to the -dignity of a man. Diego was no longer a -mere lad to be guided and instructed. Much, -it is true, was still for him to learn as men of -intelligence learn from the beginning to the -end of life; but his character was now fixed. -He could stand alone, confident of his own -integrity, looking boldly at the world around -him, able to retrieve his own mistakes and -to extricate himself from the perplexities of -life and to protect himself amid its dangers. -Something of this the Admiral said to him, -clasping Diego to his breast. The father and -the son, looking into each other’s eyes, so -much alike, understood each other perfectly.</p> - -<p>“I have never left any place so unwillingly -in my life as I shall leave here to-morrow,” -said Diego; “but I will not say one word of -complaint, and I shall be ready to mount before -any of those who return with me.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_212" id="Page_212">[Pg 212]</a></span></p> - -<p>“That shows that you have become indeed -a man,” replied the Admiral. “It is -the mark of manhood to do promptly and -uncomplainingly the necessary and painful -things of life. Boys and weaklings complain -and protest and disobey; men obey silently -and immediately if they are fit to be called -men.”</p> - -<p>Diego was as good as his word, and at daylight -on the March morning he was on horseback -before any of the party, even the Daredevil -Knight. Some secondary thoughts came -to console him. He had seen those strange beings, -those wonderful productions, those birds -and animals of the New World, and could -tell Prince Juan and the pages of honor all -about them. This natural feeling was shared -by Don Felipe, who whispered to him, as -they stood in the courtyard ready to depart:</p> - -<p>“I have drawn pictures of the Indians to -show Prince Juan, and also pictures of all -the strange animals of which I could get -sight.”</p> - -<p>Diego was charmed at this. Don Felipe -drew well, while Diego was but an indifferent -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_213" id="Page_213">[Pg 213]</a></span>hand at it; and it had not occurred to him to -make any pictures. He had, however, some -little plants from the New World, which were -meant for Doņa Luisita’s garden at the castle -of Langara.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_214" id="Page_214">[Pg 214]</a></span></p> - -<h2 class="no-break">IX<br /> -<small><small>GLORIA</small></small></h2></div> - -<p class="no-indent"><span class="dropcap">T</span>HE party started off joyously; Don -Tomaso was always joyous, but even -the sober Alonzo de Quintanilla was full of -gaiety. It was found impossible to prevent -the people knowing that one of the two young -men with Don Tomaso’s party was the son -of the immortal man with whose fame the -world was ringing. In every town through -which they passed multitudes collected, wild -with curiosity and enthusiasm, and eager to -see not only the son of the Admiral, but the -men who had seen and talked with those who -had returned from the marvelous voyage. -Along the highways crowds assembled, made up -of all classes of persons, from the great nobles -down to the humblest muleteer or peasant; -all were filled with an overwhelming sense of -what the great discovery meant, not only to -Spain, but to the whole world. So large were -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_215" id="Page_215">[Pg 215]</a></span>these concourses that travel became exceedingly -slow; and Don Tomaso wished it to be -as rapid as possible. He managed, however, -to make up for the delays by traveling at -night and resting only a few brief hours. To -Diego and Don Felipe and all it seemed possible -to do without sleep.</p> - -<p>As the party neared the splendid city of -Barcelona the crowds and enthusiasm seemed, -if possible, to increase. Foreseeing what their -entrance into Barcelona by daylight might -be, Don Tomaso determined to steal into -the city by night. Accordingly, on that last -night they prepared as usual to bivouac at -sunset, that they might get rid of the surging -people for a little while. About nine o’clock -the party quietly rose and slipped away upon -the dark and silent highroad. The night was -gloomy and the darkness impenetrable, but -that best suited the purposes of the travelers. -The road was straight and level; and, giving -their horses the rein, they rode steadily until -they reached the outlying gardens and villas -of Barcelona. Soon they stood before the -main gate of the city. Don Tomaso, riding -up to the postern-gate, rapped gently with -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_216" id="Page_216">[Pg 216]</a></span>the hilt of his sword. The warder in the -tower asked his name and business.</p> - -<p>“I am,” replied Don Tomaso, “Don Tomaso -de Gama, and I bear a letter for their Majesties -the King and the Queen. Open the small -gate; we will dismount to enter.”</p> - -<p>The warder came hastily down and, removing -the bolts, chains, and bars from the -small postern-gate, the party dismounted, -and, leading their horses, entered the silent -city. The warder, like all the people of -Spain, was eager to know something of the -wonderful rumors that agitated Barcelona.</p> - -<p>“Is it true, sir,” he asked of Don Tomaso, -who, once inside the walls, was preparing -to mount, “that the Genoese captain has returned -after finding a new world?”</p> - -<p>“As true as my sword, which is of the best -steel made in Toledo, and never misses fire,” -answered Don Tomaso, flinging himself upon -his horse and galloping off.</p> - -<p>The echo of iron hoofs upon the stones of -the street waked the whole city. The minds -of men were at a tension, and every sound -startled them. When the horsemen reached the -palace, lights were still burning in the Queen’s -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_217" id="Page_217">[Pg 217]</a></span>apartments, although it was past midnight. -The sound of arriving horsemen aroused the -whole palace. The gate was immediately -opened, and Don Tomaso and his party, dismounting, -entered. In the corridors they -were met by all the officers of the palace, -none of them fully dressed, some putting on -their clothes and shoes, others barefooted -and wrapped in blankets. None dared to -stop them, because Don Tomaso was making -direct for the Queen’s part of the palace. -When they reached the Queen’s anteroom, -guarded by halberdiers, the door opened and -Doņa Christina appeared. In place of her -usual splendid and correct costume she wore -a short black silk petticoat, while a large shawl -wrapped around her concealed other deficiencies -of her toilet. She was too much -agitated to do more than to give a hasty -greeting to Don Felipe and Diego, and in her -excitement called Diego, Felipe, and Felipe, -Diego.</p> - -<p>“Her Majesty has sent for the King,” she -said to Don Tomaso, “and desires that you -will come in immediately. You bear a letter, -I suppose, from the Admiral?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_218" id="Page_218">[Pg 218]</a></span></p> - -<p>All then entered the Queen’s room, while -Doņa Christina disappeared for a moment. -She came back saying:</p> - -<p>“The Queen desires to see you, Don Tomaso, -and Seņor de Quintanilla in private. -Don Diego and Don Felipe may retire to bed.”</p> - -<p>Diego and Don Felipe looked at each other -in silent chagrin; but knew better than to -protest.</p> - -<p>They had hoped to be present at the interview -of Don Tomaso and Alonzo de Quintanilla -with the sovereigns, and were disappointed -at being sent to bed, as it were. -Nevertheless, their return was not without -triumph. As they walked down the long -corridor, now full of persons, for the palace -was thoroughly aroused, they were stopped -at every moment by eager questioners. Diego -until then had been merely an object of -curiosity, and even of prejudice on the part -of some. Many persons of rank treated him -haughtily and disapproved the conferring of -the title of “Don” upon the son of an obscure -Italian and putting him upon an equality -with the greatest nobles of Spain. Now, -they regarded him with extraordinary in<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_219" id="Page_219">[Pg 219]</a></span>terest -and respect. This youth, closely resembling -his father, would one day inherit -all the titles and dignities of the greatest man -in the world at that time. Diego subtly -realized this, and, instead of dazzling and -unsettling him, gave him a better poise and -a more sensible view of honors and distinctions. -Midway of the crowd in the corridor -they met the Duke de Medina Cœli, governor -of the pages. Although stern in discipline, -he was strictly just, and had never -made the smallest distinction between Diego -and the other pages, and was always careful -to give him the title of “Don.” As Diego and -Don Felipe stopped and respectfully saluted -him, the Duke spoke kindly to Diego, congratulating -him upon the glorious achievement -of his father and hoping that Diego -would prove worthy of him.</p> - -<p>“I thank you, sir,” responded Diego, with -a low bow, “and I shall try by my conduct -not to discredit my honored father.”</p> - -<p>Don Felipe, who was really more courageous -with the Duke than Diego, whispered a -request into his ear. The Duke smiled, and -answered:</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_220" id="Page_220">[Pg 220]</a></span></p> - -<p>“You may go to Prince Juan’s room if -you wish. No doubt he is awake like every -one else in the palace. If he chooses to go -with you to the dormitory of the pages to -see what you have to show, I shall make no -objection.”</p> - -<p>The Duke passed on, and Diego and Don -Felipe made straight for the apartments of -Prince Juan. The Prince was under military -discipline, and had no more privileges -in regard to leaving his room than had any -of the pages. Diego knocked at the Prince’s -door, and it was opened, not by an attendant, -but by Prince Juan himself. He caught -Diego in his arms and hugged him, boy -fashion, and then hugged Don Felipe.</p> - -<p>“I have scarcely slept since the great news -came!” cried Prince Juan. “Never did any -country receive so great a gift as your father, -Don Diego, has made my country. Tell me -all, all, all, that you have seen and heard.”</p> - -<p>“The governor bade me say that if your -Highness wished to go into the pages’ dormitory -he would permit it, and there we can -show the pictures and tell the story as we -have heard it,” said Don Felipe.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_221" id="Page_221">[Pg 221]</a></span></p> - -<p>Prince Juan had in him that fine quality -of wishing to share his pleasures with others. -The thought of being surrounded by his -friends and young companions while the story -was told delighted him. He, with Diego and -Don Felipe, rushed pell-mell into the long -dormitory, simple as a barrack, where the -pages slept on their hard, narrow beds. But -they were not sleeping. They were gathered -in groups at the narrow windows trying to -make out from the commotion in the courtyard -what had happened. When the door -opened the dormitory was quite dark, but Prince -Juan, seizing with his own hands a lamp that -hung from the wall outside, carried it into the -large, bare room. The three were greeted with -shouts of delight, for when alone with Prince -Juan, he was treated as a friend and comrade -rather than a prince. Prince Juan, -putting the lamp on the table, and with the -twenty pages around it, began to examine -the pictures that Don Felipe had drawn and -painted, and to listen breathlessly to the -story of what they had seen. When the -gray dawn crept in at the windows they were -still gathered around the table, although the -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_222" id="Page_222">[Pg 222]</a></span>lamp had long since burnt itself out. Then, -however, they scampered back to their beds, -and Prince Juan ran to his apartment, for -in a little while it would be time for the -governor of the pages to glance in Prince -Juan’s room and inspect the dormitory.</p> - -<p>Although it was still March, and the Admiral -was not expected to arrive at Barcelona -until the middle of April, preparations -for his reception were already begun. As the -magnitude of the discovery of a new world -grew more apparent the people seemed to -be more and more dazzled by the great event. -It not only meant an incalculable increase -of power, territory, and wealth for Spain, -but it was of great import to science and learning -of all sorts. Geography had to be reconstructed, -and astronomy would make a tremendous -advance. The strange phenomenon -of the variation of the compass excited all -Europe, and the discovery of the trade-winds -by the Admiral was of enormous benefit to -commerce. It was indeed the revelation of -a new and stupendous world to the Old World.</p> - -<p>There were two persons, however, who, -without forgetting the vast material and -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_223" id="Page_223">[Pg 223]</a></span>scientific value of the discovery, fixed their -minds upon a nobler ideal, the taking to the -New World the Christian religion and civilization. -These two were the Admiral himself -and the great Queen Isabella. Daily letters -were exchanged between these two lofty and -kindred spirits, who could rise above the -consideration of earthly grandeur, and who -cherished splendid dreams of the reclamation -and civilization of the unknown lands.</p> - -<p>When it became known that the Admiral was -to be received at Barcelona by their Majesties -about the middle of April, all Spain, Italy, -and France were aroused, for the event had -so stirred men’s minds that it was communicated -with unheard-of rapidity; even far-off -England and Germany were thrilled to the -centre. The King and the Queen, to do honor -to the Admiral, determined to receive him -in full sight of the people instead of in the -palace. A huge temporary saloon open to -the air was built in the great Plaza opposite -the Cathedral. It was carpeted with magnificent -Moorish carpets and blazed with -cloth of gold and gorgeous tapestries brought -from the Spanish palaces. At the end a -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_224" id="Page_224">[Pg 224]</a></span>magnificent throne was erected with three -chairs upon it, two throne chairs and one for -the Admiral, who was to receive an honor -never before granted to any but reigning -sovereigns, to sit upon the throne with the -King and the Queen. A grand Te Deum was -to be sung, and all the greatest singers in -Spain flocked to Barcelona that they might -take part in the music. The streets became -so crowded that it was difficult to make progress, -and the country round about was converted -into a camp by a tented army of travelers -who could get no accommodations in the city.</p> - -<p>Through it all Diego felt as if he were in -a splendid dream. His heart swelled with -joy; his prayers were all thanksgivings; but -his mind remained steady and his conduct -modest. To have shown a haughty and -vainglorious spirit he felt would degrade him -more than anything else in the world. His -own sound sense and his father’s counsels prevented -him from being unbalanced by the -flatterers who surrounded him. Those who -had jeered at him as being an upstart and a -foreigner were now the ones who paid him -court, as if he were a man grown, who could -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_225" id="Page_225">[Pg 225]</a></span>not meet him without linking their arms in -his, and who embarrassed him by the urgency -of their invitations to banquets and feasts -and jousts at arms and in the tilt-yard. -Diego in his heart scornfully contrasted them -with those of his friends like Don Felipe and -the other pages who had treated him always -with friendliness; with the Daredevil Knight, -who had made no difference between the son -of the Genoese captain and Don Felipe, heir -to the honors of the house of Langara y Gama; -of Doņa Christina, who had shown him unvarying -sweetness; and Doņa Luisita, whose -soft eyes had always smiled on him from the -night he had first seen her, in her white -gown and veil, standing in the archway of -the castle of Langara, the light from the -silvery lamp falling upon her slender white -figure. But above all was the great Queen -unchanged, because she had ever been the -soul of gentleness and kindness to the motherless -Diego.</p> - -<p>It was a time of brilliant happiness for all, -but to the son of the great Admiral it was a -time of joy deeper than he had ever dreamed.</p> - -<p>Four days before the arrival of the Admiral, -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_226" id="Page_226">[Pg 226]</a></span>who was making his way amid acclamations -from Cordova to Barcelona, Juan Perez, the -Prior of La Rabida, arrived with Fray Piņa -and Brother Lawrence, bringing the little Fernando. -It was the wish of the Admiral that -both of his sons and his tried and true friends -should be present in his hour of unprecedented -triumph. Lodgings were prepared in the palace -for the party from La Rabida. The palace -was already crowded with members of the -royal family and their attendants. The pages -had to find quarters where best they could, -their dormitory being given up to the great -nobles in attendance on royalty. Diego and -Don Felipe were glad of a little room to -themselves, with a pallet on the floor for little -Fernando, whom Brother Lawrence still -faithfully attended.</p> - -<p>“It is no use to find a sleeping place for -me,” said Brother Lawrence to Diego, “for -no one can sleep until the Admiral comes. I -ever believed in your father, and when I saw -the Prior with his head bending down over -the maps for hours and days with the Admiral, -I said to myself, ‘That Genoese captain -will find something yet.’”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_227" id="Page_227">[Pg 227]</a></span></p> - -<p>As Brother Lawrence could neither read nor -write, his views on geography were not particularly -valuable; but his faithfulness and -devotion to Diego in his childhood, and to -little Fernando now, made him a prized -though humble friend. Fray Piņa was perfectly -unchanged, being the same calm, polished -and somewhat stern young man; but -Diego and Don Felipe had learned to understand -and admire his justice and even his -sternness, for he was no sterner with others -than with himself.</p> - -<p>“I should not be surprised,” said Diego to -Don Felipe, on the night of the fourteenth of -April, as they lay in their beds watching the -stars shining through the window, the little -Fernando sleeping on the floor, and Brother -Lawrence snoring loudly on a bench outside -the door—“I should not be surprised if Fray -Piņa were to send us word the first thing in -the morning that he is prepared to give us -a lesson in astronomy to-morrow instead of -watching the great procession.”</p> - -<p>“It would be exactly like him,” replied -Don Felipe, laughing; “but for once I would -not obey him.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_228" id="Page_228">[Pg 228]</a></span></p> - -<p>Half the night the two youths watched the -night sky, dreading that clouds and storms -might mar the most glorious day that had -ever dawned for Spain. But the stars shone -from a clear sky, and the April morning broke -as beautiful as that August morning when -the Santa Maria, the Pinta, and the Niņa -slipped away into the sunlit ocean, or on that -glorious March day when the Niņa passed -the bar of Saltes, the great standard of Spain -floating in triumph from her peak.</p> - -<p>Scarcely an eye closed that night in -Barcelona. Not only was every street, window, -and balcony filled, but the roofs were -black with persons passionately anxious to -see the great pageant. The sun shone with -unclouded splendor, and soft airs from the -blue and glittering Mediterranean gently -moved the flags and banners that were -clustered thick over city and harbor. A -great collection of vessels from every adjacent -port and country made the spacious harbor -of Barcelona a forest of shipping and -extended in long lines on both sides of the -coast.</p> - -<p>The entrance of the Admiral was to take -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_229" id="Page_229">[Pg 229]</a></span>place at ten o’clock in the morning. At that -hour all was arranged in the great Plaza of -the city. The King and the Queen, wearing -their royal robes and mantles, and with -crowns upon their heads, were seated on the -throne in their great gilded chairs. Behind -the King’s chair stood Prince Juan; and behind -the Queen were grouped the Princess -Katharine and the other royal children. Of -the ladies-in-waiting of the Queen, Doņa -Christina held the place of honor, and among -the young ladies of the highest rank was -seated Doņa Luisita. She was dressed in -white and silver, and was in clear view of -Diego, who, with little Fernando, was given -a seat next the steps of the throne. The -robes, jewels, and plumes of the ladies made -a splendid glow of color. The cardinals, -headed by the great Cardinal Pedro Gonzalez -de Mendoza, the firm friend of the -Admiral, made a blaze of glory in their scarlet -robes, while all the bishops and archbishops -of Spain in purple robes and white capes, their -glittering mitres and crosiers shining in the -April sun, with their train-bearers and attendants, -were seated next the cardinals. -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_230" id="Page_230">[Pg 230]</a></span>Among the ecclesiastics there were two plain, -black-gowned figures, those of Juan Perez, -Prior of La Rabida, and Father de Deza, -tutor to Prince Juan, the two friends of whom -the Admiral in life and in his will after his -death spoke with gratitude which has immortalized -them. Others who had stood by -the Admiral, like Alonzo de Quintanilla and -Luis de St. Angel, were given places of honor. -The nobles, wearing their robes of state, the -knights, resplendent in flashing armor, added -magnificence to the scene. A solemn hush -was upon the great company. All excitement -and jubilation subsided as the deep and -tremendous meaning of the day made itself -felt.</p> - -<p>All was in readiness by half-past nine -o’clock; but long before that came from afar -off a deep murmur like the distant roar of -breakers on the seashore as the Admiral approached -the gates of the city. The murmur -grew, never loud, but deep, because it came -from the hearts of the people. It seemed to -rise from the earth and the sea and to extend -to the limits of the horizon. Presently, -in the glowing April morning, the head of the -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_231" id="Page_231">[Pg 231]</a></span>advancing procession was seen as it entered -the spacious Plaza. Then it parted to the -right and the left, and the figure of the Admiral, -mounted on a stately black horse, was -seen advancing, while immediately behind -him rode a color-bearer carrying the great -Gonfalon of Spain that Columbus himself -carried ashore and planted upon the soil of -the New World. At sight of him, suddenly -the silence was broken with a clashing of joy -bells, the salvos of artillery, the solemn -thunder of cathedral chimes, and the shrill -acclaims of trumpets and clarions. The -tongues of the people were unloosed, and a -storm of applause that began in the Plaza -of Barcelona and reached for leagues beyond -on land and sea rose to Heaven. This lasted -until the Admiral reached the foot of the -broad, red-carpeted stairs that led to the great -platform. There he dismounted and ascended -the stairs.</p> - -<p>Never had this majestic man appeared so -majestic. His tall and stately figure, his -hair already white, his carriage full of grace -and dignity, would have made him a marked -man among other men under any circum<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_232" id="Page_232">[Pg 232]</a></span>stances; -but, above all, his eyes, gravely -triumphant, introspective, of unshakable -steadiness, proclaimed him as a master of -men, born a captain, and designed for command. -Well might it be believed that this -man stood ready to sail into the perilous and -uncharted seas, to meet unknown dangers -and horrors, to face and subdue mutineers -who would have thrown him into the ocean -and dared not, though they were many and -he was but one, who kept his course due -west, when even the hearts of his captains -and his pilots fainted within them, remaining -unshaken when the North Star seemed to -tremble in its orbit. Brave and skilful mariners -had there been before, but he was the -bravest and the most skilful man who had -ever sailed blue water.</p> - -<p>These thoughts surged through the hearts -of all who saw the immortal Admiral as he -mounted the steps of the great platform, -where was assembled the authority, the learning, -the piety, the chivalry, and the beauty -of Spain to do him honor—honor to him who -for eighteen years had borne, with sublime -courage and infinite patience, disappoint<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_233" id="Page_233">[Pg 233]</a></span>ment, -contumely, treachery, and ignominy. -Now, at his approach, all rose, and every head -was uncovered. The loftiest height of glory -was his; and yet he remained undazzled, with -a just pride before men, but with humility -before God, for Columbus was, first of all, -a Christian.</p> - -<p>This man Columbus, a foreigner and penniless, -had, by his stupendous genius and matchless -courage, made Spain in one hour the -greatest and most powerful nation in the -world. The boundless territory and the incalculable -riches with which Columbus had -endowed the country brought with them new -duties, new problems, vast responsibilities, -and novel relations with all the countries of -the known world. The more this amazing -discovery of Columbus was analyzed the -greater and deeper it appeared. Not only -Spain, but the future of the human race, was -powerfully and inevitably affected by the -revelation of a new and mysterious world. -These thoughts produced not only a sublime -exaltation, but a solemn and sobering effect -upon the vast multitudes assembled in Barcelona -on that unforgettable day. Especially -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_234" id="Page_234">[Pg 234]</a></span>was this true of the rulers of Spain. The -expulsion of the Moorish invaders from Spanish -soil had been justly regarded as a splendid -national triumph and a great step forward -in Christian civilization. To this was added -a triumph greater than any known to ancient -Rome, beside which all the acquisition of -territory, all conquests of the world appeared -trivial. It was this sublime thought that -paled the cheeks of the great Queen Isabella, -who, with eyes downcast upon her clasped -hands, moved her lips continually in silent -prayer. King Ferdinand, soldier and statesman, -but cold and crafty, saw the vast achievement -of Columbus from a nobler point of -view than ever before. Prince Juan, true -son of his mother, was, like her, pale and concentrated. -It was more than the brilliant -sunrise of Spanish glory; it was the greatest -earthly event the world had ever known.</p> - -<p>In the midst of a breathless silence Columbus -advanced slowly and with dignity. When -he reached the foot of the throne he stopped, -modestly waiting for an invitation from his -sovereigns to proceed further. The Queen, -in her eagerness, moved forward and, stoo<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_235" id="Page_235">[Pg 235]</a></span>ping, -held out her hand. Columbus ascended -the throne and kneeled before the sovereigns. -The Queen, her hand still extended, raised -him, saying:</p> - -<p>“Welcome, Don Christobal Colon, our -Admiral of the Ocean Seas, and Viceroy and -Captain-General of all Lands to the Westward. -We give you our thanks. So does all Spain.”</p> - -<p>Columbus bowed low, and King Ferdinand -repeated the words of the Queen.</p> - -<p>Then, at a signal, the Te Deum burst forth, -singers and instruments in a glorious outburst -of music, the great organ from the open -doors of the cathedral swelling out in melodious -thunder. The King and the Queen and -Columbus fell upon their knees, as did all -present, and the multitudes and throngs in -the streets and the watchers and listeners -on land and sea. All remained kneeling while -the majestic hymn of thanksgiving was sung. -When a solemn silence succeeded, Queen Isabella, -in a clear voice, gave thanks to God -for the great discovery and asked the blessing -of the Almighty upon the new lands to -the westward. A deep and heartfelt amen -surged from the lips and hearts of tens of thou<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_236" id="Page_236">[Pg 236]</a></span>sands -of persons. The Queen and the King, -and all present, then rose from their knees -and seated themselves, Columbus taking the -seat of honor prepared for him by the side -of Queen Isabella. The King and the Queen, -after thanking him formally, desired him to -give an account of his voyage, which he -modestly recounted. When this was over, -the procession passed before the sovereigns -of those who had been upon the voyage, the -Indians that had been brought back, the -strange birds and animals and plants, Columbus -briefly explaining them.</p> - -<p>It was long past noon before the great -ceremonies were finished, and the glittering -assemblage rose to attend the magnificent -banquet to be given in honor of Columbus at -the royal palace. As Diego walked along, -holding the hand of his little brother, his -heart was almost oppressed with the glory -he had seen. He felt as if he had been lifted -into another and higher world for a time, -and he yearned for the simple and familiar -things of life. When he passed Don Felipe -in the orderly assemblage, he looked toward -his friend imploringly. Don Felipe slipped -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_237" id="Page_237">[Pg 237]</a></span>his arm within that of Diego. Then Diego, -glancing up, saw the beautiful dark eyes of -Doņa Luisita fixed upon him with soft brilliance. -The tempest in his heart was calmed, -his soul was soothed. After all that he had -known of distresses and of triumphs, of miseries -and of splendors, of poverty and of riches, of -ignominy and of glory in his short life, he -had never lacked for love or friendship. -Could they remain his, life would be a glorious -conflict, a splendid struggle to the last, -ending with the hope of love eternal.</p> - -<p class="center no-indent">THE END</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="transnote"> -<p class="ph3 no-indent center">TRANSCRIBER’S NOTE:</p> - -<p class="no-indent center">Minor changes have been made to regularize hyphenation and to<br /> -correct obvious typesetters’ errors; variant spellings have been retained.</p></div> - - - - - - - - -<pre> - - - - - -End of Project Gutenberg's The Son of Columbus, by Molly Elliot Seawell - -*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE SON OF COLUMBUS *** - -***** This file should be named 63173-h.htm or 63173-h.zip ***** -This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: - http://www.gutenberg.org/6/3/1/7/63173/ - -Produced by D A Alexander and the Online Distributed -Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive -specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this -eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook -for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, -performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given -away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks -not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the -trademark license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country outside the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you'll have to check the laws of the country where you - are located before using this ebook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The -Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org - - - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the -mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its -volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous -locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt -Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to -date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and -official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -For additional contact information: - - Dr. Gregory B. Newby - Chief Executive and Director - gbnewby@pglaf.org - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. - - - -</pre> - -</body> -</html> diff --git a/old/63173-h/images/cover.jpg b/old/63173-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2701133..0000000 --- a/old/63173-h/images/cover.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/63173-h/images/i_004.jpg b/old/63173-h/images/i_004.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 1d02e35..0000000 --- a/old/63173-h/images/i_004.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/63173-h/images/i_094.jpg b/old/63173-h/images/i_094.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index aed98e1..0000000 --- a/old/63173-h/images/i_094.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/63173-h/images/i_126.jpg b/old/63173-h/images/i_126.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a73c257..0000000 --- a/old/63173-h/images/i_126.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/63173-h/images/i_cover.jpg b/old/63173-h/images/i_cover.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 00490aa..0000000 --- a/old/63173-h/images/i_cover.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/63173-h/images/i_frontispiece.jpg b/old/63173-h/images/i_frontispiece.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 81a1063..0000000 --- a/old/63173-h/images/i_frontispiece.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/63173-h/images/i_title.jpg b/old/63173-h/images/i_title.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 7a23650..0000000 --- a/old/63173-h/images/i_title.jpg +++ /dev/null |
